Fillpac R 12 Spout

BEUMER fillpac
Original Operating Instructions
Machine Type Fillpac R 12 Spout
Machine No. 665PM1 & 665PM2
JOTINDRA STEEL & TUBES LTD.

Project
(KANODIA BIHAR PROJECT)
Customer No. 615-450003
Issue Date 2016-02-15
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 1 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Imprint
Document:
Operating instructions
Author:
BEUMER Group
502, Udyog Vihar, Phase-III, Gurgaon - 122016,
Haryana, INDIA
Copyright for this document remains with the author. Without the author's written consent,
circulation and duplication, distribution and/or editing of this document, utilisation and com-
munication of its content is expressly prohibited.
If the contract specifically authorises the customer to alter the document, these changes must
be identified with reference to the editor. BEUMER Group does not accept liability for chang-
es made to the document and any consequences resulting from said changes.
Document History
Version Date Author Description
1.0 02.10.2013 Venkat First version
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 3 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 5 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Table of Contents
Imprint ................................................................................................................3
Document History .............................................................................................3
1 Important safety instructions ................................................................11

1.1 Use of the operating instructions ............................................................................. 11
1.2 Structure of safety instructions ................................................................................ 12
1.3 Intended use ............................................................................................................ 13
1.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................................... 14
1.5 Operating personnel ................................................................................................ 15
1.5.1 Users ........................................................................................................ 15
1.5.2 Maintenance personnel ............................................................................ 15
1.5.3 Skilled electrician ..................................................................................... 15
1.5.4 Training measures ................................................................................... 15
2 Technical data .........................................................................................17

2.1 Project data.............................................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Ambient conditions ................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Electrotechnical data ................................................................................ 17
2.1.3 Compressed air data ................................................................................ 17
2.1.4 Filling material .......................................................................................... 17
2.1.5 Bags ......................................................................................................... 17
2.2 Machine parameters ................................................................................................ 18
2.2.1 Rotary filling machine ............................................................................... 18
3 Technical description .............................................................................19

3.1 BEUMER fillpac R ................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Main drive unit ......................................................................................................... 20
3.3 Inlet chute ................................................................................................................ 21
3.4 Dedusting hood ....................................................................................................... 22
3.5 Silo ........................................................................................................................... 23
3.6 Filling impeller .......................................................................................................... 24
3.7 Filling module........................................................................................................... 25
3.7.1 Slide valve ................................................................................................ 26
3.7.2 Balance .................................................................................................... 27
3.8 Bag stool .................................................................................................................. 28
3.8.1 Filling spout .............................................................................................. 28
3.8.2 Bag holding unit ....................................................................................... 29
4 Transport .................................................................................................31
4.1 Chapter-related safety instructions .......................................................................... 31
4.2 Transport units ......................................................................................................... 32
4.2.1 Transport of dedusting hood .................................................................... 32
4.2.2 Transport of main drive unit ..................................................................... 33
4.2.3 Transport of silo ....................................................................................... 34
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 7 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
4.2.4 Lifting equipment ...................................................................................... 35

4.3 Storage instructions ................................................................................................. 36
5 Installation instructions .........................................................................37

5.2 General assembly notes .......................................................................................... 38
5.2.1 Preparation of installation ......................................................................... 38
5.2.2 Welding work ............................................................................................ 38
5.2.3 Tools......................................................................................................... 39
5.2.4 Tightening torques for bolts in the mechanical engineering
industry ..................................................................................................... 39
5.3 Installation of the machine ....................................................................................... 42
5.3.1 Pre-installation of main drive unit ............................................................. 42
5.3.2 Installation of main supporting frame - part 1........................................... 45
5.3.3 Installation of centring device ................................................................... 48
5.3.4 Installation of main drive motor ................................................................ 49
5.3.5 Installation of inlet chute ........................................................................... 50
5.3.6 Installation of fill level indicator ................................................................ 50
5.3.7 Installation of filling module ...................................................................... 52
5.3.8 Installation of load cell .............................................................................. 54
5.3.9 Alignment of fillpac R ............................................................................... 55
5.4 Checking the installation .......................................................................................... 56
6 Operation .................................................................................................57
6.2 Initial start-up ........................................................................................................... 58
6.3 Emergency stop circuit ............................................................................................ 59
6.4 Malfunctions............................................................................................................. 60
6.5 Operation ................................................................................................................. 61
6.6 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 62
7 Maintenance and Repair.........................................................................65

7.1 Section safety instructions ....................................................................................... 65
7.2 Inspection and maintenance list .............................................................................. 66
7.3 Maintenance instructions ......................................................................................... 70
7.4 Cleaning and check of the filling module ................................................................. 72
7.5 How to replace the hose between filling spout and slide valve ............................... 74
7.6 General lubrication instructions ............................................................................... 75
7.6.1 Lubricant change on geared motors ........................................................ 75
7.6.2 Lubrication instructions ............................................................................ 75
8 De-commissioning ..................................................................................79
8.1 Disassembly notes .................................................................................................. 80
8.2 Waste disposal ........................................................................................................ 81
8.2.1 Lubricant................................................................................................... 81
8.2.2 Motors and gear units .............................................................................. 81
8.2.3 Machine actuators .................................................................................... 81
8.2.4 Electric parts ............................................................................................ 81
8 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
9 Annexe .....................................................................................................83
9.1 Applicable documents ............................................................................................. 83
9.2 Product Surveillance Form ...................................................................................... 84
9.3 Table of Figures ....................................................................................................... 85
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 9 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Important safety instructions
1 Important safety instructions

1.1 Use of the operating instructions
These operating instructions help you to familiarise yourself with the machine and its desig-
nated applications. The operating instructions contain important information on how to oper-
ate the machine safely, correctly and most efficiently.
The operating instructions are a component of the machine and must remain with the ma-
chine for the entirety of its service life. Keep the operating instructions near the machine and
make them available to all persons working with the machine.
Pass the operating instructions on to any other owners or users.
Before starting operation

Before operating the machine, observe the following items:
● Read the operating instructions in order to avoid accidents or damage.
● Read the operating instructions of the subsupplier. Further information: chapter 9.1
"Applicable documents", page 83
● Read the chapter "Important safety instructions".
● Observe the safety labels on the machine.
Maintenance of safety standards

BEUMER kindly asks to report immediately all malfunctions or modifications concerning
BEUMER products. Please use the pre-printed form "Product Surveillance" to inform us of
errors or necessary additions to the machine, or the operating instructions. Further informati-
on: chapter 9.2 "Product Surveillance Form", page 84
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 11 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
1.2 Structure of safety instructions

The safety messages included in these operating instructions are subdivided into three haz-
ard levels, depending on the seriousness of the potential damage and the likelihood the
damage will occur. The safety alert symbol is only used to address practices related to per-
sonal injury. The seriousness of the potential damage is indicated with a signal word.
DANGER This signal word indicates a dangerous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING This signal word indicates a dangerous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION This signal word indicates a dangerous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moderate injury.
Structure of safety instructions:
WARNING
Description of the possible source of danger
Possible consequences that could occur if the safety instructions are ignored
► Measures to prevent the hazard
Property damage
NOTICE This signal word points to the risk of property damage but does not include
physical injury.
Structure of a note for property damage:
NOTICE
Description of the possible source of danger
Possible damage that could occur if the message is ignored.
► Measures for avoiding the damage
Important
Note
12 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
1.3 Intended use

Use
Intended use of the machine includes:
● Packing easy-flowing powdery materials like cement into valve bags
● Simultaneous weighing of the bags
● The use of the machine in an industrial environment
● Controlling the machine in accordance with manufacturer specifications
Using the equipment for other purposes than those mentioned above is considered contrary
to its intended use.
The machine may only be operated in the arrangement shown on the installation drawing.
Misuse
WARNING
Hazard due to misuse!
► Examples of a reasonably foreseeable misuse:
Disregard of the operating instructions
Transport of material/items which are not specified in the contract and in these operating
instructions
Maintenance work on a machine which is not secured
Switching on the machine without functional safeguards
Use of the machine for another project or in another arrangement without a new risk as-
sessment
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 13 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
1.4 Safety marking

Safety instructions are attached to the machine, which indicate possible residual risks. The
arrangement of the safety instructions can be found in the applicable documents. Other in-
formation: chapter 9.1 "Applicable documents", page 83
Risk of injury, maintenance Warning of electric shock
Fig. 1: "Risk of injury, maintenance (27900)" Fig. 2: "Electric shock (27529)"
Risk of injury, compressed air Shearing danger, stretch wrapper
Fig. 3: "Risk of injury, compressed air (14720)" Fig. 4: "Shearing danger, stretch wrapper (28988)"
14 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
1.5 Operating personnel

The operating personnel includes all persons responsible for the installation, operation, set-
up, maintenance, cleaning, repair or transport of machines. These include:
● Users
● Maintenance personnel
● Skilled electricians
The operating personnel must meet various requirements in order to fulfil the tasks, in addi-
tion to possessing knowledge of the safety regulations and accident prevention regulations.
1.5.1 Users
The users must fulfil the following requirements:
● Operate and supervise the machine
● Recognise and eliminate minor malfunctions in the machine
● Clean the machine, to maintain functionality
● Ensure that the safety devices are clean and accessible
1.5.2 Maintenance personnel

The maintenance personnel must be capable of performing the following tasks:
● Assemble subassemblies for machines and commission them
● Maintain machines, document maintenance and inspection intervals
● Operate and supervise the machine
● Perform functional tests and eliminate malfunctions
● Repair or replace defective components and parts subject to wear and tear
● Clean the machine, to maintain functionality
● Ensure that the safety devices are clean and accessible
● Dismantle machines and metal constructions
Independent work requires the following competencies:
● Six-month experience of maintaining conveying systems
● Supplementary training for work to be carried out on hydraulic or pneumatic systems
1.5.3 Skilled electrician

A skilled electrician must fulfil the following requirements:
● Basic knowledge of electrical engineering, measurement technology and control technol-
ogy
● Ability to recognise risks and effects of electrical current
● Application of safety measures and field-specific regulations
● Knowledge of electrical systems and parts
● Knowledge of company-specific electrotechnical requirements
1.5.4 Training measures

Training measures tailored to the different groups are provided for the operating personnel.
The participants and the training contents are recorded in the training certificate. File a copy
of the training certificate in the operating instructions. Other information: chapter 9.1
"Applicable documents", page 83
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 15 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
The machine must only be operated by trained operating personnel.
16 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Technical data
2 Technical data
2.1 Project data
2.1.1 Ambient conditions
Installation height 86 MSL
Ambient temperature +13 °C to +45 °C
Place of installation in the building
2.1.2 Electrotechnical data

Rated voltage for the system 3/N/PE AC 415 V / 50 Hz
Rated voltage for electromechanic transmitters DC 24 V
Rated voltage for electronic transmitters DC 24 V
Permissible voltage fluctuation ± 10 %
2.1.3 Compressed air data

Operating pressure 6 bar
Input pressure 10 bar

3
Water content 9.356 mg/m
Particle size 40 µm
3
Oil content max. 0,5 mg/m
2.1.4 Filling material

Material Cement
Grain size 0 - 1 mm, 3400 - 5000 Blaine
Max. steady-state temperature of the material 80 °C
Moisture of material 0,5 %
2.1.5 Bags
Bag type Jute/HDPE/Paper
Package length 300 - 650 mm
Package width 300 - 480 mm
Bag valve width 80 -200 mm
Filling weight 50 kg
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 17 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Technical data
2.2 Machine parameters

2.2.1 Rotary filling machine
Machine type Turbine Rotary Filling Machine- Double Discharge
Number of filling spouts 12
Filling capacity approx. 180TPH/3600 bags/h at a fill weight of 50

kg, max.
approx. 180TPH/3600 bags/h at a fill weight of 50

kg, max.
Weighing precision With an average of 20 consecutive weighings of

the same socket: (+/-) 150 g The weighing accu-
racy and performance are dependent on panel
weight from-and the flow behavior of the product
and set a continuous operation at a relatively
constant bulk density ahead.
Mean power input 25 kW
Installed power 68,2 kW
Noise emission < 74 dB(A)
18 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Technical description
3 Technical description
3.1 BEUMER fillpac R
Fig. 5: "fillpac R (illustration no.: 46661)"
1 Main supporting frame 2 Dedusting hood

3 Silo 4 Filling module
5 Centring device 6 Inlet chute
7 Main drive unit
The fillpac R is a rotating filling machine for packing easy flowing powdery material like ce-
ment into bags and simultaneous weighing.
The fillpac R is composed of the following parts:
● Main drive unit
● Supporting frame
● Dedusting hood
● Silo
● Filling module
● Filling impeller
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 19 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
3.2 Main drive unit
Fig. 6: "Main drive unit (illustration no: 45717)"

The whole fillpac R is suspended in the supporting frame, which is fastened to the main sup-
porting frame. The main drive unit consists of two sub-assemblies: the drive unit and the main
drive motor. The drive unit consists of the gear unit, the drive shaft, the central feed, the sup-
porting frame and the cover plate. The drive shaft is driven by the main drive motor.
20 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
3.3 Inlet chute
Fig. 7: "Inlet chute illustration no.: 46369"

The cement is fed through the inlet chute, which is made of sheet metal. The upper end of
the chute is fastened to the discharge chute of the flow control gate. The lower end is insert-
ed into the silo without being further fixed.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 21 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
3.4 Dedusting hood
Fig. 8: "Dedusting hood illustration no.: 46370"

The dedusting hood is made of sheet metal. The fill level indicator is supported by the de-
dusting hood and is connected to the flow control gate. Once the cement has reached a de-
termined level in the silo, the fill level indicator is activated and closes the flow control gate.
The flange of the dedusting hood is connected to the dedusting unit to remove the dust from
the fillpac.
22 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
3.5 Silo
Fig. 9: "Silo illustration no.: 45768"

The silo contains the cement and distributes it to the bags through the filling impeller. The
cement flows through the inlet chute to the silo. All filling modules are connected to the silo.
The inlets of the filling impellers are connected to the outlet openings of the silo. The cement
flows into the bags through theses filling impellers. The silo is connected to the shaft of the
main drive unit and rotated by the same.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 23 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
3.6 Filling impeller
Fig. 10: "Filling impeller (55311)"
1 Ventilation nozzle 2 Impeller

3 Material outlet 4 Shaft
5 Material inlet
The filling impeller transports the material coming from the silo to the filling spout by means of
a rotary impeller. Ventilation nozzles ventilate the housing of the filling impeller during the
filling process in order to fluidise the material. The impeller is driven by a three-phase motor.
24 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
3.7 Filling module
Fig. 11: "Filling module (illustration no.: 45716)"

The filling module is composed of base frame, mounting frame for the control cabinet, slide
valve, bag stool with tipper frame, motor of the filling impeller, filling impeller, protective cover
for the V-belt, load cell and leaf springs.
The filling module is compact in design and is bolted to the filling impeller. The top of the fill-
ing module is connected to the silo by a plate. The lower end is connected to the centring
device.
The load cell is positioned behind the control cabinet. The filling spout is fastened to the bag
stool. The slide valve is controlled by a three-position cylinder. A bag holding cylinder is posi-
tioned over the filling spout.
The bag stool consists of the bag stool and the tipper frame with saddle. The bag stool is
connected to the base frame of the filling module by four leaf springs. The cylinder for bag
discharge is connected to the tipper frame.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 25 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
3.7.1 Slide valve
Fig. 12: "Slide valve (55317)"
1 Slide valve plate 2 Clamping device

3 Stud with compression spring 4 Slide valve pressure plate
The slide valve separates the material feed between the filling impeller and the filling spout.
The three-position cylinder moves the slide valve plate to the working positions "Coarse flow",
"Fine flow" and "Closed". To prevent the slide valve plate from running without clearance in
the slide valve, the compression springs press the slide valve pressure plate against the slide
valve plate.
26 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
3.7.2 Balance
Fig. 13: "Balance (54088)"
1 Balance 2 Drawbar
The balance is tared once the bag has been placed. The filling process stops as soon as the
bag has reached its setpoint weight. The drawbar connects the load cell of the balance with
the bag stool. Observe the manufacturers' instructions:
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 27 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
3.8 Bag stool
Fig. 14: "Bag stool (53537)"
1 Cylinder 2 Tipper frame

3 Bag holding unit 4 Filling spout
5 Saddle 6 Height adjustment of saddle
The bag is filled and weighed on the bag stool.

The bag stool consists of the tipper frame, the filling spout, the bag holding unit and the sad-
dle.
The device for height adjustment enables to adapt the saddle height to the bag size. The bag
with opened bag valve is placed on the filling spout for filling and the bag holding unit holds it
on the filling spout. The saddle supports the bag from below. The bag stool is suspended to
the drawbar which leads the vertical loads to the load cell. The tipper frame is tilted forward
by the cylinder in order to remove the full bag from the filling spout.
3.8.1 Filling spout
Fig. 15: "Filling spout (53531)"
1 Connecting flange 3 Tube

3 Material outlet
28 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
The filling spout serves to fill the bag. The material flows through the filling spout into the bag.
The filling spout is mounted to the bag stool with the connecting flange. The bag with opened
bag valve is placed on the filling spout for filling and the bag holding unit holds it on the filling
spout.
3.8.2 Bag holding unit
Fig. 16: "Bag holding unit (55316)"
1 Proximity switch 2 Bag holding cylinder

3 Buffer
The bag holding unit keeps the bag on the filling spout during the filling process. Once the
bag with opened bag valve has been placed on the filling spout, the bag holding cylinder
moves downwards and the buffer holds the bag.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 29 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Transport
4 Transport
4.1 Chapter-related safety instructions
WARNING
Hazard due to suspended loads
Serious injuries due to falling parts
► Never work or stand under suspended loads.
► Secure the working area against unauthorised access.
► Use only suitable and correctly functioning lifting equipment and load carrying attach-
ments of sufficient rated load. The weight of the individual shipping units is indicated on
the packaging.
► Employ only experienced operating personnel to fasten loads and instruct crane opera-
tors.
► Lift the load slightly to determine the centre of gravity.
► Transport aids, transport safety devices and covers must not be removed before installa-
tion.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 31 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Transport
4.2 Transport units

Lifting equipment of sufficient load is required for transport and installation. The tables below
only show the largest and heaviest subassemblies. The weights indicated are reference val-
ues which may differ from the real weights.
A safety margin of about 10 % is to be considered in any case.
The main transport units are the following:
Subassembly Weight in kg
Main supporting frame (4 parts) 590
Dedusting hood 1,200
Silo 1,700
Main drive unit 1,040
Motor with V-belt pulley and V-belt of main drive 75

unit
Filling modules (max. 4 units) secured in a 1,750

transport device
4.2.1 Transport of dedusting hood

NOTICE Do not use these lifting lugs when other units of the fillpac are assembled with the
dedusting hood.
In general, dedusting hoods for the fillpac R with up to 12 filling modules are dispatched as
single unit.
The dedusting hood can be shipped in two separate parts. If required assemble the dedusting
hood as single unit.
Fig. 17: "Lifting lugs on the dedusting hood (illustration no.: 47059)"
1. Fasten the load carrier to the lifting lugs.
32 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Transport
2. If necessary, protect the transport unit from damage by the load carrier.
4.2.2 Transport of main drive unit

The main drive unit consists of the supporting frame which is used to lift the fillpac together
with other subassemblies as dedusting hood, silo etc.
Fig. 18: "Lifting lugs on the main drive unit (illustration no.: 47080)"
1. Fasten the load carrier to the four lifting lugs.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 33 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Transport
4.2.3 Transport of silo

NOTICE Do not use these lifting lugs when other subassemblies of the fillpac R are
mounted to the silo.The main drive unit can be mounted to the silo.
Fig. 19: "Lifting lugs on the silo (illustration no.: 47060)"

1. Fasten the load carrier to the four lifting lugs.
34 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Transport
4.2.4 Lifting equipment

A fork-lift truck with a load of 10 t is required to transport and lift the pallets. The fork prongs
must have a length of at least 2,300 mm.
Fig. 20: "Filling modules, transport device (illustration no: 52770)"

The supports for fork prongs are fastened in a way that the centre of gravity of the shipping
unit is between the fork prongs. The supports for fork prongs are removed only when the
hoist is completely mounted. Load carrying attachments can be fastened to the lifting lugs
when lifting by crane.
The filling modules are transported with a fork-lift truck.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 35 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Transport
4.3 Storage instructions
NOTICE
General information
► If the storage instructions are not followed, the warranty for the equipment will lapse.
► The machine should be placed in a closed environment in order to protect it against rain,
sunlight and humidity.
► Additional protection and conservation measures become necessary if the storage peri-
od exceeds 6 months.
NOTICE
Corrosion damage
Rusting of machine parts
► Protect components against rain, sun, dust and mechanical damage.
► Observe the max. storage time of 12 months.
► Observe regulations for long-term storage.
Anti-friction bearings
NOTICE
Corrosion of the anti-friction bearings
A unilateral lubricant deposit on the anti-friction bearings can lead to an accumulation of the
condensation in the anti-friction bearings. The anti-friction bearings may corrode.
► Turn all of the anti-friction bearings by hand at regular intervals of 3 months.
Long-term storage
NOTICE
Improper storage of the machine
Damage due to corrosion and ageing
► Protect the parts against mechanical damage and deposits.
► Protect the parts against direct sunlight and humidity.
► Store the parts at a place with convenient storage temperature and relative air humidity.
The ideal storage temperature is between -10 °C and +25 °C.
The relative air humidity is below 65 %.
► Check the coat of paint as well as the corrosion protection of the bright surfaces and
repair them, if required.
► Observe storage regulations from the manufacturers.
36 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Installation instructions
5 Installation instructions
WARNING
Hazard due to suspended loads
Serious injuries due to falling parts
► Never work or stand under suspended loads.
► Secure the working area against unauthorised access.
► Use only suitable and correctly functioning lifting equipment and load carrying attach-
ments of sufficient rated load. The weight of the individual shipping units is indicated on
the packaging.
► Employ only experienced operating personnel to fasten loads and instruct crane opera-
tors.
► Lift the load slightly to determine the centre of gravity.
► Transport aids, transport safety devices and covers must not be removed before installa-
tion.
WARNING
Hazard due to tipping or unsecured components!
Severe injuries by components
► During assembly, the working area has to be secured according to the major modules.
► Attach reference plates forbidding unauthorised persons to enter.
► Fasten components adequately before removing the lifting equipment.
► Secure tools from falling down.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 37 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
5.2 General assembly notes

5.2.1 Preparation of installation
Before you start with the actual installation of the equipment, a thorough inspection of the site
is necessary. The site is to be cleared of all excess material to allow for free and easy move-
ment of personnel and the equipments they may be using.
All segment anchors and other steel elements embedded in concrete must be checked for
cleanliness, accuracy of location and alignment.
The general arrangement drawing and other plant layout drawings are to be referred to for
the correct position and orientation of the equipment.
During the installation of the equipment, all safety rules for the prevention of accidents are to
be followed strictly.
Failure to observe and follow all safety instructions may result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
The place of installation must be appropriate for the static and dynamic loads and must be
free from vibrations.
During project planning, sufficient space around the machine must be ensured in order to
facilitate installation and maintenance work.
The positions of the supporting points should be measured and recorded before installation.
This way, the material for backing can be assigned to the respective supports.
The necessary dimensions are indicated in the installation drawing included in the annexe to
these operating instructions.
Preparations for installation of fillpac R

The final installation requires the presence of a BEUMER Group supervisor for supervising
the installation and aligning the machine.
On site, the supervisor will decide on the way and sequence of installation.
The installation sequence depends on the space available on site.
Therefore, the following installation description can only serve as an aid and not as an obliga-
tory instruction.
1. Mark the centre point of the fillpac.
2. Compare the position of the transport route with the dimension shown on the installation
drawing.
3. Align the equipment centrally to the transport route. Check the position of the equipment
by plummet.
5.2.2 Welding work
NOTICE
Heat generation and flying sparks!
Damage to the components
► In order to avoid any damage, protect electrical components against flying sparks or
dismount them.
38 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
► Cover parts made of rubber and plastic.
If any welding, flame-cutting and separating work is necessary - also on the building itself -
the electric parts have to be protected adequately. During welding, flame cutting and separat-
ing work on the machine itself, it is required to checked if there are installations on the back-
side of the surfaces being processed. The temperatures that occur during welding work may
not exceed 55 °C near the electric parts.
5.2.3 Tools
The following tools are required for installing the machine:
● Ring spanner (size 8 - 55)
● Open-end spanner (size 8 - 55)
● Torque wrench
● Welding machine
● Cutting torch
● Right-angle grinder
● Drilling machine, percussion drill
● Measuring instruments: Water level, plummet, measuring tape
The tools listed are to be considered basic equipment. Not all sizes of the various tools are
required.
In addition, the following lifting equipment will be required for the subassemblies:
● Crane
● Fork-lift truck (5 t)
● Mechanical winch (5 t)
● Ropes, chains, fastening devices
5.2.4 Tightening torques for bolts in the mechanical engineering industry

Galvanised bolts Black, untreated bolts
Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm)
d 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
M 3,52 4.5 9.5 13 16 4,4 4.8 10 14 17

6
M 9 11 23 32 39 11 12 25 35 41
8
M 17 22 46 64 77 21 23 49 69 83
10
M 30 38 80 110 135 37 40 86 120 145

12
M 47 60 125 180 215 59 64 135 190 230

14
M 72 92 195 275 330 90 98 210 295 355

16
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 39 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
d 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
M 107 134 286 400 480 134 144 307 429 515
18
M 140 180 385 540 650 175 190 410 580 690
20
M 209 262 588 823 988 261 282 631 884 1061
22
M 241 305 660 930 1100 302 330 710 1000 1200
24
M 389 486 1038 1453 1744 486 523 1113 1559 1873
27
M 209 620 1350 1850 2250 596 660 1450 2000 2400
30
M 717 897 1914 2680 3216 896 965 2053 2876 3456
33
M 831 1050 2300 3200 3850 1039 1150 2450 3450 4150
36
M 1196 1496 3191 4468 5362 1495 1608 3423 4794 5759
39
M 1328 1700 3650 5150 6200 1658 1850 3950 5550 6650
42
M 1847 2309 4925 6895 8274 2309 2483 5284 7399 8886
45
M 1937 2600 5550 7800 9350 2420 2800 5950 8400 10100
48
M 2872 3590 7661 10725 12870 3590 2859 8220 11508 13822
52
M 3578 4473 9543 13360 16032 4473 4808 10239 14335 17218
56
M 4442 5553 11847 16586 19903 5553 5969 12711 17796 21375
60
M 5347 6684 14259 19963 23956 6684 7285 15299 21421 25728
64
M 6470 8088 17253 24154 28985 8088 8694 18512 25918 31129
68
M 7742 9676 20647 28906 34687 9676 10401 22154 31016 37253
72
M 9167 11459 24446 41069 34224 11459 12318 26230 36722 44108
76
M 10759 13450 28693 40170 48204 13449 14458 30788 43103 51771
80
40 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
d 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
M 10401 13001 27736 38830 46596 13001 13976 29761 41665 50044
85
M 15586 19483 41563 58188 69826 19483 20944 44597 62435 71993
90
The tightening torques in drawings or the installation chapter have priority over the values in
the tightening torque list!
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 41 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
5.3 Installation of the machine

5.3.1 Pre-installation of main drive unit
Installation of main supporting frame - part 2 with dedusting hood, main drive unit and silo
Assembling of frames for dedusting hood with the dedusting hood

Ensure the correct orientation of the dedusting hood with the opening for the inlet chute and
the suction connection.
Refer to the GA-drawing and plant layout.
Fig. 21: "Frames for dedusting hood (illustration no.: 47628)"
1 Frames for dedusting hood 2 Hexagon head bolt M12 x 35

3 Dedusting hood
1. The frames for dedusting hood are fastened to the dedusting hood using hexagon head
bolts M12 x 35.
42 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Mounting the silo to the main drive unit
Fig. 22: "Silo and drive shaft (illustration no.: 48400)"
1 Silo 2 Main drive shaft

3 Hexagon head bolt M10 x 130 4 Parallel key
5 Allen screw M10 x 20
1. Place the silo on the raised structure suitable for inserting the shaft.
Control the movement of the shaft with a lifting rope.
2. Insert the shaft from the bottom of the silo.

3. Align the ring of the silo above the rings of the shaft drive.
Allen screws are used for holding the parallel key.
4. Place and fasten the parallel keys between the upper ring of the drive shaft and the lower
ring of silo.
5. Tighten the shaft and the silo using hexagon head bolts M10 x 130.
6. Tighten the hexagon head bolts M16 in order to align the silo and to position the shaft
centrally.
7. Assemble the main drive unit with the shaft.
→ Main drive unit is connected to the silo by the shaft.
Main drive unit is assembled with the dedusting hood.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 43 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Assembling of dedusting hood with main drive unit

Ensure the correct orientation of the main drive unit with the dedusting hood and the support-
ing frame of the fillpac R.
Refer to the GA-drawing and the project drawing.
Fig. 23: "Main supporting frame (illustration no.: 47100)"
1 Dedusting hood 2 Main supporting frame - part 2

3 Drive shaft 4 Hexagon head bolt M12 x 120
5 Supporting frame 6 Silo
7 Hexagon head bolt M12 x 40 8 Cover plate
10 Silo
1. Assemble the support frame and the drive shaft using a labyrinth seal.
2. Place the dedusting hood on the silo.
3. Align the cover plate with the dedusting frame.
4. Fasten the cover plate to the dedusting hood using the bolts M12 x 40.
→ Assembly of the dedusting hood with the main drive unit is completed.
Main drive unit is connected to the silo by the shaft.
Assembling of main supporting frame - part 2 with the main drive unit
1. Align the supporting frame with the main supporting frame - part 2.
2. Insert and tighten the four bolts M12 x 120 with the main drive unit and the supporting
frame - part 2.
→ Installation of the main drive unit with the main supporting frame - part 2 is completed.
Main drive unit is connected to the silo by the shaft.
Main drive unit is assembled with the dedusting hood.
44 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
5.3.2 Installation of main supporting frame - part 1

The main supporting frame of fillpac R is delivered in 4 parts which are assembled at the
place of installation.
● Main supporting frame - part 1
● Main supporting frame - part 2
The main supporting frame - part 2 is assembled with other subassemblies before instal-
lation.
Subassemblies as given below
- Dedusting hood
- Main drive unit
- Silo
● Main supporting frame - part 3 (side)
● Main supporting frame - part 4 (side)
Fig. 24: "Installation of main supporting frame (illustration no.: 46691)"
1 Main supporting frame - part 1 2 Segment anchors

3 Washer 4 Foundation
1. Place the main supporting frame - part 1 on the upper foundation structure and tighten
the bolt connections slightly.
2. Straighten the frame and align it with the foundation holes.
3. Tighten the segment anchors.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 45 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Installation of main supporting frame - part 3 and part 4

Before mounting part 3 and 4 of the main supporting frame check the correct orientation of
the fillpac R with the help of the installation drawing.
Fig. 25: "Installation of the main supporting frame - part 3 and part 4 (illustration no.: 46795)"
1 Main supporting frame - part 3 (side) 2 Main supporting frame - part 4 (side)
3 Hexagon head bolt M12 X 150
1. Align the main supporting frame - part 3 (side) with frame 1 and fasten it with hexagon
head bolts (M12 x 150).
2. Align the main supporting frame - part 4 (side) with frame 1 and fasten it with hexagon
head bolts (M12 X 150).
3. Weld the side frames with frame 1.
The other end of the side frames is open to receive the unit consisting of frame 2 and the
fillpac.
Installation of main supporting frame - part 2
Rotate the pre-assembled main drive unit according to the installation requirements.
46 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Refer to the installation drawing for correct orientation.
Fig. 26: "Installation of main supporting frame - part 2 (illustration no.: 47105)"
1 Hexagon head bolt M12 x 120 2 Lifting lugs

3 Segment anchor M16 x 200
Use the lifting lugs for controlling the movement of the unit while installing it.
Use a levelling device to adjust the assembled unit for horizontal and vertical straightness.
1. Align the supporting frame with the main supporting frame - part 1.
2. Tighten the bolts M12 x 120 between the supporting frame and the main supporting frame
- part 1.
3. Align the main supporting frame - part 2 with the foundation holes.
4. Tighten the segment anchors.
→ The installation of the main supporting frame is completed.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 47 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
5.3.3 Installation of centring device

The centring device is delivered in several parts and must be assembled at the place of in-
stallation.
Fig. 27: "Centring device (illustration no.: 52628)"
1 Hexagon head bolt M16 x 80 2 Centring device

3 Positioning device 4 Hexagon head bolt M12 x 50
5 Journal 6 Plate of journal
7 Distance piece
Requirements
● The technical documents are available.
● Check the foundation for installing the centring device.
● The axes and heights are indicated.
● The bolts, nuts and washers for anchoring the centring device are available.
● Make sure that the pneumatic connection and the connection for the lubrication pipe are
available.
WARNING
Hazard due to tipping lateral parts of the centring device
Serious injuries or death
► Before transport, secure the lateral part against tipping.
Installation of centring device

Make sure that the housing of the centre bearing is fastened to the foundation.
1. Install the journal on the positioning device.
2. Align the plate of journal, the distance piece and the centring device with the journal.
3. Tighten the hexagon head bolts M16 in order to hold the centring device in position.
48 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
→ The installation of the centring device is completed.
5.3.4 Installation of main drive motor

The main drive motor is delivered in several parts and the subassemblies have to be assem-
bled at the place of installation.
Fig. 28: "Installation of main drive motor (illustration no.: 47081)"
1 Motor bracket 2 Hexagon head bolt M20 x 90

3 Threaded rod M20 x 550 4 Main supporting frame
5 Support for motor bracket 6 Hexagon head bolt M10 x 30
7 V-belt 8 Hexagon head bolt M10 x 45
Requirements
● The main supporting frame of the fillpac R has been installed, inspected and accepted.
● The axes and heights are indicated.
● The bolts, nuts and washers for anchoring the motor bracket and the motor are available.
Installation of main drive motor

1. Place the motor bracket on the main supporting frame of the fillpac R.
2. Tighten the hexagon head bolt M10 x 45 to hold the bracket in position.
3. Align the support of the motor bracket to the motor bracket and slightly tighten the hexa-
gon head bolt M10 x 30.
4. Align the bracket with the threaded rod.
5. Align the main drive motor to the bracket and insert the four hexagon head bolts to hold
the main drive motor in position.
6. Tighten the hexagon head bolts of the main drive motor.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 49 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
The motor bracket can be rotated to fasten the V-belt.
7. The V-belt is connected to the V-belt pulley.

8. Tighten the V-belt by using the threaded rod.
→ The installation of the main drive motor is completed.
5.3.5 Installation of inlet chute

Inlet chutes are installed on top of the dedusting hood. The upper end of the inlet chute is
fastened to the discharge chute of the flow control gate.
Fig. 29: "Installation of inlet chute (illustration no.: 47109)"
1 Inlet chute 2 Dedusting hood

3 Hexagon head bolt M12 x 40 4 Frame of dedusting hood
5 Sealing profile
Requirements
● Make sure that the inlet chute is aligned correctly to the dedusting hood and to the dis-
charge chute of the flow control gate.
● The GA-drawing and the project drawing are available.
1. Align the lower end of the inlet chute to the opening for the inlet chute in the dedusting
hood.
→ The installation of the inlet chute is completed.
5.3.6 Installation of fill level indicator

The fill level indicator is installed at top of the dedusting hood. The upper end of the fill level
indicator is fastened to the dedusting hood.
50 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
The lower end of the fill level indicator is loose inside the silo and not further fastened.
Fig. 30: "Installation of fill level indicator (graphic id: 47643)"
1 Dedusting hood 2 Hexagon head bolt M8x25

3 Fill level indicator
Requirements
● The GA-drawing and the project drawing are available.
● The bolts, nuts and washers for anchoring the fill level indicator are available.
1. The fill level indicators are fastened to the dedusting hood with hexagon head bolts
M8x25.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 51 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
5.3.7 Installation of filling module

The filling modules are delivered separately in a transport device (max. 4 per device).
Fig. 31: "Installation of filling module (illustration no.: 52778)"
1 Hexagon head bolt M 8 x 20 2 Hexagon head bolt M 12 x 35

3 Hexagon head bolt M 12 x 30 4 Silo
5 Filling module 6 Filling impeller
7 Hexagon head bolt M 12 x 35 8 Rope for holding and lifting
Requirements
● Make sure that the frame of the centring device is installed.
● Make sure that the base frame of the filling module is assembled with other subassem-
blies (bag stool with tipper frame, load cell (not connected), threaded spindle and set of
leaf springs) of the filling module.
● The bolts and washers for anchoring the filling module are available.
CAUTION
Hazard due to tipping of the filling module
► Before removing the filling module from the transport device, secure the filling module
with the rope of the hoist.
1. Remove the filling module from the transport device.
Use the rope of the hoist in order to lift and hold the filling module in the correct position
during installation.
Mounting the filling module to the silo

The filling module is bolted at two points to the silo.
1. Flange on top of the filling module
2. Holders for the filling module on each side of the base frame of the filling module
52 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
2. Align the connecting surface of the filling module to the silo.

3. Tighten the hexagon head bolt M 12 x 30 to fasten the holders of the filling module to the
holders of the silo.
4. Tighten the hexagon head bolt M 8 x 20 to fasten the top of the filling module to the silo.
Mounting the filling module to the frame of the centring device

5. Insert the M 12 hexagon head bolt into the frame of the centring device to fasten the
holder for the filling module.
6. Tighten the hexagon head bolt inserted in the frame of the centring device on both sides.
Mounting the filling impeller to the silo

The filling impeller is mounted on the rear side of the filling module.
7. Align the filling impeller to the bottom plate of the silo.
8. Tighten the hexagon head bolts M 12 x 35 at all four points in order to hold the filling im-
peller in position.
→ The installation of the filling module is completed.
Installation sequence for filling module
Fig. 32: "Installation sequence for filling module (illustration no.: 46739)"
1. When mounting the filling modules make sure that the diagonal installation sequence is
observed.
2. Repeat the steps described above for installing all of the filling modules.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 53 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
5.3.8 Installation of load cell

The load cell is delivered with the filling module.
Fig. 33: "Installation of load cell (illustration no.: 52891)"
1 Threaded spindle M 8 2 Load cell

3 Hexagon head bolt M 8 x 55 4 Filling module
Requirements
● Make sure that the filling module has been installed.
● The bolts, nuts and washers for anchoring the load cell are available.
1. Align the load cell with the filling module and the threaded spindle.
2. Tighten the hexagon head bolts M 8 x 55 and the threaded spindle M 8 in order to hold
the load cell.
54 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
5.3.9 Alignment of fillpac R

Make sure that the filling modules and load cells have been installed.
Fig. 34: "Alignment of fillpac R (illustration no.: 47504)"
1 Centre line 2 Hexagon head bolts M 20 x 150

3 Hexagon head bolts M 16 x 180 4 Hexagon head bolts M 12 x 50
1. Align the fillpac R to the machine centre line by using the hexagon head bolts shown in
the illustration.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 55 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
5.4 Checking the installation

Geared motor
1. Check the fastening of the geared motor.
2. Check the fastening of the torque arm.
3. Check whether the vent plug of the geared unit has been mounted properly.
→ The arrangement can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Screw and bolt connections

1. Check the screw and bolt connections for completeness.
2. Check the screw and bolt connections for interference fit. For notes regarding the re-
quired tightening torques see
Safeguards
1. Check the safeguards for completeness.
2. Check whether the safeguards have been mounted properly.
Safety devices
1. Check the safety devices for completeness.
2. Check whether the safeguards have been mounted properly.
56 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
6 Operation
WARNING
Automatic start-up of the machine!
Severe injury caused by moving parts
► The machine starts automatically with the material feed.
Before starting up or setting the machine in motion, make sure that nobody is inside the
safeguard.
WARNING
Defective safety devices!
If the safety devices are dismounted or not functional during commissioning, there is risk of
severe injuries.
► Operate the machine only if all protective and safety devices are installed and fully func-
tional.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 57 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
6.2 Initial start-up

Before starting the machine, check the following points:
● The installation has been carried out according to the operating instructions.
● The fillpac is aligned with respect to its concentricity.
● When the fillpac is completely aligned and assembled, all segment anchors are tightened.
● The dedusting hood is connected to the dedusting unit.
● The compressed-air supply is connected to the pipe system through a rotary union.
● The cables of the filling impeller motors are connected to the respective filling module
control cabinet.
● All electrical and electronic elements are properly cabled, and the machine is connected
to the power supply.
● The drive unit has been correctly mounted, aligned and filled with lubricant according to
the lubrication list.
● The bearings have been correctly mounted, aligned and filled with lubricant according to
the lubrication list.
● The operating voltage corresponds to the voltage indicated on the motor rating plate.
● The sense of rotation of the drive motor corresponds to the requirement.
● The main control cabinet is installed at a suitable place.
● All adjacent systems are installed near the fillpac R as per installation drawing.
● There are no foreign bodies (tools, auxiliary material, etc.) in the machine.
● The intended safety devices have been mounted and are fully functional.
The machine must only be operated by trained operating personnel. Further information:
chapter 1.5.4 "Training measures", page 15
58 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
6.3 Emergency stop circuit

The arrangement of the emergency stop controls permits easy access and safe operation. In
situations of danger, one of the emergency stop controls must be activated immediately.
The emergency shutdown has priority over all other commands. As soon as one of the emer-
gency stop controls is activated, all motion sequences of the machine are stopped. Some of
the pneumatic drive units only stop when they have reached the final position. The data re-
quired for the motion sequences of the machine are stored by the programmable logic control
(called PLC in the following chapters).
Examples for emergency stop controls:
● Emergency stop switch
● Pull-wire switch
● Key-operated switch
● Safety doors
● Safety photocells
WARNING
In case of an emergency shutdown, the machine remains energised.
Possible electric shock when touching live wires
► Set the main switch at the control cabinet in position 0 and secure it against unauthor-
ised start-up.
The machine is de-energised.
Activate the emergency stop circuit

The blue illuminated pushbutton, [Reset emergency stop], in the control cabinet/control ter-
minal indicates the following states:
● dark - no voltage or bulb is defective
● rapid flashing - emergency stop control is activated
● slow flashing - emergency stop circuit is ready for closing
● steady light - emergency stop circuit is activated
1. Eliminate the cause that activated the emergency stop switch.
2. If a pull-wire switch has been actuated, check the entire length of the pull wire.
3. No persons are in the machine's danger zone.
4. Unlock all activated emergency stop controls.
5. Activate the [Reset emergency stop] pushbutton.
→ The machine is ready for operation and can be started.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 59 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
6.4 Malfunctions
In the event of malfunctions, the list of malfunctions helps localise the error. If you are unable
to eliminate the malfunction, please contact our Service. In order to help you promptly, Ser-
vice requires the following information:
● Order number
● Machine type
● When did the malfunction occur?
● Extent of malfunction
● Possible cause of malfunction
60 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
6.5 Operation
The fillpac R is automatically operated through the EFS 100TS electronics module.
The EFS 100TS automatic gain-in-weight batching system is controlled by a microprocessor
device that includes a display for the load cell.
For setting and operating the machine refer to the applicable document of EFS 100TS at-
tached.
The fillpac R is compatible with the weighing belt conveyors.
Manual bag placer:
● While placing the bag on the filling spout, the operator automatically starts the filling pro-
cess by actuating a proximity switch.
Automatic bag placer:
● The filling process starts automatically after it has been checked by a pressure switch if
the bag is correctly positioned on the filling spout.
The filling process is as follows:
● First, the cylinder of the bag holding unit clamps the bag onto the spout so that the bag
cannot slip off.
● Then the system starts automatically.
● If the tare weight is within set limits, the slide valve opens and simultaneously the motor
of the filling impeller starts the coarse filling.
● After the weight reaches a predetermined value during coarse filling, the slide valve par-
tially closes converting the coarse filling to fine filling.
● Once the set weight is reached, the motor of the filling impeller stops, the cement in the
filling spout is blown into the bag and simultaneously the slide valve closes.
● Corrective action, as per selection or as programmed, is taken automatically if the weight
differs from the set point.
● The speed of the fillpac can be varied from 1.2 rpm to 6 rpm.
How to check the bag size

Ensure the weight required per bag before you start the checking.
1. Change the filling module to volumetric mode.
2. Place the bag on the filling spout.
3. Start the filling impeller, let it run for exactly 9 seconds and stop.
4. Then remove the cement bag from the filling spout and weigh it.
→ It should weigh 50 ± 0.050 kg.
If it weighs less, the bag is small, if it weighs more, the bag is big.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 61 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
6.6 Troubleshooting
If the fillpac R does not or not sufficiently fill the material, then
Error No.: 1
Symptom Permanently wrong weights or weight fluctuations
Cause Bags irregularly placed on the saddle.

Large or small fine flow opening towards the slide valve.
Sluggish operation of slide valve.
Defective rubber sealing collar.
Leaf springs on bag stool bent, broken or not properly adjusted.
Inaccurate switch points for coarse and fine flow.
Bag stool not isolated from assemblies or parts fixed on stationary part of filling
module.
Weighing unit is not linear.
Automatic weight correction facility is not working in the electronic unit.
Filling spout clogged, sluggish operation of slide valve.
Friction on bag stool. It is difficult to remove the filled bag from the filling spout.
Improper functioning of pneumatic cylinder on tipper frame.
Help 1. Check and readjust the filling spout ventilation and saddle height.
2. Check and readjust fine flow time; time as per requirement.
3. Check for compressed air leakage in the solenoid valve and the slide gate
cylinder.
4. Check and replace the rubber sealing collar
5. Check and replace, if necessary or uniformly straighten.
6. Check and adjust function of weighing unit.
7. Ensure isolation and observe the weighing display.
8. Calibrate the check weigher using standard weights and ensure repeatabil-
ity.
9. Enable the automatic optimisation of the electronics program via the key-
board
10. Check, clean and replace the filling spout. Check slide valve.
11. Adjust leaf springs.
Check slide valve as to wear and tear and replace, if necessary.
Check cylinder function of pneumatic cylinder.
12. Bag stool must be clean and remove material traces.
13. Set saddle height.
Check the setting of the pneumatic cylinder of the bag holding unit.
14. Check function. Check air compressor setting
Error No.: 2
Symptom Excessive filling time
Cause Insufficient spout aeration.

Foreign matter in the filling impeller or in the filling spout.
Defective rubber sealing collar.
Impeller worn out.
Impeller raceway in the filling impeller is worn out
Insufficient filing opening on the slide valve.
Blades of impeller bent.
62 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
More lead time in flow of material during fine mode.

Insufficient material level in silo.
Poor bag quality.
Help 1. Check, clean and replace filling spout, if necessary.

2. Remove foreign matter.
3. Exchange rubber sealing collar, if necessary.
4. Exchange impeller.
5. Exchange filling impeller.
6. Readjust filling opening.
7. Check if during coarse flow the openings of the slide valve and the sliding
plates lie precisely over each other.
8. Reset the impeller fine flow time as per the requirement.
9. Readjust coarse flow switch point.
10. Check filling level indicator and function.
11. Check material supply.
12. Check bag size, bag ventilation.
Error No.: 3
Symptom Slipping of V-belts
Cause Insufficient tension of V-belts.

Foreign matter in filling impeller.
Impeller blocked.
Sluggish operation or block of bearings of shaft of filling impeller.
Help 1. Check V-belts or V-belt pulleys as to wear and tear and exchange if neces-
sary.
2. Only exchange V-belt in pairs.
3. Retension V-belts.
4. Remove foreign matter from filling impeller, renew deep groove ball bearing
and seal.
5. Only use deep groove ball bearing with permanent lubrication
Error No.: 4
Symptom Soiled bags
Cause Defective rubber sealing collar.

Wear and tear of slide valve.
Defective seal of filling shaft .
Insufficient damping period between end of filling and discharge of bags.
Insufficient exhaust effect. Excessive ventilating air volume in filling spout bags
due to insufficient bag size.
Help 1. Exchange.
2. Check and exchange seal.
3. Excessive filling time.
4. Clean dedusting ducts and pipes, check the filter system.
5. Reduce air volume on throttle valve.
6. Use suitable bag size.
5
Error No.:
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 63 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Operation
Symptom Motor for filling impeller

drip indication
Cause Foreign matter in the filling impeller.

Bearing and sealing of shaft of filling impeller is stiff.
Help Check running of the filling impeller, switch on the motor of the filling impeller.
Error No.: 6
Symptom Slide valve does not function
Cause Solenoid valve does not switch on.
Help 1. Check signal elements.

2. Check control voltage.
3. Check compressed-air system, readjust or replace.
Error No.: 7
Symptom Compressed air fault and

Faulty bag discharge
Cause Pressure is under 4.5 bar and the pressure switch switches off the main drive
motor.
Help 1. Increase working pressure to 5-6 bar and “restart” the system.
Error No.: 8
Symptom Cylinder for bag discharge does not function.
Cause Pneumatic cylinder is defective. Solenoid valve defective.
Help 1. Repair or replace the pneumatic cylinder.

2. Repair or replace solenoid valve.
Error No.: 9
Symptom Above average wear and tear of the pneumatic elements.
Cause Poor quality of compressed air. Filter inserts down-stream of the compressor
system are dirty.
Help 1. Ensure required quality of the compressed air as stated in the specification
sheet. Clean, see maintenance regulations.
Error No.: 10
Symptom Operating pressure of 5-6 bar is not reached
Cause Filter inserts down-stream of the compressor system are dirty. Solenoid valves
do not function.
Help 1. Clean, see maintenance regulations. Check hose and pipe for breaks and
leakage. Check control voltage. Check compressed air. Repair or replace.
64 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Maintenance and Repair
7 Maintenance and Repair

7.1 Section safety instructions
DANGER
Falling hoist cart and counterweight in the event of defective roller chains!
Risk of crushing!
► When working on the hoist, the hoist cart and the counterweight must be secured
against falling.
WARNING
Hazard due to unauthorized starting of the machine!
Risk of crushing or drawing-in hazard!
► Before beginning work, de-energise the working area and secure the area from unau-
thorised start-up.
► Attach warning signs to indicate maintenance work.
► Turn off the supply of compressed-air and ventilate the machine's compressed-air sys-
tem.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 65 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
7.2 Inspection and maintenance list

Inspection and maintenance list
1 = interval: a = yearly / m = monthly / w = weekly / d = daily

2 = person responsible: U = User / S = Service personnel / E = Skilled electrician
1 2 Measure Comment
Machine parts
Entire machine
● Clean
d U Use a vacuum cleaner. NOTICE Do
not clean the machine by using
compressed air.
Safeguard
m S ● Fasten loose safety covers.
● Close the open inspection openings.
Entire machine
● Check all mobile parts for tight fit.
● Tighten loose screw and bolt connec-
3m S tions.
● Repair the coat of paint.
● Repair damage. Replace deformed
components.
Bearing
Bearing of centring device

● Check for noise during operation and
increased temperature. If necessary,
m S replace the component.
● Check lubrication. Further information:
chapter 7.6.2 "Lubrication instruc-
tions", page 75
Ball bearings and joint heads

● Checking for:
- tight fit
- unusual noise during operation
3m S
- wear and tear
If necessary, tighten the screw and
bolt connections / exchange the com-
ponents.
66 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Ball-bearing slewing ring

3m E ● Observe the manufacturers' instruc-
tions.
Filling module
Slide valve
● Check the parts subject to wear and
tear.
In case of wear and tear replace the
slide valve plate, the slide valve pres-
w S
sure plate and the compression
springs.
● Check the hose between the slide
valve and the filling spout.
Replace the hose if it is worn.
Filling spout
● Check:
w S - for wear and tear
- for deposits
● Replace defective components
Bag retaining rubber band

● Check:
- for wear and tear
w S
- condition
● Replace the defective bag retaining
rubber band.
Bag stool
● Check the bag stool for easy move-
ment.
w U ● Check the spring steel plate for wear
and tear, breakage and distortion. Re-
place worn or defective spring steel
plates.
Balance Pay attention to the operating instructions

● Check: of the balance.
w S - The drawbar between the balance
and the bag stool is fastened.
● Fasten loose drawbar.
Belt drives and guides
V-belt drive
● Replace worn V-belt pulleys and V-
m S
belts.
● Correct the driving belt tension and the
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 67 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
straight run if necessary.
Guide rails
m S ● Check for wear and tear and if neces-
sary make the necessary repairs.
Pneumatic components
Ventilation nozzles
● Check the ventilation nozzles on the
sound absorbers and the filling impel-
w S ler as well as the supply lines for leak-
age and clogging.
If necessary, repair the ventilation
nozzles.
Air service unit

● Check the operating pressure and if
necessary set it to 6 bar.
● Drain the condensate at the water
m S separator.
● Check the filter for soil. Replace the
filter cartridge, if necessary.
● Check the filter regulators and hose
assemblies for leakage and clogging.
Pneumatic drive units

● Checking for:
- tight fit
- correct movement
- wear and tear on cylinders and
joints
m S If necessary, repair the components.
● Regulate the restrictors and the end
position cushioning of the cylinders.
● Check the fastening and functioning of
the proximity switches.
● Set the control valve in the control
cabinet if necessary.
Pipes/hose assemblies
● Checking for:
m S - tightness of hose fittings

- leakages
If necessary, repair the components.
Electrical components
Proximity switches
w S
● Check:
68 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
- functionality
- tight fit
- setting
If necessary, adjust the setting and/or
the fit.
Replace the proximity switch if neces-
sary.
Cable
● Check:
m S - state and laying
If necessary, replace the required ca-
ble / adjust the laying.
Slip-ring body Observe the manufacturers' instructions.

● Clean
3m E ● Check wear and tear of the current
collectors.
● Replace defective components
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 69 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
7.3 Maintenance instructions

During the general inspection of the BEUMER fillpac R it has to be checked whether the sys-
tem is moving freely.
The system should move freely during the start-up of the BEUMER fillpac R. Avoid any kind
of obstruction in the system.
Obstacles must be removed immediately.
The maintenance schedule/procedure must be followed strictly.
Once the BEUMER fillpac R is set up and ready for operation, our preventive maintenance
program should begin.
The preventive maintenance program should include inspection of the BEUMER fillpac R,
carried out at regular intervals and covering the following items:
Switch off the main supply line and the compressed-air supply before attempting any repair
or maintenance work.
Maintenance list
Once the BEUMER fillpac R has been installed and commissioned properly, the maintenance
program should start immediately.
The following maintenance list will be helpful when maintaining the BEUMER fillpac R and for
having it running for a prolonged time under optimum conditions.
Adhere to the following maintenance list.
No. Check point Inspection for Frequency Remarks
1 Compressed-air supply Leakage, blockage weekly The filter insert has to be

- filter regulator, etc. Cleaning of filters, etc. cleaned, washed and
Ensure that the air pres- blown out by com-
sure is 5.5 to 6 bar. pressed air.
2 Pneumatic connections, Leakage, blockage weekly To be cleaned with a

outlet parts Ensure that the air pres- soft cloth.
Ventilation nozzle fitted in sure is 5.5 to 6 bar. To be washed and
impeller and blown out by com-
sound absorber pressed air.
3 Rubber hose between Wear and tear every 14 days To be replaced if worn
filling spout and slide valve out.
To be replaced every
two months.
4 Leaf springs in each filling Wear, straightness, monthly Replace the broken and
module breakage, etc. worn springs.
5 Central bearing Noise, heating-up, lubri- monthly

cation
6 Proximity switch Proper functioning monthly
7 Drive and solid shaft of Noise, heating-up, lubri- monthly

geared motor cation, dust
8 V-belt pulleys Belt tension, alignment, monthly

etc.
70 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
No. Check point Inspection for Frequency Remarks
9 Gear unit Wear and tear monthly
10 Slip-ring body Cleanliness, checking of every 3 mon-

carbon brushes for wear ths
11 Impeller Wear and tear every 3 mon- To be replaced if worn

ths out.
12 Filling spout Wear and tear every 6 mon- To be replaced if worn

ths out.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 71 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
7.4 Cleaning and check of the filling module

In order to achieve the required filling weight, regular cleaning and inspections of the filling
module are required.
Fig. 35: "Alignment of filling module (illustration no. 53520)"
1 Three-position cylinder 2 Slide valve

3 Rubber hose 4 Bag discharge cylinder
5 Filling module 6 Arrow mark for alignment of filling module
7 Tipper frame
Check for spillage of filling material

1. Clean the saddle and the device for manual height adjustment with blast air.
Ensure that the saddle and the device for manual height adjustment are clean. (There
must not be any accumulation of cement or dust in the saddle.)
2. Physically check the rubber hose and ensure that there is no leakage or damage.
3. Physically check the slide valve and ensure that there is no leakage.
Check of the parts of the weighing unit and for the bag discharge
1. Physically check the bag discharge cylinder and ensure that is moves freely without rub-
bing against other parts.
Ensure that the bag discharge cylinder does not jump.
Retighten the bolts of the holder of the cylinder in order to avoid jumps.
2. Physically check and ensure free movement of the slide valve.
3. Ensure that the weight carrying parts (leaf spring, bag stool, linkage of load cell) do not
touch or rub against the parts of the filling module that do not carry weight.
4. Clean the filling module with blast air and ensure that there is no accumulation of cement
or dust.
5. Physically check and ensure that the arrow mark for alignment is within +/- 1 mm.
Ensure proper positioning of the bag stool after discharge of the filled bag.
72 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Pneumatic inspection
1. Ensure that the air pressure is 5.5 to 6 bar.
2. Ensure that there is no air leakage.
3. Supply compressed air to the three-position cylinder and check the free movement of the
cylinder for operating the slide valve.
4. Clean the sound absorber with a soft cloth.
Remove any blockage by blast air.
Ensure that there is no blockage in the sound absorber and that the air can flow freely.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 73 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
7.5 How to replace the hose between filling spout and slide valve
Switch off the main supply line and the compressed-air supply before attempting any repair
or maintenance work.
Fig. 36: "Hose replacement (illustration ID: 54615)"
1 Slide valve 2 Clamping device

3 Rubber hose 4 Holder for filling spout
5 Bag stool 6 Filling module
How to replace the hose between filling spout and slide valve
The rubber hose needs to be inspected every 14 days for damage and leakage.
1. Remove the cable ties from both ends of the rubber hose.
2. Remove the holder for the filling spout from the bag stool using an Allen key.
3. Remove the rubber hose.
4. Fit the new rubber hose to the clamping device of the slide valve.
5. Mount the holder for the filling spout in the bag stool using an Allen screw.
Insert the hand through the gap in the bag stool for positioning and fitting the hose.
6. Fit the other end of the rubber hose to the clamping device of the holder for the filling
spout.
7. Tighten both sides of the hose on the clamping device using cable ties.
74 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
7.6 General lubrication instructions

Only if the appropriate lubricant is applied and the lubrication intervals are kept, can the lubri-
cant meet the requirements (good lubricating film, reduction of wear and tear, corrosion pro-
tection, noise absorption, heat emission, sealing, etc.). This contributes considerably to
achieving a good performance, reducing failures and ensuring an adequate service life of the
machine.
NOTICE
Mixing different oil qualities
Possible mechanical damage and stronger wear and tear
► Synthetic lubricants must not be mixed with mineral ones!
► Use only lubricants approved by the gear unit manufacturers!
In general, fixed intervals for changing the lubricant and re-lubrication cannot be specified as
they depend on different factors. The respective operating conditions such as ambient condi-
tions, operating time and load are decisive.
7.6.1 Lubricant change on geared motors

The geared motors are filled at the factory with the lubricant indicated on the rating plate. The
time for a lubricant change depends on the operating conditions and the oil temperature.
The following maximum values apply to lubricant changes:
● Mineral oils, every 3 years at the latest
● Synthetic oils, every 5 years at the latest
The exact intervals for lubricant changes can be found in the operating instructions for the
geared motor. Information on the used components is included in chapter 9.1 "Applicable
documents", page 83
7.6.2 Lubrication instructions

For the fillpac R, lubrication is required at various levels.
Refer to the lubrication list for complete information regarding procedure and material cover-
ing all components.
When gear units have been idle for an extended period of time, they should be completely
filled with oil to prevent the seals from drying out.
Drain down to proper oil level before starting the unit.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 75 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Fig. 37: "Lubrication point (illustration no.: 45710)"
Lubrication list
No. Lubrication Lubricants Specification Qty. Frequency

point Make of lubricant
1 Geared mo- Oil ISO VG 460 as specified Initially for 400 hours of
tor (lubricant Servomesh SP 460 of under 'Lubri- operation, then every
in sight glass Indian Oil cation point' 3,000 hours of operation
should be
between low
and high fill
level mark)
2 Bearing of Grease NLGI Gr. 2 200 g Every 100 hours

filling impeller Servogem 3 of Indian
Oil/AP-3
3 Lower part of Oil ISO VG 320 as specified Every 6 months

housing Equiv. to Servomesh SP under 'Lubri-
(lubricant in 320 of Indian Oil cation point'
sight glass
should be
between low
and high fill
level mark)
4 Bearing of Grease NLGI Gr. 2 200 g Every 10,000 hours

toothed gear Equiv. to Servogem-2 of
I.O.C.
76 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Lubrication list
No. Lubrication Lubricants Specification Qty. Frequency

point Make of lubricant
5 Central bea- Grease NLGI Gr. 2 30 g Every 2 weeks

ring Servogem 2 of Indian
Oil/
AP-3
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 77 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
De-commissioning
8 De-commissioning
WARNING
Hazard due to tipping or unsecured components!
Severe injuries by components
► During assembly, the working area has to be secured according to the major modules.
► Attach reference plates forbidding unauthorised persons to enter.
► Fasten components adequately before removing the lifting equipment.
► Secure tools from falling down.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 79 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
De-commissioning
8.1 Disassembly notes

The method of disassembly depends on whether the machine is to be re-used or not.
The disassembly has to be carried out by the maintenance personnel. The individual steps
have to be carried out in reversed order of assembly. Further information chapter 5.3
"Installation of the machine", page 42
Disassembly for re-use

1. Separate the machine from the different supply lines.
2. Disconnect the supply lines at the terminal boxes.
3. Mark the isolating points for the individual subassemblies to facilitate assembly at a later
time.
4. Dismantle the subassemblies from top to bottom.
5. Store the subassemblies in accordance with the information in the section "Storage regu-
lations".
Disassembly for disposal

When the machine is permanently de-commissioned and disposed of, ensure that the various
materials are separated during disassembly.
1. Separate the machine from the different supply lines.
2. Remove the wiring.
3. Dismantle the subassemblies from top to bottom.
4. Drain the lubricant from the drive units.
5. Dispose of the materials properly.
80 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
De-commissioning
8.2 Waste disposal

8.2.1 Lubricant
The different lubricants are to be disposed of separately in accordance with the relevant valid
regulations. Type and quantity of lubricant are indicated in the table of lubricants.
NOTICE
Improper disposal of consumables!
Hazard to the ground water
► Grease, oils, hydraulic oils and cleaning agents containing a solvent must be collected,
stored, transported and disposed of in appropriate containers.
These substances must not penetrate into the soil or the sewerage system.
8.2.2 Motors and gear units

Housing parts, toothed gears, shafts as well as anti-friction bearings of gear units are to be
disposed of as steel scrap. This also applies to parts made of grey cast iron, provided they
are not collected separately.
Worm wheels partly consist of non-ferrous metal and are to be disposed of accordingly.
Depending on the material and the relevant regulations, the stator, rotor and terminal box are
to be disposed of as steel scrap, electronic scrap, aluminium, copper, and plastic.
Before dismantling the drive units, drain the lubricants and dispose of them in accordance
with the regulations.
8.2.3 Machine actuators

● Sprocket wheels, chains, racks, toothed gears and ball-bearing slewing rings are to be
disposed of as steel scrap.
● Depending on the material, toothed belts and belts are to be disposed of as plastic or
rubber.
● Pulleys and idlers are to be disposed of as steel scrap.
● Bearings are to be disposed of as steel scrap. This also applies to parts made of grey
cast iron, provided they are not collected separately.
8.2.4 Electric parts

Depending on the material and the relevant regulations, the terminal boxes, proximity switch-
es, photocells, flexible cable ducts and cables are to be disposed of as aluminium, copper,
plastic, and electronic scrap.
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 81 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Annexe
9 Annexe
9.1 Applicable documents
Type Contents File name
fillpac R 12 Spout GA-drawing 4109803-1-D

GA-drawing
fillpac R 12 Spout - SPL Spare parts list and drawing 4109803-1-D-SPL
Pneumatic connection diagram 4107787-2-C
Pneumatic connection diagram f.bag discharge 4115493
Electrical and instru- The electrical documentation consists of:

mentation documentati-
'Control cabinet fillpac R 12 Spouts- 665PM1 855496-4-A
on
'Control cabinet fillpac R 12 Spouts- 665PM2 855497-4-A
Fill Module of Fillpac R - 665PM1 & 665PM2 855498-4-B
P & F proximity switch NBN8-18GM-60-A2
P & F proximity switch NBB15-30GM-60-A2
P & F proximity switch NBB15-30GM-50-WO
Switzer pressure switch GM-201-01-A7K-55
Salzer rotary switch S6-61025-B13-DYR
BBL Three-phase motor CIM 1 MC13S453

Installation & mainte-
nance manual
PBL Helical inline geared motor reducers 52P-100L4

Instruction manual
EFS100TS ESAT automatic gain-in-weight batching system EFS100TS

User manual
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 83 / 85

BEUMER fillpac
Annexe
9.2 Product Surveillance Form

Product Surveillance Form Machine type:
Project name: Order no.:
Return to our service department

Please inform us about all malfunctions, faults and irregularities related to BEUMER products.
Please make a checkmark:
Malfunctions of the machines
Modifications of the machines
Divergences with regard to 'Intended use'
Errors, irregularities or similar in the applicable documents
Please describe the actual situation:
How do we have to proceed and do you want to be kept informed?
For information Approval
Check Call-back
Forward to
Prioritise the actual situation (1 to 6, 1 = high priority):
Your contact data
Company
Street
Postcode/town/country
Contact
Telephone
E-Mail
Fax
84 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

BEUMER fillpac
Annexe
9.3 Table of Figures

Fig. 1: "Risk of injury, maintenance (27900)" ..................................................................... 14
Fig. 2: "Electric shock (27529)" .......................................................................................... 14
Fig. 3: "Risk of injury, compressed air (14720)" ................................................................. 14
Fig. 4: "Shearing danger, stretch wrapper (28988)" ........................................................... 14
Fig. 5: "fillpac R (illustration no.: 46661)"............................................................................ 19
Fig. 6: "Main drive unit (illustration no: 45717)" .................................................................. 20
Fig. 7: "Inlet chute illustration no.: 46369"....................................................................................... 21
Fig. 8: "Dedusting hood illustration no.: 46370".............................................................................. 22
Fig. 9: "Silo illustration no.: 45768" ................................................................................................. 23
Fig. 10: "Filling impeller (55311)" .......................................................................................... 24
Fig. 11: "Filling module (illustration no.: 45716)" .................................................................. 25
Fig. 12: "Slide valve (55317)" ............................................................................................... 26
Fig. 13: "Balance (54088)" .................................................................................................... 27
Fig. 14: "Bag stool (53537)" .................................................................................................. 28
Fig. 15: "Filling spout (53531)" ............................................................................................. 28
Fig. 16: "Bag holding unit (55316)" ....................................................................................... 29
Fig. 17: "Lifting lugs on the dedusting hood (illustration no.: 47059)" .................................. 32
Fig. 18: "Lifting lugs on the main drive unit (illustration no.: 47080)" ................................... 33
Fig. 19: "Lifting lugs on the silo (illustration no.: 47060)" .................................................................. 34
Fig. 20: "Filling modules, transport device (illustration no: 52770)" ..................................... 35
Fig. 21: "Frames for dedusting hood (illustration no.: 47628)" ............................................. 42
Fig. 22: "Silo and drive shaft (illustration no.: 48400)" .......................................................... 43
Fig. 23: "Main supporting frame (illustration no.: 47100)" .................................................... 44
Fig. 24: "Installation of main supporting frame (illustration no.: 46691)" .............................. 45
Fig. 25: "Installation of the main supporting frame - part 3 and part 4 (illustration no.:
46795)" 46
Fig. 26: "Installation of main supporting frame - part 2 (illustration no.: 47105)" .................. 47
Fig. 27: "Centring device (illustration no.: 52628)" ............................................................... 48
Fig. 28: "Installation of main drive motor (illustration no.: 47081)" ....................................... 49
Fig. 29: "Installation of inlet chute (illustration no.: 47109)".................................................. 50
Fig. 30: "Installation of fill level indicator (graphic id: 47643)" .............................................. 51
Fig. 31: "Installation of filling module (illustration no.: 52778)" ............................................. 52
Fig. 32: "Installation sequence for filling module (illustration no.: 46739)" ........................... 53
Fig. 33: "Installation of load cell (illustration no.: 52891)" ..................................................... 54
Fig. 34: "Alignment of fillpac R (illustration no.: 47504)" ...................................................... 55
Fig. 35: "Alignment of filling module (illustration no. 53520)" ............................................... 72
Fig. 36: "Hose replacement (illustration ID: 54615)" ............................................................ 74
Fig. 37: "Lubrication point (illustration no.: 45710)" .............................................................. 76
665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 85 / 85

Project: Jotindra Steel Tubes Ltd. Order no: 615-450003
(Kanodia Bihar Project) Tech. pos: 30450, 30460
Machine: Fillpac R 12 Spout Dwg. no.-ID:52418
Quantity 2
Date 12.02.16 Spare Part List - 4109803-1-D
Item Pos. Qty. Article. no. Article designation Technical data
1 1 4108292 V-belt pulley SPA dw=92
2 1 75178 Motor MC 13S453
3 1 4108343 Protective cover for V-belt
4 4 3496 V-belt profile SPA Lw=1320
5 1 77970 Three position cylinder
6 2 4108028 Buffer A 40,00 x 30,00
7 1 3000169 Load cell T66-200Kg
8 1 4108088 Threaded spindle
9 4 4100406 Leaf spring
10 6 4100407 Holder for leaf spring
13 1 4103772 Rubber hose ø60
14 2 75937 Cable tie CPS 300 ES
15 4 70067 Cone lubricat.nipple H1 R1/8 5.8
16 4 79250 Reducer 1/4"F - 1/8"M
17 2 9327 Sealing ring O-1/4 PVC
18 4 14336 High-speed screwing CK-1/4-PK- 6
19 1 59663 Plastic hose PUN-8x1,25-BL
20 12 4118156 Filling module
40 1 4118153 Bag stool with tipper frame
41 1 4108036 Holder for filling spout
42 1 4118113 Bag stool
43 1 4100397 Flange L13 x 3 ø 60 / ø100
44 1 4108151 Filling spout Filling spout ø59/55 - 245,5
45 2 4107972 Bearing block (Holder)
46 4 4108048 Tight-fit screw
47 1 4108032 Holder
48 1 4108066 Pivoted fastening (Holder)
49 1 35588 Cylinder DNC-40-200.PPV-A
50 1 4108030 Tipper frame
51 1 4108046 Axle
52 2 4108045 Adjusting ring
53 2 77961 Radial spherical bearing GE15 ES-2RS make SKF
54 2 73290 Set screw M6x8
55 1 4108215 Saddle, manual height adjustment
56 2 4100418 Tighten.lever M16
57 2 4108226 Disc for saddle
58 2 4112766 Steel wire rope ø2x248lg
60 1 4106002 Ventilation nozzle, subassembly
61 1 4104514 Ventilation nozzle
62 1 4104478 Adapter for ventilation nozzle
63 1 82701 Silicone hose ø 5mm x 2 mm
66 1 75889 Proximity switch NBN8-18GM60-A2
67 1 4108125 Support for proximity switch
68 1 77964 Extension spring ø1x10x70
1 of 3
Quantity 2
69 2 71711 Split pin M 2,5x25,00 IS 549
70 2 4112763 Bolt ø8/9/16 - 41
71 1 40693 Cylinder DNC - 40- 40PPVA double-acting Festo 163338
72 1 4108091 Buffer for bag holding cylinder
91 1 4108168 Flow regulating device fillpac slide valve ø60/60-350
92 1 4106520 Base plate of slide valve
93 1 4106523 Slide plate of slide valve
94 1 4106521 Pressure plate of slide valve
95 1 4100395 Fork of slide valve
96 2 4108180 Stud
97 2 4108189 Stud
98 1 4100409 Clamping device
99 2 4108175 Compression spring 2,00x12,5x33
100 2 4100398 Hexagon nut with shoulder M8
101 1 4100399 Hexagon head screw M12
115 1 4108374 Filling impeller, subassemly
116 1 4108307 Housing, filling impeller
117 1 4108341 Cover
118 1 4100383 Handle for housing cover
119 1 73756 O-ring 290,0 x 3,0
120 3 4106002 Ventilation nozzle, subassembly
121 1 4104514 Ventilation nozzle
122 1 4104478 Adapter for ventilation nozzle
123 1 82701 Silicone hose ø 5mm x 2 mm
124 1 4108355 Impeller
136 1 4108350 Shaft, filling impeller
137 1 740 Retaining ring 90.0x3.00 DIN 472
138 1 73730 Nilos ring 40,0x 90,0 LSTO
139 1 72912 Deep groove ball bearing 6308-RS1
140 1 72914 Deep groove ball bearing 6210-RS1
141 1 1914 Nilos ring 50.0x 90.0 LSTO
142 1 73366 Rotary shaft lip-type seal B
143 1 4108351 Sealing cap
145 1 4108354 Bearing housing
146 2 77967 Grease nipple 1/8"
147 1 4100323 Shaft, filling impeller
148 1 4108356 Hub for shaft of filling impeller
149 2 4108357 Washer Ø50,00/14,00 - 8,00
150 1 4108358 Housing of shaft
151 2 58730 Rotary shaft seal A 50x 70,0x10,0
152 1 4100381 Distance piece
171 1 4109804 Main drive unit
172 1 4100298 Hel.gear NL83 b.h.330H7 EN8
173 1 76411 Deep groove ball bearing 6332M/C3
174 1 4100153 Pinion NL58 b.h.ø35
2 of 3
Quantity 2
175 1 736 Retaining ring 62.0x2.00 DIN 472
176 2 72941 Deep Groove Ball Bearing 6007-2RS
178 1 75304 Rotary shaft lip-type seal B
187 1 4108043 Slip-ring body, subassembly
188 1 4100109 Slip ring body
189 2 4109041 Holder for bush
190 13 77797 Carbon brush SKB-16
191 1 4100263 Insulating disk
192 1 4100151 O-ring 280,0x35,00 Neoprene
193 2 75931 Cable gland PG-16
194 1 75310 Cable gland NJ-42
195 1 19730 Cone lubricat.nipple H1 M10x1 5.8
197 1 4109877 Drive motor, subassembly
198 1 75333 Helical geared motor 52P-100L4
200 3 8200 V-belt profile SPA lw=1250
231 1 77596 Proximity switch NBB15-30GM50-WO
232 1 71730 Split pin M 6,3x45,00 IS 549
235 1 40693 Cylinder DNC - 40- 40PPVA double-acting Festo 163338
236 1 4110446 Centring device
237 2 77741 Straight ermeto fitting M10
238 1 19730 Cone lubricat.nipple H1 M10x1 5.8
239 1 721 Retaining ring 80x2.50 DIN 471 spring steel
240 1 744 Retaining ring 125.0x4.00 DIN 472 spring steel
241 1 72932 Deep groove ball bearing 6016
242 1 73355 Rotary shaft lip-type seal C
251 1 4111153 Compressed-air connection for the bottom
252 1 79398 Rotary union BSP 1"
253 1 77803 Ball valve 25NB
254 6 85433 Elbow 90° SR 25 NB
255 1 85796 Tee B-class 25 NB
256 2 78621 Reducer M-F G1"-1/2"
257 1 85799 Tee B-class 25x25x15 NB
258 1 85432 Reducer M-F G1/2"-1/4"
259 1 73782 Double nipple 25 NB x 100mm
260 1 84824 Filter regulator LFR-1-D-MAXI
261 1 75887 Pressure switch GM-201-01-A7K-55
3 of 3
Ersatzteilzeichnung ID: 52418
Spare parts drawing
ID-52415
ID-52414
ID-52417
ID-51999 ID-52408
ID-52411 ID-52410
ID-52416
ID-52412
Spare parts drawing
20
7 5
8
9
4
10
13
2
10
3 9
14 11
17 16
15
19
18
12
Ersatzteilzeichnung
ID: 52412
Spare parts drawing
42 40
60-61 49
62
B 71
E
63 E A
`
C
44
50
43 72
41
58
55
56-57
47
48
D
45
A
46
52-53
54
51
68
66
C 69-70 D
67 B
Spare parts drawing
91
95
101
93
94
92
98
99
100
96
97
Ersatzteilzeichnung
ID: 51999
Spare parts drawing
120-121
122
116 123
124
119
120-123
115
117
118
Ersatzteilzeichnung
ID:52411
Spare parts drawing
148
151
152
136
150
149 145
143
146
141
140
146
139
138
142 137
144
147
149
Ersatzteilzeichnung
ID: 52414
Spare parts drawing
177
176
178
197-198 191
189
196 190
199
200
187-188
176
175
193
174
172
194
A
173
171
192
195
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare parts drawing ID:52415
231
232
Ersatzteilzeichnung
ID:52417
Spare parts drawing
235
Ersatzteilzeichnung ID:52416
Spare parts drawing
236
256 255
254
259 251
252
254
257,258,261
260
254
253
242
241
254
240
239
237
237
238
Pneumatic connection diagram
Item Pos. Qty. Article no. Article Designation

12 4107787-2-C Pneumatic connection diagram
1 1 27006 Manifold block PRS-1/4-5
2 5 28314 Solenoid valve MFH-5-1/4
3 5 10891 Magnet coil MSFG-24
4 5 27007 Banjo bolt VT-1/4-PRS
5 4 28613 Non-return valve H-1/4-B
6 4 5136 Non-ret.thr.valve GRA-1/4-B
7 1 5819 hand slide valve W-3-1/2
12 1 3010 High-speed screwing ACK-1/2-PK-13
13 4 8838 High-speed screwing ACK-1/4-PK- 6
14 13 11613 High-speed L-screw.LCK-1/4-PK-6
15 3 75320 Reducer R-1/2" -1/4"
16 2 39228 Y-plug connection QSY-8
17 2 3370 Screw plug B-1/4
18 2 3563 High-speed L-screw. LCK-3/8-PK- 6
19 1 35567 Plastic pipe PEN-8x1,25-BL, L=12000
21 1 11786 Plastic pipe PU-13, L=2000
26 1 82694 Filter regulator
27 2 3371 Screw plug B-1/2
33 1 3471 Non-ret.thr.valve GRLA-1/4B
36 2 71904 Hex hd. bolt M6x120 IS1363 4,6
37 2 27669 Con.spring washer DIN 6796-6-FSt
40 4 18924 High-speed L-screw.LCK-1/8-PK- 6
41 2 28151 Sound absorber U-1/4-B
42 1 87183 Plastic pipe PUN 8x1,25-SW, L=12000
Page 1 of 2
Pneumatic connection diagram
Page 2 of 2
Pneumatic connection diagram f. bag discharge
Item Pos. Qty. Article no. Article Designation
1 4115493 Pneumatic connection diagram f. bag discharge

4 2 78555 Equal tee B-class 15 NB
6 2 85432 Reducer M-F G1/2"-1/4"
8 1 35567 Plastic pipe PEN-8x1,25-BL, L=10000
10 2 28314 Solenoid valve MFH-5-1/4
11 2 3370 Screw plug B-1/4
13 4 28151 Sound absorber U-1/4-B
15 2 4413 Distributor piece FCK-3-PK-6-KU
16 2 10891 Magnet coil MSFG-24
Page 1 of 2
Pneumatic connection diagram f. bag discharge
Page 2 of 2
Electrical drawing for fillpac
Please refer the following direction for electrical

drawings for the Fillpac R 12 Spout:-
Article.
Machine/Tag No.
Tech. Pos. No. Description
30450 855496 Control cabinet – Fillpac R 12 Spout 665PM1
30460 855497 Control cabinet – Fillpac R 12 Spout 665PM2
30450 & 30460 855498 Fill Module Fillpac R 665PM1 & 665PM2
Control cabinet (Wiring diagram) are the same for both the Fillpac.
Use the drawing 855496 for 855497 (Other Fillpac)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
FILLPAC R, 665-PM1 12 SPOUT A
MANUFACTURER BEUMER Technology India Private Limited

B WIRING DIAGRAM NO 855496 B
Prabhat Bhavan, 2nd Floor
400 083 Mumbai, India
YEAR OF CONSTRUCTION 2014
TELEPHONE +91 (22) 6730-4500 INTERNET WWW.BEUMERGROUP.COM
NOMINAL RATING 415 - 50 Hz

CUSTOMER SUPPORT HOTLINE SPARE PART MANAGEMENT
C CONTROL VOLTAGE 230V AC C

EMAIL HOTLINE@BEUMERGROUP.COM CS-GERMANYE@BEUMERGROUP.COM
TEL. +49 2521 24 444 +49 2521 24 343 RECOMMENDED BACK-UP FUSE 200 A
CUSTOMER Kanodia Infratech Limited SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT 65 KA
Kurari PROTECTION CLASS IEC IP55

D D
Dist. Kaimoor
LIGHTING / HEATING 220 VAC
India
IDENTIFIER 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ 2NOS 12 S FILLPAC WITH ACCE+
ORDER NUMBER 615-450003

E E
THIS DRAWING IS DESIGNED WITH THE CAE SYSTEM EPLAN AND MAY NOT BE CHANGED MANUALLY
THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF THE BEUMER GROUP. ANY REPRODUCTION, TRANSMISSION, TRANSCRIPTION, ETC OR ANY KIND OF SUPPLY TO OTHERS IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN WITHOUT EXPRESS PRIOR WRITTEN
CONSENT. REFER TO PROTECTION NOTICE ISO 16016
F F
=
&EBH/2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EAA PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TITLE PAGE
NAME SO.AR
2NOS 12 S FILLPAC WITH ACCE+
VERSION C WIRING DIA. NO 855496 OF PAGES 105
615-450003 FILLPAC R, 665-PM1 12 SPOUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
REVISION OVERVIEW
A A
NUMBER VERSION DATE NAME COMPANY CODE COMMENTS
1 06.04.2015 SO.AR 06 WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PRESENTATION
2 14.05.2015 SO.AR 06 WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PRESENTATION
3
B B
C 7 C
10
D D
11
12
13
E 14 E
15
16
17
F F
=
&EAA/1 &EAB/3 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EBH PAGE 2
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ REVISION OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A A
FUNCTION LOCATION PAGE PAGE DESCRIPTION DATE NAME FUNCTION LOCATION PAGE PAGE DESCRIPTION DATE NAME
&EAA 1 TITLE PAGE 20.08.2014 PR.SO &EFS =C001 +GE 11 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EBH 2 REVISION OVERVIEW 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C001 +GE 12 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EAB 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 20.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C001 +GE 13 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EAB 3.A TABLE OF CONTENTS 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C001 +GE 14 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY 18.05.2015 SO.AR
B B
&EAB 3.B TABLE OF CONTENTS 20.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C003 +GE 15 CONTROL VOLTAGE AC 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDB 4 STRUCTURE IDENTIFIER OVERVIEW 20.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C003 +GE 16 CONTROL SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDB 5 BEUMER DESIGNATION SYSTEM 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C003 +GE 17 CONTROL SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C003 +GE 18 CONTROL SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION 18.05.2015 SO.AR

&EDB 5.A DESIGNATION SYSTEM 20.08.2014 PR.SO
&EFS =C010 +GE 19 EMERGENCY STOP 18.05.2015 SO.AR
C C
&EDB 5.B DESIGNATION SYSTEM 20.08.2014 PR.SO
&EEB 6 GENERAL NOTES 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C011 +GE 21 AUTO-MANUAL MODE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6.A GENERAL NOTES 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C012 +GE 22 FLOATING CONTACTS 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6.B OVERVIEW NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C012 +GE 23 FLOATING CONTACTS 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6.C SYMBOL OVERVIEW 18.05.2015 SO.AR
D &EFS =C019 +GE 24 FLOW CONTROL GATE 18.05.2015 SO.AR D
&ELD 7 EARTHING PLAN 18.05.2015 SO.AR

&EFS =C019 +GE 25 FLOW CONTROL GATE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8 CABINET LAYOUT 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =C019 +GE 26 FLOW CONTROL GATE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8.A CABINET LAYOUT 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EFS =D001 +GE 27 FILLPAC MAIN DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =D001 +GE 28 FILLPAC MAIN DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR

&EDA 8.C TERMINAL BOX -A11 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =D001 +GE 29 FILLPAC MAIN DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
E &EDA 8.D PUSH BUTTON STATION -A12 18.05.2015 SO.AR E
&EFS =D001 +GE 30 FLOW CONTROL GATE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8.E PUSH BUTTON STATION -A13 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8.F LOCAL PUSH BUTTON -A14 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFC 9 CONTROL TERMINAL LAYOUT 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C001 +GE 10 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY 18.05.2015 SO.AR
F F
=
&EBH/2 3.A +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EAB PAGE 3
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TABLE OF CONTENTS
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A A
&EFS =D002 +GE 35 RADIAL DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMA 18 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +TB-A13-X21 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =D002 +GE 36 RADIAL DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMA 19 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +TB-A13-X21 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =D002 +GE 37 RADIAL DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR

&EMA 20 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +TB-A14-X21 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =D003 +GE 38 TANGENTIAL DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EMZ 1 CABLE OVERVIEW 18.05.2015 SO.AR
B &EFS =D003 +GE 39 TANGENTIAL DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR B
&EMZ 2 CABLE OVERVIEW 18.05.2015 SO.AR

&EFS =D003 +GE 40 TANGENTIAL DRIVE 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EMA 1 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-X0 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMZ 3 CABLE OVERVIEW 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EMA 2 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-X1 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMB 1 CABLE DIAGRAM 18.05.2015 SO.AR
C C
D D
&EMA 9 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-XAC.EPH 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMB 8 CABLE DIAGRAM 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EMA 10 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-XAC.PH 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMB 9 CABLE DIAGRAM 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EMA 11 TERMINAL DIAGRAM +TB-A11-X21 18.05.2015 SO.AR &EMB 10 CABLE DIAGRAM 18.05.2015 SO.AR
E E
F F
=
3 3.B +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EAB PAGE 3.A
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A A
FUNCTION LOCATION PAGE PAGE DESCRIPTION DATE NAME
&EMB 17 CABLE DIAGRAM 18.05.2015 SO.AR
&EPB 1 PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR

B B
C C
&EPC 1 SUMMARIZED PARTS LIST 18.05.2015 SO.AR

D D
E E
F F
=
3.A &EDB/4 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EAB PAGE 3.B
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
STRUCTURE IDENTIFIER OVERVIEW
A DOCUMENT TYPE STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION MOUNTING LOCATION STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION A
&EAA ELECTRICAL DATASHEET +GE
&EBH REVISION INFORMATION +TB TERMINAL BOX
&EAB LIST OF CONTENTS +FM FILL MODULE
&EDB DESCRIPTION OF DESIGNATION SYSTEM +FIELD FIELD
B &EEB STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS B
&ELD EARTHING PLAN
&EDA DIMENSION DRAWING
&EFC SCREEN DISPLAY LAYOUT DRAWING
&EFS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
&EMA TERMINAL DIAGRAM

C C
&EMZ CABLE OVERVIEW
&EMB CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
&EPB PARTS LIST
&EPC SUMMARIZED PARTS LIST
HIGHER-LEVEL FUNCTION STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION

D D
=C001 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY
=C003 CONTROL VOLTAGE AC
=C010 EMERGENCY STOP
=C011 OPERATION CONCEPT
=C012 FLOATING CONTACTS
E =C019 FAULT MESSAGES E
=D001 COMMUNICATION CONCEPT
=D002 OPERATOR PANEL
=D003 PACKER DRIVE
=FP FILLPAC
F F
=
&EAB/3.B 5 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDB PAGE 4
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ STRUCTURE IDENTIFIER OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
4 5.A +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ BEUMER DESIGNATION SYSTEM
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DESIGNATION SYSTEM 3L1 3L1

3L2 3L2
3L3 3L3
A A
COMPLETE DEVICE DESIGNATION COMPLETE TERMINAL STRIP DESIGNATION
1 3 5 13 21
* ** ***
+A01-F01 * **
1,4-2,0A 14 22
=XXXXXX.PP01 .D001 +A01-F01 =XXXXXX.PP01 .TE +A01-X3 (1)
1,75A
/25.5:E
ENUMERATION NUMBER FOR DEVICES I> I> I> (OPTION) IF TERMINAL IS LOCATED IN TERMINAL BOX
2 4 6
DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR DEVICES VOLTAGE AT TERMINAL STRIP

1 3 5
LOCATION +A01 DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR TERMINAL STRIP
B B
-Q01 2 4 6
/18.2:E
COMPONENT GRD
LOCATION
SUBSYSTEM =.TE+A01-X3 1 2 3 4 COMPONENT
SYSTEM =.TE+A11-W1 1 2 3 GYNE SUBSYSTEM

ÖZ-J
4X1
C SYSTEM C
DEVICE DESIGNATION FOR EXTERNAL TERMINAL-BOXES
=.TE+A11
/36.2:E
* ** -X31 1 2 3 4
=XXXXXX .PP01 .TE +A11
}
LOCATION .D001 COMPONENT TIMING BELT 1
=.TE+A12-W1 1 2 3 GYNE .TE COMPONENT UNIT OF TIMING BELTS

COMPONENT KAWEFLEX 3130
4X1
.D002 COMPONENT TIMING BELT 2
( D001 + D002 )
=+A12
SUBSYSTEM /36.2:D
D -X32 1 2 3 4 +A01 LOCATION CONTROL CABINET
D
SYSTEM
+A11 LOCATION TERMINAL BOX
-M01-W1 GY BK BN GYNE
ÖZ-J
4X1
U V W
+TE LOCATION UNIT OF TIMING BELTS ( D001 + D002 )
E M E
3~
-M01 PE
0,55KW
1,75A
SUBSYSTEM
"*, **, ***, ****, COMPONENT
THIS STRUCTURE CHARACTERISTICS ARE THE SHEET HEAD AND SYSTEM
F BE IN ACCORDANCE AM NOT BMK PICTURED F
LOCATION
PREVIOUS PAGE ORDER-NO TYPE OF MACHINE PAGE DESIGNATION NEXT PAGE =XXXXXX.PP01.D001
=
5 5.B +TE
+
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDB PAGE 5.A
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ DESIGNATION SYSTEM
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3L2 3L2
3L3 3L3
A A
COMPLETE CABLE NUMBER
1 3 5 13 11
* ** *** ****
+A01-F01
1,4-2,0A 14 12
=XXXXXX.PP01 .D001 +TE -M01 -W1
1,75A
/25.5:E
COUNTING NUMBER CABLE I> I> I>
2 4 6
CODE LETTER FOR CABLES
1 3 5
ENUMERATION NUMBER FOR DEVICES +A01
B B
-Q01 2 4 6
/18.2:E
DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR DEVICES GRD
LOCATION =.TE+A01-X3 1 2 3 4
COMPONENT =.TE+A11-W1 1 2 3 GYNE

ÖZ-J
4X1
SUBSYSTEM
C C
=.TE+A11
SYSTEM /36.2:E
-X31 1 2 3 4
CABLE REPRESENTATION COMPLETE DEVICE DESIGNATION

=.TE+A12-W1 1 2 3 GYNE
KAWEFLEX 3130
* ** *** **** 4X1 * ** *** ****
=XXXXXX .PP01 .D001 +TE -M01 -W1 CABLE NUMBER =XXXXXX .PP01 .D001 +TE -M01
=.TE+A12 ENUMERATION NUMBER FOR DEVICES
/36.2:D
D -X32 1 2 3 4
D
ÖZ-J CABLE TYPE DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR DEVICES
4x1 WIRE QUANTITY X CROSS SECTION LOCATION

-M01-W1 GY BK GYNE
ÖZ-J
CONDUCTOR COLOUR 4X1 COMPONENT
GY BK BN GNYE
U V W
SUBSYSTEM
E M E
3~
SYSTEM
-M01 PE
0,55KW
1,75A
F F
=XXXXXX.PP01.D001
=
5.A &EEB/6 +TE
+
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDB PAGE 5.B
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CONTROL CABINET CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A THIS SWITCHGEAR WAS PLANNED AND BUILT ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING REGULATIONS: EN60439-1; EN60204-1; EN50274; BGV A3; EN50102 A
MINIMUM CROSS SECTION OF A LINE CABLE ENTRY CONTROL CABINET COLOUR CORE IDENTIFICATION YES
X NO
MAIN CURRENT IN TOP POSITION RAL 7035 CONTROL CABINET

IEC 60204
CONTROL CABINET + JUNCTION BOX
MARKING OF DEVICES
CONTROLLER IN BOTTOM POSITION
B IEC 60204 X B
PAGE / CONTINUOUS NUMBER
ENGLISH
CONTACT NUMBER
WIRING COLOURS ACCORDING TO INDIAN STANDARD TERMINAL STRIP IDENTIFICATION
OTHER CROSS TYPE WIRE NUMBERING X
POWER L1 BLACK -X0 -X01 SUPPLY

SPECIFIC REGULATIONS
C POWER L2 BLACK
-X1 -X11 -X111 24DC, AS-i INTERFACE C
POWER L3 BLACK ACCORDING TO UL (UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC).

-X2 -X21 -X211 110-230VAC
NEUTRAL N BLUE
ACCORDING TO CSA (CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION)
-X3 -X31 400-500VAC
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR PE YELLOW GREEN
AWG-WIRING
-X4 -X41 THERMAL PROTECTION
CONTROL VOLTAGE AC PH RED
D CUSTOMERS-/ FACTORY INSTRUCTION D
CONTROL VOLTAGE AC EPH BLACK -X5 -X51 EMERGENCY STOP
FERTILIZER INDUSTRIE
CONTROL VOLTAGE DC L+ BLUE
-X7 -X71 FLOATING CONTACTS
CONTROL VOLTAGE DC M0V GREY ACCORDING TO CCC (CHINA COMPULSORY CERTIFIC.)

-XPE -XPE POTENTIAL EQUALIZER
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE DC L+ ORANGE
ACCORDING TO IEC (INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL
X
E COMMISSION) E
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE DC M0V ORANGE THREE-DIGIT = DISTRIBUTOR (PLUGGED)
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE AC PH ORANGE

TWO-DIGIT = TERMINAL BOX
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE AC EPH ORANGE ABBREVIATIONS FOR CABLE DESIGNATION
THERMISTOR BROWN
ONE-DIGIT = CONTROL CABINET CS CUSTOMER SUPPLY
F ANALOG SIGNALS WHITE F

IC INTERFACE CABLE
=
&EDB/5.B 6.A +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ GENERAL NOTES
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DESIGNATION SYSTEM
A A
COLOUR CODE ACCORD. TO IEC 757 REFERENCES IN CIRCUIT DIAGRAM GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS
BLACK BK EXAMPLE SPH SAFETY PHOTOCELL
EC END CONTACT
BROWN BN
=.C010 23
+AL
-K01 24
PC PRE-CONTACT
B RED RD B
/20.3:C
L LEFT
ORANGE OR =.C010 THIS CONTACT CAN BE FOUND IN THE COMPONENT =.C010
R RIGHT
+AL THE DEVICE CAN BE FOUND IN LOCATION +AL
YELLOW YE
POS POSITION
-K01 THE CONTACT IS FROM CONTACTOR -K01
C GREEN GN C
EP EMPTY PALLET
/20.3:C THE MAIN DEVICE IS ON PAGE 20 PATH 3:C
BLUE BU FP FULL PALLET
+A01 SS SUPPLY SECTION

PURPLE VT 51
-X1
FE FEED
GREY GY
D +A01 THIS CLAMP IS IN LOCATION +A01 D
HO HOIST
WHITE WH -X1 THIS CLAMP BELONGS TO THE TERMINAL STRIP -X1
LPS LAYER PUSHER SIDE
51 TERMINAL NUMBER 51
PINK PK
LTS LAY-OFF TABLE SIDE
GOLD GD 2L+AL /43.1:B

E E
"THESE SYMBOLS REFER TO THE POTENTIAL 2L+AL TO PAGE 43, CURRENT

TURQUOISE TQ PATH 1:B"
SILVER SR RD
GREEN/YELLOW GNYE THIS CONNECTION IS THE RED WIRE OF A CABLE

F F
=
6 6.B +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6.A
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IT TT TN-S
L1 L1 L1
A A
L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
N N
PE
INSULATION MONITOR
B 1 PE 1 PE 1 B
PE PE PE
DESIGNED X
C EXECUTED C
TN-C TN-C-S
L1 L1
D L2 L2 D
L3 L3
PEN N
PEN
PE
1 1
E E
PE PE
DESIGNED
F
EXECUTED F
=
6.A 6.C +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6.B
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ OVERVIEW NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SYMBOL OVERVIEW
A A
SLIP RING
B B
VFD
+24V GND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 SRC B A AGND SCR
U1 V1 W1 PE X1.10 X1.11 X1.12 X1.13 X1.14 X1.15 X1.16 X1.17 X1.18 X3.28 X3.29 X3.30 X3.31 X3.32
ACS550-01-08A8-4
C C
U2 V2 W2 PE BRK+ BRK- X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.9 X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26 X1.27
SRC AI1 AGND +10V AI2 AGND AO1 AO2 AGND RO1C RO1A RO1B RO2C RO2A RO2B RO3C RO3A RO3B
D D
E E
F F
=
6.B &ELD/7 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6.C
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ SYMBOL OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
=FP
+GE -XPE:1 -XPE -XPE -XPE:3 -XPE:4 -XPE:5 -XPE:6
-A01
&EDA/8.0:A
CONTROL CABINET
+GE-X0 5 +GE-X0 9 +GE-X1 PE +GE-X3 PE3 +GE-X3 PE4 +GE-X3 PE5
B B
=FP+GE =FP+GE
-W3 -W4
4x25 sqmm GNYE 3x1.5 sqmm GNYE
C C
+TB-A11
-X31 PE -X21 PE
GNYE GNYE
25 sqmm 6 sqmm
=C001+GE-A01
SLIP RING BOX
POWER CONTROL
D D
=FP+GE =FP+GE =FP+GE =FP+GE =D001+GE =D002+GE =D003+GE

-A01-W1 -A01-W2 -A01-W3 -A01-W4 -M01-W1 -M01-W1 -M01-W1
4x6 sqmm GNYE 4x6 sqmm GNYE 3x1.5 sqmm GNYE 3x1.5 sqmm GNYE 4x6 sqmm GNYE 4x6 sqmm GNYE 4x6 sqmm GNYE
E E
=FP =FP =FP =FP 3+PE 3+PE 3+PE

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X31 7 -X31 7 -X21 5 -X21 5
-A21 -A21 -A21 -A21 =D001+GE M =D002+GE M =D003+GE M
FILL MODULE FILL MODULE FILL MODULE FILL MODULE -M01 3~ -M01 3~ -M01 3~
01-06 07-12 01-06 07-12 2.2KW 2.2KW 2.2KW
MAIN DRIVE RADIAL CONVEYOR TANGENTIAL CONVEYOR
F F
=
&EEB/6.C &EDA/8 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &ELD PAGE 7
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ EARTHING PLAN
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=FP+GE-A01
/8.A.1:A
&ELD/7.0:A
CONTROL CABINET FILLPAC R

=FP+GE-A01 30 mm
200 mm
120 mm
A A
R Y B
CONTROL
ON
AUTO MODE
ON
MANUAL
MODE ON
50 mm
=C001 =C001 =C001 =C010 =C011 =C011
-H01 -H02 -H03 -H04 -H05 -H06
CONTROL AUTO MODE MANUAL
20
COMPR. AIR DUST/SPILLAGE LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 02 MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE
FAULT COLLECTOR RUN RUN RUN TRIP RUN
R Y B ON ON MODE ON
=C019 =C019 =C019 =C019 =D001 =D001
-H07 -H08 -H09 -H10 -H01 -H02
200 mm FCG START

FCG
OPEN
FCG
CLOSE
RADIAL BELT
TRIP
200 mm
=D001 =D001 =D001 =D002

-H03 -H04 -H05 -H01
TANGENTIAL EMERGENCY STOP

AUTO/MANUAL
BELT TRIP
=C001 =C001 =C001 =C010 =C011 =C011

=D003 =C011
-H01 =C010 -S02
-S01
B -H01 -H02 -H03 -H04 -H05 -H06 B
80 mm
COMPR. AIR DUST/SPILLAGE LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 02 MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE
FAULT COLLECTOR RUN RUN RUN TRIP RUN
=C019 =C019 =C019 =C019 =D001 =D001

-H07 -H08 -H09 -H10 -H01 -H02
C 2000 mm C
FCG-1 FCG-1 RADIAL BELT

FCG START
OPEN CLOSE TRIP
=D001 =D001 =D001 =D002

-H03 -H04 -H05 -H01
80 mm
D D
=C001 TANGENTIAL EMERGENCY STOP
-Q01 AUTO/MANUAL
BELT TRIP
SIEMENS
=D003 =C011
=C010 -S02
-H01
-S01 40 mm
E E
CABINET LABEL OVERVIEW
70
90
F F
200 mm
PLINTH
=
&ELD/7 800 mm 8.A +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CABINET LAYOUT
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=FP+GE-A01
/8.0:A
-D01
60
60 x 45
=D001 =D002 =D003
A -Q01 -Q01 -Q01 A
=D001
-T01
500
60 x 45
=D001 =D002 =D003
-K01 -K01 -K01
B B
45
45 x 45
=C001 -F01
=C001 -F02
=C001 -F03
=C003 -F07
=C001 -F04
=C003 -F05
=C003 -F06
=D003 -K02
=D003 -K03
=C012-K01
=C012-K02
=C012-K03
=C012-K04
=C012-K05
=D001-T02
=D002-T01
=D003-T01
150
=FP+GE-A01
45
45 x 45
C C
60 x 45
60 x 45
150
=D001
=D001
=D002
=D002
=C010
=C011
=C011
=C019
=C019
=C019
=C019
=D001
-K01
-K02
-K03
-K01
-K02
-K03
-K04
-K04
-K02
-K03
-K02
-K03
1896 mm
45
45 x 45
125
45
D 45 x 45 D
+GE-X0
=C001 =C001
250
-Q01 -Q02
45
45 x 45
E E
+GE
-X0
-X7
+GE
-XAC.PH -X1
+GE
45 x 45
45 x 45
436
+GE
-X2
+GE
-XT01
+GE
+GE
-X3
=C003
+GE
-X2
F -T01 F
700 mm
=
8 8.C +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.A
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CABINET LAYOUT
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL BOX
=FP+TB-A11
A A
-X41
+TB
B B
500 mm
-X21
+TB
C C
-X31
+TB
D D
400 mm
E E
210 mm
M20
M25
**M40 - 01 Nos.
F M25 - 06 Nos. F
M40 M20 - 02 Nos.
=
8.A 8.D +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.C
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL BOX -A11
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A PUSH BUTTON STATION A

=FP+TB-A12
DUST/SPILLAGE
CONTROL FCG-1 FCG-1 COMPR. AIR MAIN
ROOT BLOWER
ON OPEN CLOSE FAULT DRIVE TRIP
COLLECTOR RUN
-A12-H01 -A12-H02 -A12-H03 -A12-H04 -A12-H05 -A12-H06

-X21
RADIAL TANGENTIAL LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 02 MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE
BELT TRIP BELT TRIP RUN RUN STOP START
B B
-A12-H07 -A12-H08 -A12-H09 -A12-H10 -A12-S02 -A12-S03
380 mm
RADIAL BELT RADIAL BELT TANGENTIAL TANGENTIAL
FCG STOP FCG START
STOP START BELT STOP BELT START
-A12-S04 -A12-S05 -A12-S06 -A12-S07 -A12-S08 -A12-S09
EMERGENCY STOP
C C
-A12-S01
100 mm 80 mm 120 mm
600 mm
D D
E E
210 mm
M32 M25 M20
**M32 - 01 Nos.
F M25 - 01 Nos. F
M20 - 01 Nos.
=
8.C 8.E +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.D
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ PUSH BUTTON STATION -A12
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A PUSH BUTTON STATION A

=FP+TB-A13
DUST/SPILLAGE
CONTROL FCG-1 FCG-1 COMPR. AIR MAIN
ROOT BLOWER
ON OPEN CLOSE FAULT DRIVE TRIP
COLLECTOR RUN
-A13-H01 -A13-H02 -A13-H03 -A13-H04 -A13-H05 -A13-H06
RADIAL TANGENTIAL LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 02 MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE
-X21
BELT TRIP BELT TRIP RUN RUN STOP START
B B
-A13-H07 -A13-H08 -A13-H09 -A13-H10 -A13-S02 -A13-S03
380 mm
RADIAL BELT RADIAL BELT TANGENTIAL TANGENTIAL
FCG STOP FCG START
STOP START BELT STOP BELT START
-A13-S04 -A13-S05 -A13-S06 -A13-S07 -A13-S08 -A13-S09
EMERGENCY STOP
C C
-A13-S01
100 mm 80 mm 120 mm
600 mm
D D
E E
210 mm
M32 M25
F **M32 - 01 Nos. F
M25 - 01 Nos.
=
8.D 8.F +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.E
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ PUSH BUTTON STATION -A13
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
LOCAL PUSH BUTTON STATION
85 mm
=FP+TB-A14
CONTROL FCG-1 FCG-1

ON OPEN CLOSE
-A14-H01 -A14-H02 -A14-H03 -X21
65 mm
FCG STOP FCG START
B B
300 mm
-A14-S02 -A14-S03
65 mm
EMERGENCY STOP
-A14-S01
85 mm
C C
110 mm 80 mm 80 mm 110 mm
380 mm
D 210 mm D
E E
M32 M25 M16
380 mm
**M32 - 01 Nos.
F M25 - 01 Nos. F
M16 - 01 Nos.
=
8.E &EFC/9 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.F
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ LOCAL PUSH BUTTON -A14
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
&EDA/8.F &EFS/10 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EFC PAGE 9
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CONTROL TERMINAL LAYOUT
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q02:1/F05:1
1L1 / 15.0:A
Q02:3/F05:3
1L2 / 15.0:A
Q02:5/Q01:5
1L3 / 15.0:A
PH / 11.0:A
A A
Q01:1/Q02:1
Q01:3/Q02:3
Q01:5/Q02:5
EPH / 11.0:A
PE1 / 11.0:A
F04:1/X1:3
F04:3/X1:4
1 3 5 1 3 5
-Q01 1 3 -Q02
160-250Amp. I> I> I> -F04 125Amp. I> I> I>
MCCB C10Amp. 2 4 MAINTENANCE
2 4 6 2 4 6
MCB,2P SWITCH
B B
-F01
-H01
Q01:2/F01:1 1 2 F01:2/H01:x1 x1 x2
H01:x2/H02:x2
C2Amp.
R
-F02
-H02
Q01:4/F02:1 1 2 F02:2/H02:x1 x1 x2
C C
H02:x2/H03:x2
C2Amp.
Y
-F03
-H03
Q01:6/F03:1 1 2 F03:2/H03:x1 x1 x2
C2Amp.
B
D D
-XPE:1 -XPE:2
X0:4/H03:x2
F04:2/X1:1
F04:4/X1:2
Q01:2/X0:1
Q01:4/X0:2
Q01:6/X0:3
Q02:2/X0:6
Q02:4/X0:7
Q02:6/X0:8
GNYE
GNYE
25 sqmm 25 sqmm 25 sqmm 16 sqmm 2,5 sqmm 2,5 sqmm 2,5 sqmm GNYE
E -X0 1 2 3 4 5 -X1 1 2 PE1 -X0 6 7 8 9

E
GNYE GNYE
=FP-W1 =FP-W2
ÖLFLEX-110 ÖLFLEX-110
3.5x50 sqmm 1 2 3 0,5 16 sqmm 4x6 sqmm 1 2 GNYE
2L1
2L2
2L3
PE2
11.0:A /
11.0:A /
11.0:A /
11.0:A /
-X00 1 2 3 4 5 -X01 1 2 3
INCOMER POWER SUPPLY FILL MODULE

UPS SUPPLY
F 415 VAC 3Φ 1-12 F
230VAC, 50 HZ
3.5X70 SQ.MM. AL. CABLE
CUSTOMER SCOPE
CUSTOMER SCOPE
= C001
&EFC/9 11 + GE
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. 30100 DOCUMENT TYPE &EFS PAGE 10
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ INCOMING POWER SUPPLY
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10.6:E / 2L1
10.6:E / 2L2
10.6:E / 2L3
10.7:E / PE2
A A
10.9:A / PH
10.9:A / EPH
10.9:A / PE1
B B
-X1 3 4 PE2
=FP-W3 =FP-W4
ÖLFLEX-110 ÖLFLEX-110
4x25 sqmm 1 2 3 GNYE 3x1.5 sqmm 1 2 GNYE
=FP+TB-A11
C JUNCTION BOX -X31 1 2 3 PE -X21 1 2 PE C
/24.1:B
/32.1:C
=FP-W5
/33.1:B ÖLFLEX-110
RD YE BU GNYE RD BK GNYE
/33.6:D 25 sqmm 25 sqmm 25 sqmm 25 sqmm 3x1,5 sqmm 1,5 1,5 1,5
/37.8:C
/40.8:C
-A01
1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11' 12' 13'
SLIP RING BOX
D POWER CONTROL SPARE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 D
=FP+GE =FP+GE =FP+GE =FP+GE

-A01-W1 -A01-W2 -A01-W3 -A01-W4
ÖLFLEX-110 ÖLFLEX-110 ÖLFLEX-110 ÖLFLEX-110
E 4x6 sqmm 1 2 3 GNYE 4x6 sqmm 1 2 3 GNYE 3x1.5 sqmm 1 2 GNYE 3x1.5 sqmm 1 2 GNYE E
12.0:A / 1L1.1
12.0:A / 1L2.1
12.0:A / 1L3.1
12.0:A / PE.1
14.9:D / 1L1.2
14.9:D / 1L2.2
14.9:D / 1L3.2
14.9:E / PE.2
16.0:A / 2L1.1
16.0:A / 2L2.1
16.0:A / PE.3
18.8:E / 2L1.2
18.8:E / 2L2.2
18.8:E / PE.4
F F
= C001
10 12 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11.2:E / 1L1.1
11.2:E / 1L2.1
11.2:E / 1L3.1
11.2:E / PE.1
A A
B B
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W21
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
C C
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W22
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
D =FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
D
-A21-W23 1L1.1 / 13.0:A
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm 1L2.1 / 13.0:A
1L3.1 / 13.0:A
PE.1 / 13.0:A
E E
=FP =FP =FP =FP

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-A21 -A22 -A23 -A24
FILL MODULE 01 FILL MODULE 02 FILL MODULE 03 FILL MODULE 04
F F
= C001
11 13 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12.9:D / 1L1.1
12.9:D / 1L2.1
12.9:D / 1L3.1
12.9:E / PE.1
A A
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W24
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
B B
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W25
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
C C
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W26
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
D =FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
D
-A21-W27 1L1.1 / 14.0:A
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm 1L2.1 / 14.0:A
1L3.1 / 14.0:A
PE.1 / 14.0:A
E E
=FP =FP =FP =FP

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-A25 -A26 -A27 -A28
F F
= C001
12 14 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
13.9:D / 1L1.1
13.9:D / 1L2.1
13.9:D / 1L3.1
13.9:E / PE.1
A A
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W28
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
B B
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W29
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
C C
=FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
-A21-W30
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm
D =FP+FM 1 2 3 GNYE
D
-A21-W31 1L1.2 / 11.3:E
ÖLFLEX-110
4x6 sqmm 1L2.2 / 11.3:E
1L3.2 / 11.4:E
PE.2 / 11.4:E
E E
=FP =FP =FP =FP

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-A29 -A30 -A31 -A32
F F
= C001
13 15 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F05:1/Q01:1
10.9:A / 1L1 1L1 / 27.0:A
F05:3/Q01:3
10.9:A / 1L2 1L2 / 27.0:A
10.9:A / 1L3 1L3 / 27.0:A
A A
1 3
-F05
C10Amp. 2 4
MCB,2P
F05:2/T01:1
F05:4/T01:2
F07:1/F06:1
E01:x2/F06:3
-XPE:3
B B
1 2 PE
-T01
415/220VAC
1KVA 3 4
0VAC 110VAC 1 1 3
-F07 -F06
C2Amp. 2 C10Amp. 2 4
MCB,1P MCB,2P
T01:3/E01:x2
T01:4/F07:1
F07:2/D01:13
C C
BK RD
1.5 sqmm 1.5 sqmm
13
-D01
F06:2/XAC:11
F06:4/XAC:1
DOOR SWITCH 14
D01:14/E01:x1
T01:3/E01:x2
D D
XT01:N/T01:3
-E01
x1 x2
12 INCHES
TUBE LIGHT
BEFORE REMOVING THIS BRIDGE,
E =FP-XT01 MAKE SURE THAT AN INSULATION

E
MONITOR ACCORDING TO VDE
0113/EN60204-1 EXISTS -XAC.PH 1 2 3 -XAC.EPH 1 2 3
XAC:1/K01:A2
XAC:1/X2:1
GNYE
19.0:A / PH1
/ PH2
20.1:E / EPH1
/ EPH2
1
F -PE F
= C003
14 16 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CONTROL VOLTAGE AC
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11.5:E / 2L1.1
11.5:E / 2L2.1
11.5:E / PE.3
A A
B B
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W40
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
C =FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
C
-A21-W41
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W42
D ÖLFLEX-110 D
3x1.5 sqmm
2L1.1 / 17.0:A
2L2.1 / 17.0:A
E PE.3 / 17.0:A E
=FP =FP =FP =FP

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6
-A21 -A22 -A23 -A24

F F
= C003
15 17 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CONTROL SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16.8:E / 2L1.1
16.8:E / 2L2.1
16.8:E / PE.3
A A
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W43
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
B B
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W44
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
C =FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
C
-A21-W45
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W46
D ÖLFLEX-110 D
3x1.5 sqmm
2L1.1 / 18.0:A
2L2.1 / 18.0:A
E PE.3 / 18.0:A E
=FP =FP =FP =FP

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6
-A25 -A26 -A27 -A28

F F
= C003
16 18 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
17.8:E / 2L1.1
17.8:E / 2L2.1
17.8:E / PE.3
A A
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W47
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
B B
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W48
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
C =FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
C
-A21-W49
ÖLFLEX-110
3x1.5 sqmm
=FP+FM 1 2 GNYE
-A21-W50
D ÖLFLEX-110 D
3x1.5 sqmm
2L1.2 / 11.6:E
2L2.2 / 11.6:E
E PE.4 / 11.6:E E
=FP =FP =FP =FP

+FM +FM +FM +FM
-X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 -X21 1 2 3 4 5 6
-A29 -A30 -A31 -A32

F F
= C003
17 19 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
15.7:F / PH1 PH1 / 20.0:A
A A
=FP
+TB -X21 3
X2:5/K01:A1
-A12
/19.3:D
=FP+TB-A12-W1
36x1,5 sqmm
/19.3:C 2
=FP+TB-A13-W1
B ÖLFLEX-110 B
=FP+TB-A12-W1 36x1.5 sqmm
ÖLFLEX-110 /20.4:C
-X2 1 2
36x1,5 sqmm
3
/24.4:C
4 5
/19.7:B /24.8:C
/20.3:C /25.2:C
/20.3:E /25.5:C
/24.3:C /25.8:C
/24.7:C /26.3:B
/25.1:B /26.7:B
/26.3:B /28.6:C
/28.5:C /29.1:D
/29.1:C /29.5:C
=FP+TB-A14-W1
/29.4:D /30.1:C
C /30.1:B /31.4:B ÖLFLEX-110 C
/31.3:B /34.1:B 12x1.5 sqmm
/34.1:B /34.6:B /20.8:C
/36.5:B /36.5:D /20.8:E
/37.1:C /37.3:C /30.5:B
X2:1/S01:11
/39.5:B /39.5:D /31.6:B

/40.1:C 1 /40.2:C 1 2 /34.4:B 1 2
D D
=FP =FP =FP

+TB +TB +TB
-A12 -X21 1 2 -A13 -X21 1 2 -A14 -X21 1 2
PBS 01 X21:1/S01:11 PBS 02 X21:1/S01:11 LPBS X21:1/S01:11
/19.5:A /20.5:C /20.7:C
11 /20.3:C 11 /24.4:C 11 /30.5:B 11
/24.2:C /24.8:C /31.6:B
-S01 -S01 -S01 -S01
/24.6:C /25.2:C /34.3:B
E 12 12 12 12 E
/25.0:C /25.5:C /34.8:B
S01:12/X2:2 S01:12/X21:2 S01:12/X21:2 S01:12/X21:2
/25.3:C /25.8:C
/25.6:C /26.4:B
/26.2:B /26.8:B
/26.6:B /28.7:C
/28.5:C /29.1:D
/29.1:C /29.6:C
/29.4:C /30.1:C
/30.1:B /31.4:B
/31.2:B /34.2:B
/34.0:B /34.6:B
/34.5:B /36.5:D
/36.5:B /37.3:C
EMERGENCY STOP /37.1:C EMERGENCY STOP /39.5:D EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP
F /39.5:B /40.3:C F
/40.1:C
= C010
18 20 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ EMERGENCY STOP
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
K01:A1/K01:23
19.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 21.0:A
A A
23
-K01
/20.1:D 24
K03:73/S02:1
X2:6/K03:73
X2:6/K03:73
73
=C011
-K03 74
/21.3:D K03:74/X2:7
B B
-X2 6 7
=FP+TB 3
=FP+TB 3
-A12-W1 -A14-W1
/19.3:C =FP+TB /19.7:C
-A13-W1
/19.5:C
=FP+TB-A12 3 =FP+TB-A13 =FP+TB-A14
C /19.3:D /19.5:D /19.7:D C
-X21 4 -X21 3 -X21 3
X21:4/H01:X1 X21:3/H01:X1 X21:3/H01:X1
x1 x1 x1
-H01 -H01 -H01

GN x2 GN x2 GN x2
H01:X2/X21:N H01:X2/X21:N H01:X2/X21:N
K01:A1/H04:x1
-X21 N -X21 N -X21 N

D D
4
N2 / 24.4:E
N1 / 24.3:E N3 / 31.6:D
A1 x1
-K01 -H04
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 GN x2
=FP+TB 4
=FP+TB 4
-A12-W1 -A14-W1
/19.3:C /19.7:C
E -X2 N N E
K01:A2/H04:x2 H04:x2/X2:N X2:N/X2:N X2:N/K02:A2

15.8:F / EPH1 EPH1 / 21.0:E
13 14 /22.1:B
23 24 /20.3:A
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL

F ON ON ON ON F
= C010
19 21 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S02:1/K02:13 K02:13/K03:53 K03:53/X7:27

20.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 23.0:A
A A
COMMAN
1
1 2
-S02
AUTO/MANUAL 2 3
AUTO MANUAL
S02:2/K02:A1
S02:3/K03:A1
B B
13 53
-K02 -K03
/21.2:D 14 /21.3:D 54
K02:14/H05:x1
K03:54/H06:x1
C C
x1 x1
D -H05 -H06 D
GN x2 GN x2
A1 A1
-K02 -K03
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 220 VAC,10 Amp. A2
E E
K02:A2/K03:A2 K03:A2/H05:x2 H05:x2/H06:x2 H06:x2/K01:A2

20.8:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 23.0:E
13 14 /21.5:B 13 14 /29.2:A
43 44 /22.3:B 23 24 /32.3:A
33 34 /37.2:A
43 44 /40.2:A
53 54 /21.6:B AUTO MODE MANUAL
63 64 /22.3:B
F ON MODE ON F
73 74 /20.8:B
= C011
20 22 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ AUTO-MANUAL MODE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
X7:11/K02:21
X7:13/K02:21
X7:15/K01:13
X7:17/K01:13
X7:19/K01:43
X7:21/K03:21
X7:23/K03:21
X7:25/K03:21
X7:1/K01:13
X7:5/K01:13
X7:7/K02:43
X7:9/K03:63
X7:3/K02:31
B B
13 31 13 43 63 21 21 13 13 43 21 21 21
=C010 =D001 =D001 =C011 =C011 =D002 =D003 =D002 =D003 =C019 =D001 =D002 =D003
-K01 14
-K02 32
-K01 14
-K02 44
-K03 64
-K02 22
-K02 22
-K01 14
-K01 14
-K01 44
-K03 22
-K03 22
-K03 22
/20.1:D /28.2:D /28.3:D /21.2:D /21.3:D /36.1:D /39.1:D /36.4:D /39.4:D /24.0:D /29.4:E /37.5:D /40.5:D
K03:64/X7:10
K02:22/X7:12
K02:22/X7:14
K01:14/X7:16
K01:14/X7:18
K01:44/X7:20
K03:22/X7:22
K03:22/X7:24
K03:22/X7:26
K01:14/X7:2
K02:32/X7:4
K01:14/X7:6
K02:44/X7:8
C C
-X7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
CONTROL MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE AUTO MANUAL RADIAL TANGENTIAL RADIAL TANGENTIAL COMPR. AIR MAIN DRIVE RADIAL TANGENTIAL
D D
ON TRIP RUN MODE MODE BELT TRIP BELT TRIP BELT RUN BELT RUN HEALTHY STOP BELT STOP BELT STOP
E E
F F
= C012
21 23 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FLOATING CONTACTS
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X7:27/X2:8
21.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 24.0:A
A A
-X7 27 29 31 33 35
=FP-W6
/23.1:C
B B
ÖLFLEX-110 1 3 5 7 9
12x1 sqmm
+FIELD
FROM
CLIENT
MCC -DO1 -DO2 -DO3 -DO4 -DO5
C C
2 4 6 8 10
=FP-W6
/23.1:B
-X7 28 30 32 34 36
X7:28/K01:A1
X7:30/K02:A1
X7:32/K03:A1
X7:34/K04:A1
X7:36/K05:A1
D D
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-K01 -K02 -K03 -K04 -K05

220 VAC A2 220 VAC A2 220 VAC A2 220 VAC A2 220 VAC A2
E E
K01:A2/K02:A2 K02:A2/K03:A2 K03:A2/K04:A2 K04:A2/K05:A2 K05:A2/K01:A2

21.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 24.0:E
13 14 /24.6:A 13 14 /24.6:B 13 14 /26.1:A 13 14 /26.5:A 13 14 /24.6:C
SPILLAGE SYSTEM DUST COLLECTOR LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 01 ROOT BLOWER
F RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN F
= C012
22 24 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FLOATING CONTACTS
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X2:8/K01:31 K01:31/K01:13 K01:13/K02:23 K02:23/K02:13

23.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 25.0:A
A A
13 23
PRESSURE SWITCH =C012
-S03 -K02
-K01 14 /24.6:D 24
P /23.1:D
K01:14/K02:13
K02:24/X2:12
13 14
=FP+TB
-A11-W2 31
ÖLFLEX-110 -K01
3x1.5 sqmm 1 2 /24.0:D 32
K01:32/X2:10
B
13
=C012
=FP -K02
-X41 1 2
/23.3:D
14
+TB
-A11
/11.1:C
K02:14/K05:13
-X2 8 =FP+TB -X2 10 11 12 13
-A11-W1
ÖLFLEX-110
18x1.5 1 2
=FP+TB 5
=FP+TB 6
-A12-W1 -A12-W1
C /19.3:C 13 /19.3:C C
=C012
-K05 14
/23.6:D
=FP+TB =FP+TB
X2:10/H07:x1
-A13-W1 -A13-W1
/19.5:C /19.5:C
K05:14/K02:A1
=FP =FP =FP =FP
X2:12/H08:x1
5 6
+TB +TB +TB +TB

-A12 -A13 -A12 -A13
-X2 9
/19.3:D /19.5:D /19.3:D /19.5:D
-X21 5 -X21 4 -X21 6 -X21 5
X21:5/H04:X1 X21:4/H04:X1 X21:6/H05:X1 X21:5/H05:X1

X2:9/K01:A1
x1 x1
D -H07 x1 x1 -H08 x1 x1 D
RD x2 -H04 -H04 GN x2 -H05 -H05
RD x2 RD x2 GN x2 GN x2
H04:X2/X21:N H04:X2/X21:N H05:X2/X21:N H05:X2/X21:N
A1 A1
-X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N
-K01 -K02
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 20.3:D / N1 N1 / 24.7:E 20.6:D / N2 N2 / 24.8:E 220 VAC A2 24.3:E / N1 N1 / 25.1:D 24.5:E / N2 N2 / 25.2:D
10 Amp.
E E
K01:A2/H07:x2 H07:x2/K02:A2 K02:A2/H08:x2 H08:x2/K03:A2

23.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 26.0:E
13 14 /29.1:A 13 14 /29.1:B
31 32 /24.2:B 23 24 /24.6:A
43 44 /22.6:B
COMPR. AIR COMPR. AIR COMPR. AIR DUST/SPILLAGE DUST/SPILLAGE DUST/SPILLAGE

F FAULT FAULT FAULT COLLECTOR RUN ROOT BLOWER ROOT BLOWER F
COLLECTOR RUN COLLECTOR RUN
= C019
23 25 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FLOW CONTROL GATE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
K02:13/K02:13 K02:13/K02:13 K02:13/K03:13

24.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 26.0:A
A A
13 13 13
=D001 =D002 =D003
-K02 14
-K02 14
-K02 14
/28.2:D /36.1:D /39.1:D
K02:14/X2:14 K02:14/X2:15 K02:14/X2:16
-X2 14 15 16
B B
7 8 9
=FP+TB-A12-W1
/19.3:C
=FP+TB =FP+TB =FP+TB

-A13-W1 -A13-W1 -A13-W1
/19.5:C /19.5:C /19.5:C
C C
=FP 7 =FP =FP 8 =FP =FP 9 =FP
+TB +TB +TB +TB +TB +TB
-A12 -A13 -A12 -A13 -A12 -A13
/19.3:D -X21 7 /19.5:D -X21 6 /19.3:D -X21 8 /19.5:D -X21 7 /19.3:D -X21 9 /19.5:D -X21 8
X21:7/H06:X1 X21:6/H06:X1 X21:8/H07:X1 X21:7/H07:X1 X21:9/H08:X1 X21:8/H08:X1
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
-H06 -H06 -H07 -H07 -H08 -H08

RD x2 RD x2 RD x2 RD x2 RD x2 RD x2
H06:X2/X21:N H06:X2/X21:N H07:X2/X21:N H07:X2/X21:N H08:X2/X21:N H08:X2/X21:N

D D
-X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N
24.7:E / N1 N1 / 25.4:D 24.9:E / N2 N2 / 25.5:D 25.1:D / N1 N1 / 25.7:D 25.3:D / N2 N2 / 25.9:D 25.4:D / N1 N1 / 26.3:D 25.6:D / N2 N2 / 26.4:D
E E
MAIN MAIN RADIAL RADIAL TANGENTIAL TANGENTIAL

F DRIVE TRIP DRIVE TRIP BELT TRIP BELT TRIP BELT TRIP BELT TRIP F
= C019
24 26 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
K03:13/K04:13 K04:13/Q01:21
25.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 28.0:A
A A
13 13
=C012 =C012
-K03 14
-K04 14
/23.4:D /23.5:D
K03:14/X2:17 K04:14/X2:19
-X2 17 18 19 20
B B
=FP+TB 10 11
X2:17/K03:A1 -A12-W1
/19.3:C =FP+TB =FP+TB
-A13-W1 -A13-W1
/19.5:C /19.5:C
=FP 10 =FP =FP 11 =FP
+TB +TB +TB +TB
-A12 -A13 -A12 -A13
/19.3:D -X21 10 /19.5:D -X21 9 /19.3:D -X21 11 /19.5:D -X21 10
X21:10/H09:X1 X21:9/H09:X1 X21:11/H10:X1 X21:10/H10:X1
C x1 x1 x1 x1 C
-H09 -H09 -H10 -H10
GN x2 GN x2 GN x2 GN x2
H09:X2/X21:N H09:X2/X21:N H10:X2/X21:N H10:X2/X21:N
-X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N
25.7:D / N1 N1 / 26.7:D 25.9:D / N2 N2 / 26.8:D 26.3:D / N1 N1 / 28.5:D 26.4:D / N2 N2 / 28.7:D

X2:19/K04:A1
K03:A1/H09:x1 K04:A1/H10:x1
D D
A1 x1 A1 x1
-K03 -H09 -K04 -H10

220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 GN x2 220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 GN x2
E E
K03:A2/H09:x2 H09:x2/K04:A2 K04:A2/H10:x2 H10:x2/H01:x2

24.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 28.0:E
13 14 /37.1:A 23 24 /40.1:A
LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 01 LONG CONV. 02 LONG CONV. 02 LONG CONV. 02
F RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN F
= C019
25 27 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q01:1/Q01:1
15.9:A / 1L1 1L1 / 35.0:A
Q01:3/Q01:3
15.9:A / 1L2 1L2 / 35.0:A
Q01:5/Q01:5
15.9:A / 1L3 1L3 / 35.0:A
A A
1 3 5 13 21
-Q01
6.3-10 Amp. 14 22
MPCB,3P
/28.3:A
/28.2:A
I> I> I>
2 4 6
B -K03 B
Q01:2/T01:U1
Q01:4/T01:V1
Q01:6/T01:W1
53 54
/29.4:E
+24V GND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 SRC B A AGND SCR
-T01
/32.4:D U1 V1 W1 PE X1.10 X1.11 X1.12 X1.13 X1.14 X1.15 X1.16 X1.17 X1.18 X3.28 X3.29 X3.30 X3.31 X3.32
/29.8:D
C C
U2 V2 W2 PE' BRK+ BRK- X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.9 X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26 X1.27
SRC AI1 AGND +10V AI2 AGND AO1 AO2 AGND RO1C RO1A RO1B RO2C RO2A RO2B RO3C RO3A RO3B
D D
T01:U2/K01:1
T01:V2/K01:3
T01:W2/K01:5
-RL1 -RL2
1 3 5
-K01
/28.3:D 2 4 6
-XPE:4
K01:2/X3:1
K01:4/X3:2
K01:6/X3:3
GNYE
E E
-X3 1 2 3 PE3
-M01-W1
MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE
ÖLFLEX-110 1 2 3 GNYE
RUN HEALTHY
4x6 sqmm
-M01
2.2KW
U1 V1 W1 PE
MAIN DRIVE
M
F 3 F
= D001
26 28 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FILLPAC MAIN DRIVE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q01:21/Q01:13 Q01:13/X2:27
26.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 29.0:A
E1 / 29.0:A
K02:21/K01:13
A A
21 13 21
-Q01 -Q01 -K02

/27.1:B 22 /27.1:B 14 /28.2:D 22
Q01:22/K02:A1 Q01:14/K03:13
K03:13/K02:22
B B
13
-K03
/29.4:E 14
X2:21/H02:x1 H02:x1/X2:22
X2:21/H02:x1
-X2 21 22
12
=FP+TB-A12-W1
/19.3:C
=FP+TB
C C
-A13-W1
/19.5:C
=FP 12 =FP
+TB +TB
-A12 -A13
H01:x1/K02:A1
/19.3:D -X21 12 /19.5:D -X21 11
X21:12/S03:X1 X21:11/S03:X1
x1 x1
-S03 -S03
x1 x1 /29.4:C x2 /29.7:C x2
GN GN
D -H01 -H02 D
S03:X2/X21:N S03:X2/X21:N
RD x2 GN x2
X2:21/K01:A1
-X21 N -X21 N
A1 A1 26.7:D / N1 N1 / 31.3:D 26.8:D / N2 N2 / 31.5:D

-K02 -K01
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 220 VAC A2
17 Amp.
E E
H01:x2/K02:A2 K02:A2/K01:A2 K01:A2/H02:x2 H02:x2/K03:A2

26.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 29.0:E
13 14 /25.1:A 1 2 /27.1:D
21 22 /28.4:A 3 4 /27.1:D
31 32 /22.2:B 5 6 /27.1:D
13 14 /22.2:B
MAIN DRIVE 43 44 /37.7:A MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE
TRIP 53 54 /40.7:A RUN START START
F F
= D001
27 29 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
28.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 30.0:A

28.9:A / E1
A A
K01:13/K03:13
13
=C019
-K01 14 13
/24.0:D K01:14/K02:13 =C011
-K03 14
13
=C019 /21.3:D
-K02 14
K02:14/K03:14
/24.6:D
K02:14/X2:23 X2:25/K03:23
B B
-X2 23 24 25
=FP+TB
-A12-W1 =FP+TB
/19.3:C 13 14 15
-A13-W1
/19.5:C
=FP 15 =FP
=FP +TB +TB
+TB -X21 13 15 -A12 -A13
X21:13/S02:11
-A12 /19.3:D -X21 16 /19.5:D -X21 14
C /19.3:D 11 23 C
-S02 -K03
X21:16/S03:13 X21:14/S03:13
RD 12 /29.4:E 24
13 13
S02:12/X21:14
-S03 -S03
/28.5:D 14 /28.7:D 14
-X21 14 GN GN K03:24/T01:22
S03:14/X21:17 S03:14/X21:15
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C 13 14
-X21 17 -X21 15
22
D =FP 16
-T01 D
+TB /27.0:C 24
-A13 -X21 12 13
/19.5:D
=FP+TB
X21:21/S02:11
-A12-W1
/19.3:C 16
11
-S02
RD 12
-X2 26
S02:12/X21:13
X2:26/T01:24
X2:26/K03:A1
A1
E -K03 E
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2
K03:A2/K04:A2
28.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 30.0:E
13 14 /28.3:B
21 22 /22.7:B
23 24 /29.8:C
33 34 /32.2:A
53 54 /27.3:B
MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE MAIN DRIVE

F STOP START START F
= D001
28 30 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
29.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 33.0:A

X2:33/K04:13
K04:A1/X2:34 X2:34/K04:14
A X2:30/K04:A1 A
-X2 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
=FP+TB =FP+TB
-A12-W1 -A14-W1
/19.3:C 17 18 19 20 /19.7:C 5 6 7 8
=FP =FP
B +TB +TB B
-A12 -A14 -X21 4 5 6 7
/19.3:D -X21 18 20 21 22 /19.7:D
X21:18/S04:11 X21:21/S05:13 X21:4/S02:11 X21:6/S03:11
11 13 11 11 13
S05:14/X21:22
-S04 -S05 -S02 -S03 -K04
RD 12 /31.3:C 14 12 /31.7:C 12 /30.4:D 14
S04:12/X21:19 GN S02:12/X21:5 S03:12/X21:7
-X21 19
C C
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C 17 18 19 20
=FP
+TB
-A13 -X21 16 17 18 19
/19.5:D X21:16/S04:11 X21:18/S05:13
11 13
K04:A1/H03:x1
D -S04 -S05 E2 / 31.0:A D
RD 12 /31.5:C 14
S04:12/X21:17 GN S05:14/X21:19
A1
-K04
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2
E E
K04:A2/H03:x2
29.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 31.0:E
13 14 /30.8:C
F FCG STOP FCG START FCG STOP FCG START F
= D001
29 31 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H03:x1/X2:35 X2:36/K03:33
30.9:D / E2 E2 / 32.0:A
A A
-X2 35 36
=FP+TB =FP+TB
-A12-W1 -A14-W1
/19.3:C 21 /19.7:C 9
B B
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C
=FP 21 =FP =FP
+TB +TB +TB
-A12 -A13 -A14
/19.3:D -X21 23 /19.5:D -X21 20 /19.7:D -X21 8
X21:23/S05:x1 X21:20/S05:X1 X21:8/S03:X1
C x1 x1 x1 x1 C
-H03 -S05 -S05 -S03
GN x2 /30.2:C x2 /30.2:D x2 /30.6:C x2
GN GN GN
S05:X2/X21:N S05:X2/X21:N S03:X2/X21:N
-X21 N -X21 N -X21 N
28.5:D / N1 N1 / 34.1:D 28.7:D / N2 N2 / 34.2:D 20.8:D / N3 N3 / 34.4:D
D D
E E
H03:x2/T02:A2
30.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 32.0:E
F FCG START FCG START FCG START FCG START F
= D001
30 32 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
31.9:A / E2
A K03:33/K03:23 A
33 23
=C011 +FIELD
-K03 -Y01 -Y02 -Y05
/29.4:E 34
-K03 24
/21.3:D
K03:34/K03:24
K03:34/X2:37 -B01 PE x1 x2 x1 x2 x1 x2
PACKER BIN - +
HIGH LEVEL SENSOR 1 2 PE PE PE
B -X2 37
B
=FP-W8
ÖLFLEX-110
=FP+TB 12x1.5 sqmm
/33.7:C
-A11-W1 =FP-W7
/33.7:D
/24.1:C 3 ÖLFLEX-110 /37.8:C
3x1.5 sqmm 1 2 PE /40.8:C 1 2 3 4 5 6
=FP+TB-A11
/11.1:C
-X41 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
C -PE C
=FP+TB
-A11-W1
/24.1:C 4 5 6
-X2 38 39 N
X2:38/T01:15
D D
T02:A1/T01:15
A1 16 15
-T02 -T01
ON DELAY TIMER A2 /27.0:C 18
T01:18/X2:39
E E
T02:A2/X2:N X2:N/H04:x2
31.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 33.0:E
FCG-1 FCG-1 PCV-1

F OPEN POSITION CLOSE POSITION OPEN/CLOSE F
POSITION
= D001
31 33 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X2:40/Q01:21
30.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 36.0:A
+FIELD
A A
14 14 13
-X2 40 -S01 -S02 -S03

FCG 1 13 FCG 1 13 PCV 14
=FP+TB =FP-W9 =FP-W10

B ÖLFLEX-110 ÖLFLEX-110 B
-A11-W1
/24.1:C 7 5x1.5 sqmm 1 2 3 4 3x1.5 sqmm 1 2
=FP+TB-A11
/11.1:C
-X41 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
C C
=FP+TB =FP-W8
-A11-W1 /32.5:C 7
/24.1:C 8 9
+FIELD
-X2 41
42
x1
-Y06 PE
x2
=FP-W8
/32.5:C 8
D E3 / 34.0:A E4 / 34.0:A D
X2:41/H04:x1 X2:42/H05:x1 =FP+TB

-X41 19
-A11
/11.1:C
x1 x1 =FP+TB
-H04 -H05 -A11-W1
GN x2 GN x2 /24.1:C 10
E -X2 N E
H04:x2/H05:x2 H05:x2/X2:N X2:N/K02:A2

32.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 36.0:E
FCG FCG PCV-2

F OPEN CLOSE OPEN TO F
ATMOSPHERE
= D001
32 34 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
33.4:D / E3
33.5:D / E4
A A
-X2 43 44 45 46
=FP+TB-A12-W1
/19.3:C 22 23
=FP+TB-A14-W1
/19.7:C 10 11
B =FP+TB =FP+TB B
-A13-W1 -A13-W1
/19.5:C /19.5:C
=FP 22 =FP =FP =FP 23 =FP =FP
+TB +TB +TB +TB +TB +TB
-A12 -A13 -A14 -A12 -A13 -A14
/19.3:D /19.5:D /19.7:D /19.3:D /19.5:D /19.7:D
-X21 24 -X21 21 -X21 9 -X21 25 -X21 22 -X21 10
X21:24/H02:x1 X21:21/H02:x1 X21:9/H02:x1 X21:25/H03:x1 X21:22/H03:x1 X21:10/H03:x1
C x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 C
-H02 -H02 -H02 -H03 -H03 -H03
GN x2 GN x2 GN x2 GN x2 GN x2 GN x2
H02:x2/X21:N H02:x2/X21:N H02:x2/X21:N H03:x2/X21:N H03:x2/X21:N H03:x2/X21:N
-X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N -X21 N
31.3:D / N1 N1 / 34.5:D 31.5:D / N2 N2 / 34.7:D 31.7:D / N3 N3 / 34.8:D 34.1:D / N1 N1 / 37.2:D 34.2:D / N2 N2 / 37.4:D 34.4:D / N3 N3 /
D D
E E
FCG-1 FCG-1 FCG-1 FCG-1 FCG-1 FCG-1

F OPEN OPEN OPEN CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE F
= D001
33 35 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q01:1/Q01:1
27.9:A / 1L1 1L1 / 38.0:A
Q01:3/Q01:3
27.9:A / 1L2 1L2 / 38.0:A
Q01:5/Q01:5
27.9:A / 1L3 1L3 / 38.0:A
A A
1 3 5 13 21
-Q01
2.8-4 Amp. 14 22
MPCB
/36.5:A
/36.1:A
I> I> I>
2 4 6
B B
Q01:2/K01:1
Q01:4/K01:3
Q01:6/K01:5
C 1 3 5 C
-K01
/36.4:D 2 4 6
D D
-XPE:5
K01:2/X3:4
K01:4/X3:5
K01:6/X3:6
GNYE
E E
-X3 4 5 6 PE4
-M01-W1
4x6 sqmm
-M01
1.5KW
RADIAL CONVEYOR U1 V1 W1 PE
M
3
F F
= D002
34 36 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ RADIAL DRIVE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q01:21/Q01:13 Q01:13/K01:43
33.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 37.0:A
E5 / 37.0:A
A A
21 13
-Q01 -Q01
/35.1:B 22 /35.1:B 14
Q01:14/X2:47 X2:48/K03:13
-X2 47 48
=FP+TB
-A12-W1
B /19.3:C 24 25 B
=FP
+TB -X21 26 28
-A12 X21:26/S06:11
/19.3:D
Q01:22/K02:A1 T01:15/X2:47
11
-S06
RD 12
S06:12/X21:27
C 16 15 C
-T01
/37.6:D 18
-X21 27
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C 24 25
T01:18/K01:A1
=FP
K02:A1/H01:x1 +TB
D D
-A13 -X21 23 24
/19.5:D X21:23/S06:11
11
A1 x1 A1 -S06
-K02 -H01 -K01 RD 12
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 RD x2 220 VAC A2

17 Amp. S06:12/X21:24
E E
K02:A2/H01:x2 H01:x2/K01:A2 K01:A2/K03:A2

33.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 37.0:E
13 14 /25.4:A 1 2 /35.1:C
21 22 /22.4:B 3 4 /35.1:C
5 6 /35.1:C
13 14 /22.5:B
RADIAL BELT RADIAL BELT
F TRIP STOP F
= D002
35 37 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
K01:43/Q01:21
36.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 39.0:A
K03:13/K03:13
36.9:A / E5
A K03:13/K03:33 A
13 33 43
=C019 =C011 =D001
-K03 14
-K03 34
-K01 44
+FIELD
/26.1:D /21.3:D
K03:14/K03:34
/28.3:D -Y03
K01:44/K03:43
K03:14/X2:49
13 43
x1 x2
-K03 -K03
X2:49/K03:23
/37.5:D 14 /37.5:D 44
PE
X2:51/K03:A1 K03:44/X2:52
B B
-X2 49 50 51 -X2 52
=FP+TB =FP-W8
-A12-W1 23 18x1.5 sqmm
/19.3:C 26 27 28 /32.5:C 9 10
-K03
/37.5:D 24
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C
C C
=FP 26 =FP =FP+TB-A11
+TB 27 +TB /11.1:C -X41 20 21
-A12 28 -A13
/19.3:D /19.5:D K03:A1/K03:24
=FP+TB
-A11-W1
/24.1:C 11 12
-X21 29 30 31 -X21 25 26 27
X21:29/S07:13 X21:31/S07:x1 X21:25/S07:13 X21:27/S07:x1
13 x1 13 x1
K03:14/T01:A1
D -S07 GN -S07 GN D
GN 14 x2 GN 14 x2
S07:14/X21:30 S07:x2/X21:N S07:x2/X21:N
S07:14/X21:26
-X21 N -X21 N
A1 A1
34.5:D / N1 N1 / 40.1:D 34.7:D / N2 N2 / 40.4:D -K03 -T01

220 VAC A2 OFF DELAY TIMER A2
10 Amp.
E -X2 N E
K03:A2/T01:A2 T01:A2/X2:N X2:N/K02:A2

36.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 39.0:E
13 14 /37.6:B 15 18 /36.4:C
16
21 22 /22.8:B
23 24 /37.6:C
43 44 /37.7:B BAG DISCHARGE
RADIAL BELT RADIAL BELT INTERLOCK
F START START F
= D002
36 38 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
35.9:A / 1L1
35.9:A / 1L2
35.9:A / 1L3
A A
1 3 5 13 21
-Q01
2.8-4 A 14 22
MPCB
/39.5:A
/39.1:A
I> I> I>
2 4 6
B B
Q01:2/K01:1
Q01:4/K01:3
Q01:6/K01:5
C 1 3 5 C
-K01
/39.4:D 2 4 6
D D
-XPE:6
K01:2/X3:7
K01:4/X3:8
K01:6/X3:9
GNYE
E E
-X3 7 8 9 PE5
-M01-W1
4x6 sqmm
-M01
1.5KW
TANGENTIAL CONVEYOR U1 V1 W1 PE
M
3
F F
= D003
37 39 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TANGENTIAL DRIVE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q01:21/Q01:13 Q01:13/K01:53
37.9:A / PH1 PH1 / 40.0:A
E6 / 40.0:A
A A
21 13
-Q01 -Q01
/38.1:B 22 /38.1:B 14
Q01:14/X2:53 X2:54/K04:23
-X2 53 54
=FP+TB
-A12-W1
B /19.3:C 29 30 B
=FP
+TB
-A12 -X21 32 34
/19.3:D X21:32/S08:11
Q01:22/K02:A1 T01:15/X2:53
11
-S08
RD 12
S08:12/X21:33
C 16 15 C
-T01
/40.6:D 18
-X21 33
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C 29 30
T01:18/K01:A1
=FP
K02:A1/H01:x1 +TB
D D
-A13 -X21 28 29
/19.5:D X21:28/S08:11
11
A1 x1 A1 -S08
-K02 -H01 -K01 RD 12
220 VAC,10 Amp. A2 RD x2 220 VAC A2

17 Amp. S08:12/X21:29
E E
K02:A2/H01:x2 H01:x2/K01:A2 K01:A2/K03:A2

37.9:E / EPH1 EPH1 / 40.0:E
13 14 /25.7:A 1 2 /38.1:C
21 22 /22.5:B 3 4 /38.1:C
5 6 /38.1:C
13 14 /22.6:B
TANGENTIAL TANGENTIAL
F BELT TRIP BELT STOP F
= D003
38 40 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
39.9:A / PH1
K04:23/K03:13
39.9:A / E6
A K04:23/K03:43 A
23 43 53
=C019 =C011 =D001
-K04 24
-K03 44
-K01 54
+FIELD
/26.5:D K04:24/K03:44
/21.3:D /28.3:D -Y04
K01:54/K03:43
K04:24/X2:55
13 43
X2:55/K03:23 x1 x2
-K03 -K03
/40.5:D 14 /40.5:D 44
PE
X2:57/K03:A1 X2:58/K03:44
B B
-X2 55 56 57 58
=FP-W8
=FP+TB-A12-W1 23 18x1.5 sqmm
/19.3:C 31 32 33 /32.5:C 11 12
-K03
/40.5:D 24
=FP+TB
-A13-W1
/19.5:C
C C
=FP 31 =FP =FP+TB-A11
+TB 32 +TB /11.1:C -X41 22 23
-A12 33 -A13
/19.3:D /19.5:D K03:A1/K03:24
=FP+TB
-A11-W1
/24.1:C 13 14
-X21 35 36 37 -X21 30 31 32
X21:35/S09:13 X21:37/S09:x1 X21:30/S09:13 X21:32/S09:x1
13 x1 13 x1
D -S09 RD -S09 RD D
GN 14 x2 GN 14 x2
S09:14/X21:36 S09:x2/X21:N S09:x2/X21:N K03:14/T01:A1
-X21 N S09:14/X21:311
-X21 N
A1 A1
37.2:D / N1 37.4:D / N2 -K03 -T01

220 VAC A2 OFF DELAY TIMER A2
10 Amp.
E -X2 N E
K03:A2/T01:A2 T01:A2/X2:N
39.9:E / EPH1
15 18 /39.4:C
16
TANGENTIAL TANGENTIAL 13 14 /40.6:B BAG DISCHARGE

F BELT START BELT START 21 22 /22.8:B INTERLOCK F
23 24 /40.5:C
43 44 /40.7:B
= D003
39 &EMA/1 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X0
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-W3
=FP-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
TARGET DESIGNATION ARTICLE NUMBER TARGET DESIGNATION PAGE.COLUMN:ROW

1 -X00 1 97253 1 =C001-Q01 2 &EFS/10.1:E
2 -X00 2 97253 2 =C001-Q01 4 &EFS/10.1:E
3 -X00 3 97253 3 =C001-Q01 6 &EFS/10.1:E
0,5 -X00 4 97253 4 =C001-H03 x2 &EFS/10.1:E
97254 5 &EFS/10.2:E
C C
1 +TB-A11-X31 1 96774 6 =C001-Q02 2 &EFS/10.6:E
2 +TB-A11-X31 2 96774 7 =C001-Q02 4 &EFS/10.6:E
3 +TB-A11-X31 3 96774 8 =C001-Q02 6 &EFS/10.6:E
GNYE +TB-A11-X31 PE 96780 9 &EFS/10.7:E
D D
E E
F F
=
&EFS/40 2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EMA PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-X0
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X1
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-W4
=FP-W2
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110

1 -X01 1 96772 1 =C001-F04 2 &EFS/10.3:E
2 -X01 2 96772 2 =C001-F04 4 &EFS/10.4:E
1 +TB-A11-X21 1 96710 3 =C001-F04 1 &EFS/11.5:B
2 +TB-A11-X21 2 96710 4 =C001-F04 3 &EFS/11.5:B
GNYE +TB-A11-X21 PE PE =FP-A01-XPE &ELD/7.4:B
C C
GNYE -X01 3 96779 PE1 &EFS/10.4:E
GNYE +TB-A11-X21 PE 96776 PE2 &EFS/11.5:B
D D
E E
F F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X2
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP+TB-A11-W1
=FP+TB-A14-W1
=FP+TB-A12-W1
=FP+TB-A12-W1
=FP+TB-A11-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
=C010-S01 11 96710 1 -XAC.PH 1:2 &EFS/19.1:B
=C010-S01 12 96710 2 &EFS/19.2:B
1 +TB-A12-X21 1 96710 3 &EFS/19.3:B
1 +TB-A14-X21 1 96710 4 +TB-A12-X21 3 2 &EFS/19.7:B
2 +TB-A14-X21 2 96710 5 =C010-K01 A1 &EFS/19.8:B
C C
3 +TB-A12-X21 4 96710 6 =C010-K01 24 &EFS/20.3:B
=C011-K03 73
3 +TB-A14-X21 3 96710 7 =C011-K03 74 &EFS/20.8:B
1 +TB-A11-X41 1 96710 8 -X7 27 &EFS/24.0:C
=C019-K01 31
=C019-K01 A1 96710 9 +TB-A11-X41 2 2 &EFS/24.0:D
=C019-H07 x1 96710 10 =C019-K01 32 &EFS/24.2:C
5 +TB-A12-X21 5 96710 11 &EFS/24.3:C
D =C019-H08 x1 96710 12 =C019-K02 24 &EFS/24.6:C D
6 +TB-A12-X21 6 96710 13 &EFS/24.7:C
7 +TB-A12-X21 7 96710 14 =D001-K02 14 &EFS/25.1:B
8 +TB-A12-X21 8 96710 15 =D002-K02 14 &EFS/25.4:B
9 +TB-A12-X21 9 96710 16 =D003-K02 14 &EFS/25.7:B
=C019-K03 A1 96710 17 =C012-K03 14 &EFS/26.1:B
10 +TB-A12-X21 10 96710 18 &EFS/26.3:B
=C019-K04 A1 96710 19 =C012-K04 14 &EFS/26.5:B
11 +TB-A12-X21 11 96710 20 &EFS/26.7:B
E =D001-K01 A1 96710 21 =D001-K03 14 &EFS/28.3:C E
=D001-H02 x1
12 +TB-A12-X21 12 96710 22 =D001-H02 x1 &EFS/28.5:C
13 +TB-A12-X21 13 96710 23 =C019-K02 14 &EFS/29.1:B
14 +TB-A12-X21 15 96710 24 &EFS/29.2:B
15 +TB-A12-X21 16 96710 25 =D001-K03 23 &EFS/29.4:B
=D001-K03 A1 96710 26 +TB-A12-X21 17 16 &EFS/29.4:D
=D001-T01 24
F F
=
2 4 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X2
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP+TB-A11-W1
=FP+TB-A14-W1
=FP+TB-A12-W1
=FP+TB-A11-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
17 +TB-A12-X21 18 96710 27 =D001-Q01 13 &EFS/30.1:A
18 +TB-A12-X21 20 96710 28 &EFS/30.1:A
19 +TB-A12-X21 21 96710 29 &EFS/30.2:A
20 +TB-A12-X21 22 96710 30 =D001-K04 A1 &EFS/30.2:A
5 +TB-A14-X21 4 96710 31 &EFS/30.5:A
C C
6 +TB-A14-X21 5 96710 32 &EFS/30.6:A
7 +TB-A14-X21 6 96710 33 =D001-K04 13 &EFS/30.6:A
8 +TB-A14-X21 7 96710 34 =D001-K04 A1 &EFS/30.7:A
=D001-K04 14
21 +TB-A12-X21 23 96710 35 =D001-H03 x1 &EFS/31.3:A
9 +TB-A14-X21 8 96710 36 =D001-K03 33 &EFS/31.7:A
3 +TB-A11-X41 3 96710 37 =D001-K03 34 &EFS/32.2:B
=D001-T01 15 96710 38 +TB-A11-X41 4 4 &EFS/32.4:D
D =D001-T01 18 96710 39 +TB-A11-X41 6 5 &EFS/32.5:D D
7 +TB-A11-X41 12 96710 40 =D002-Q01 21 &EFS/33.1:A
8 +TB-A11-X41 14 96710 41 =D001-H04 x1 &EFS/33.3:D
9 +TB-A11-X41 16 96710 42 =D001-H05 x1 &EFS/33.5:D
22 +TB-A12-X21 24 96710 43 &EFS/34.1:A
10 +TB-A14-X21 9 96710 44 &EFS/34.4:A
23 +TB-A12-X21 25 96710 45 &EFS/34.5:A
11 +TB-A14-X21 10 96710 46 &EFS/34.8:A
24 +TB-A12-X21 26 96710 47 =D002-Q01 14 &EFS/36.5:B
E =D002-T01 15 E
25 +TB-A12-X21 28 96710 48 =C019-K03 13 &EFS/36.6:B
26 +TB-A12-X21 29 96710 49 =C019-K03 14 &EFS/37.1:B
=D002-K03 23
27 +TB-A12-X21 30 96710 50 &EFS/37.1:B
28 +TB-A12-X21 31 96710 51 =D002-K03 A1 &EFS/37.2:B
11 +TB-A11-X41 20 96710 52 =D002-K03 44 &EFS/37.7:B
29 +TB-A12-X21 32 96710 53 =D003-Q01 14 &EFS/39.5:B
F F
=
3 5 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X2
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP+TB-A11-W1
=FP+TB-A12-W1
=FP+TB-A14-W1
=FP+TB-A12-W1
=FP+TB-A11-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
=D003-T01 15
30 +TB-A12-X21 34 96710 54 =C019-K04 23 &EFS/39.6:B
31 +TB-A12-X21 35 96710 55 =C019-K04 24 &EFS/40.1:B
=D003-K03 23
32 +TB-A12-X21 36 96710 56 &EFS/40.1:B
C C
33 +TB-A12-X21 37 96710 57 =D003-K03 A1 &EFS/40.2:B
13 +TB-A11-X41 22 96710 58 =D003-K03 44 &EFS/40.7:B
=C011-K02 A2 96710 N +TB-A14-X21 N 4 &EFS/20.8:E
=C010-H04 x2 96710 N +TB-A12-X21 N 4 &EFS/20.3:E
=D002-T01 A2 96710 N +TB-A11-X41 21 12 &EFS/37.7:E
=D003-K02 A2
10 +TB-A11-X41 19 96710 N =D001-H05 x2 &EFS/33.7:E
=D002-K02 A2
D =D001-T02 A2 96710 N +TB-A11-X41 7 6 &EFS/32.6:D D
=D001-H04 x2
=D003-T01 A2 96710 N +TB-A11-X41 23 14 &EFS/40.7:E
E E
F F
=
4 6 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X3
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=D003-M01-W1
=D002-M01-W1
=D001-M01-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110

1 =D001-M01 U1 96772 1 =D001-K01 2 &EFS/27.1:E
2 =D001-M01 V1 96772 2 =D001-K01 4 &EFS/27.1:E
3 =D001-M01 W1 96772 3 =D001-K01 6 &EFS/27.1:E
GNYE =D001-M01 PE 96779 PE3 &EFS/27.1:E
1 =D002-M01 U1 96772 4 =D002-K01 2 &EFS/35.1:E
C C
2 =D002-M01 V1 96772 5 =D002-K01 4 &EFS/35.1:E
3 =D002-M01 W1 96772 6 =D002-K01 6 &EFS/35.1:E
GNYE =D002-M01 PE 96779 PE4 &EFS/35.2:E
1 =D003-M01 U1 96772 7 =D003-K01 2 &EFS/38.1:E
2 =D003-M01 V1 96772 8 =D003-K01 4 &EFS/38.1:E
3 =D003-M01 W1 96772 9 =D003-K01 6 &EFS/38.1:E
GNYE =D003-M01 PE 96779 PE5 &EFS/38.2:E
D D
E E
F F
=
5 7 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X7
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-W6
=FP-W6
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
96710 1 =C010-K01 13 &EFS/22.1:D
96710 2 =C010-K01 14 &EFS/22.1:D
96710 3 =D001-K02 31 &EFS/22.1:D
96710 4 =D001-K02 32 &EFS/22.2:D
96710 5 =D001-K01 13 &EFS/22.2:D
C C
96710 6 =D001-K01 14 &EFS/22.2:D
96710 7 =C011-K02 43 &EFS/22.3:D
96710 8 =C011-K02 44 &EFS/22.3:D
96710 9 =C011-K03 63 &EFS/22.3:D
96710 10 =C011-K03 64 &EFS/22.3:D
96710 11 =D002-K02 21 &EFS/22.4:D
96710 12 =D002-K02 22 &EFS/22.4:D
96710 13 =D003-K02 21 &EFS/22.4:D
D 96710 14 =D003-K02 22 &EFS/22.5:D D
96710 15 =D002-K01 13 &EFS/22.5:D
96710 16 =D002-K01 14 &EFS/22.5:D
96710 17 =D003-K01 13 &EFS/22.5:D
96710 18 =D003-K01 14 &EFS/22.6:D
96710 19 =C019-K01 43 &EFS/22.6:D
96710 20 =C019-K01 44 &EFS/22.6:D
96710 21 =D001-K03 21 &EFS/22.7:D
96710 22 =D001-K03 22 &EFS/22.7:D
E 96710 23 =D002-K03 21 &EFS/22.7:D E
96710 24 =D002-K03 22 &EFS/22.8:D
96710 25 =D003-K03 21 &EFS/22.8:D
96710 26 =D003-K03 22 &EFS/22.8:D
1 =C012+FIELD-DO1 96710 27 =C011-K03 53 &EFS/23.1:B
-X2 8
=C012-K01 A1 96710 28 =C012+FIELD-DO1 2 &EFS/23.1:D
3 =C012+FIELD-DO2 96710 29 &EFS/23.3:B
F F
=
6 8 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-X7
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-W6
=FP-W6
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
5 =C012+FIELD-DO3 96710 31 &EFS/23.4:B
7 =C012+FIELD-DO4 96710 33 &EFS/23.5:B
C C
9 =C012+FIELD-DO5 96710 35 &EFS/23.6:B
D D
E E
F F
=
7 9 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-XAC.EPH
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B

=C010-K01 A2 96783 1 =C003-F06 4 &EFS/15.8:E
96783 2 &EFS/15.9:E
96783 3 &EFS/15.9:E
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
8 10 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-XAC.EPH
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+GE-XAC.PH
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B

-X2 1 96783 1 =C003-F06 2 &EFS/15.7:E
96783 2 &EFS/15.7:E
96783 3 &EFS/15.8:E
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
9 11 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM +GE-XAC.PH
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A11-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP+GE-W5
=FP+GE-W4
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
RD =C001+GE-A01 5' 96710 1 +GE-X1 3 1 &EFS/11.5:C
BK =C001+GE-A01 6' 96710 2 +GE-X1 4 2 &EFS/11.5:C
GNYE =C001+GE-A01 7' 96776 PE +GE-X1 PE2 GNYE &EFS/11.5:C
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
10 12 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM +TB-A11-X21
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A11-X31
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP+GE-W3
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
96774 1 +GE-X0 6 1 &EFS/11.2:C
96774 2 +GE-X0 7 2 &EFS/11.2:C
96774 3 +GE-X0 8 3 &EFS/11.2:C
96780 PE +GE-X0 9 GNYE &EFS/11.2:C
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
11 13 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A11-X41
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A11-W1
=FP-A11-W2
=FP-A11-W1
=FP+GE-W7
=FP+GE-W7
=FP+GE-W8
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
1 +GE-X2 8 96710 1 =C019+GE-S03 13 1 &EFS/24.1:B
2 +GE-X2 9 96710 2 =C019+GE-S03 14 2 &EFS/24.1:B
1 =D001+FIELD-B01 1 96710 3 +GE-X2 37 3 &EFS/32.2:C
4 +GE-X2 38 96710 4 =D001+FIELD-B01 2 2 &EFS/32.4:C
96710 5 =D001+FIELD-B01 PE PE &EFS/32.4:C
C C
5 +GE-X2 39 96710 6 =D001+FIELD-Y01 x1 1 &EFS/32.5:C
6 +GE-X2 N 96710 7 =D001+FIELD-Y01 x2 2 &EFS/32.6:C
96710 8 =D001+FIELD-Y02 x1 3 &EFS/32.6:C
96710 9 =D001+FIELD-Y02 x2 4 &EFS/32.7:C
96710 10 =D001+FIELD-Y05 x1 5 &EFS/32.7:C
96710 11 =D001+FIELD-Y05 x2 6 &EFS/32.8:C
96710 12 +GE-X2 40 7 &EFS/33.1:C
D D
E E
F F
=
12 14 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A11-X41
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A11-W1
=FP+GE-W10
=FP+GE-W8
=FP+GE-W9
=FP+GE-W8
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
96710 13 =D001+FIELD-S01 13 1 &EFS/33.3:C
8 +GE-X2 41 96710 14 =D001+FIELD-S01 14 2 &EFS/33.3:C
96710 15 =D001+FIELD-S02 13 3 &EFS/33.4:C
9 +GE-X2 42 96710 16 =D001+FIELD-S02 14 4 &EFS/33.5:C
96710 17 =D001+FIELD-S03 14 1 &EFS/33.6:C
C C
7 =D001+FIELD-Y06 x1 96710 18 =D001+FIELD-S03 13 2 &EFS/33.7:C
10 +GE-X2 N 96710 19 =D001+FIELD-Y06 x2 8 &EFS/33.7:D
D D
E E
F F
=
13 15 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A12-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A12-W1
=FP-A13-W1
=FP-A12-W1
=FP-A13-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
=FP-A12-S01 11 96783 1 +GE-X2 3 1 &EFS/19.3:E
=FP-A12-S01 12 96783 2 -A13-X21 1 1 &EFS/19.4:E
2 -A13-X21 2 96783 3 +GE-X2 4 2 &EFS/19.6:A
=FP-A12-H01 x1 96783 4 +GE-X2 6 3 &EFS/20.3:C
-A13-X21 3 3
C C
=FP-A12-H04 x1 96783 5 +GE-X2 11 5 &EFS/24.3:D
-A13-X21 4 5
=FP-A12-H05 x1 96783 6 +GE-X2 13 6 &EFS/24.7:D
-A13-X21 5 6
=FP-A12-H06 x1 96783 7 +GE-X2 14 7 &EFS/25.1:C
-A13-X21 6 7
=FP-A12-H07 x1 96783 8 +GE-X2 15 8 &EFS/25.4:C
-A13-X21 7 8
D =FP-A12-H08 x1 96783 9 +GE-X2 16 9 &EFS/25.7:C D
-A13-X21 8 9
=FP-A12-H09 x1 96783 10 +GE-X2 18 10 &EFS/26.3:C
-A13-X21 9 10
=FP-A12-H10 x1 96783 11 +GE-X2 20 11 &EFS/26.7:C
-A13-X21 10 11
=FP-A12-S03 x1 96783 12 +GE-X2 22 12 &EFS/28.5:C
-A13-X21 11 12
=FP-A12-S02 11 96783 13 +GE-X2 23 13 &EFS/29.1:C
E 13 -A13-X21 12 96783 14 =FP-A12-S02 12 &EFS/29.1:C E
14 -A13-X21 13 96783 15 +GE-X2 24 14 &EFS/29.2:C
=FP-A12-S03 13 96783 16 +GE-X2 25 15 &EFS/29.4:C
-A13-X21 14 15
16 +GE-X2 26 96783 17 =FP-A12-S03 14 &EFS/29.4:D
16 -A13-X21 15
=FP-A12-S04 11 96783 18 +GE-X2 27 17 &EFS/30.1:B
17 -A13-X21 16 96783 19 =FP-A12-S04 12 &EFS/30.1:C
F F
=
14 16 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A12-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A12-W1
=FP-A13-W1
=FP-A12-W1
=FP-A13-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
18 -A13-X21 17 96783 20 +GE-X2 28 18 &EFS/30.1:B
=FP-A12-S05 13 96783 21 +GE-X2 29 19 &EFS/30.2:B
-A13-X21 18 19
=FP-A12-S05 14 96783 22 +GE-X2 30 20 &EFS/30.2:B
-A13-X21 19 20
C C
=FP-A12-S05 x1 96783 23 +GE-X2 35 21 &EFS/31.3:C
-A13-X21 20 21
=FP-A12-H02 x1 96783 24 +GE-X2 43 22 &EFS/34.1:C
-A13-X21 21 22
=FP-A12-H03 x1 96783 25 +GE-X2 45 23 &EFS/34.5:C
-A13-X21 22 23
=FP-A12-S06 11 96783 26 +GE-X2 47 24 &EFS/36.5:B
24 -A13-X21 23 96783 27 =FP-A12-S06 12 &EFS/36.5:C
D 25 -A13-X21 24 96783 28 +GE-X2 48 25 &EFS/36.6:B D
=FP-A12-S07 13 96783 29 +GE-X2 49 26 &EFS/37.1:D
-A13-X21 25 26
=FP-A12-S07 14 96783 30 +GE-X2 50 27 &EFS/37.1:D
-A13-X21 26 27
=FP-A12-S07 x1 96783 31 +GE-X2 51 28 &EFS/37.2:D
-A13-X21 27 28
=FP-A12-S08 11 96783 32 +GE-X2 53 29 &EFS/39.5:B
29 -A13-X21 28 96783 33 =FP-A12-S08 12 &EFS/39.5:C
E 30 -A13-X21 29 96783 34 +GE-X2 54 30 &EFS/39.6:B E
=FP-A12-S09 13 96783 35 +GE-X2 55 31 &EFS/40.1:D
-A13-X21 30 31
=FP-A12-S09 14 96783 36 +GE-X2 56 32 &EFS/40.1:D
-A13-X21 31 32
=FP-A12-S09 x1 96783 37 +GE-X2 57 33 &EFS/40.2:D
-A13-X21 32 33
4 +GE-X2 N 96783 N =FP-A12-H01 x2 &EFS/20.3:D
F F
=
15 17 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A12-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A13-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110

4 -A13-X21 N
96783 N =FP-A12-H04 x2 &EFS/24.3:D
96783 N =FP-A12-H05 x2 &EFS/24.7:D
96783 N =FP-A12-H06 x2 &EFS/25.1:D
96783 N =FP-A12-H07 x2 &EFS/25.4:D
C C
96783 N =FP-A12-H08 x2 &EFS/25.7:D
96783 N =FP-A12-H09 x2 &EFS/26.3:C
96783 N =FP-A12-H10 x2 &EFS/26.7:C
96783 N =FP-A12-S03 x2 &EFS/28.5:D
96783 N =FP-A12-S05 x2 &EFS/31.3:D
96783 N =FP-A12-H02 x2 &EFS/34.1:D
96783 N =FP-A12-H03 x2 &EFS/34.5:D
96783 N =FP-A12-S07 x2 &EFS/37.2:D
D 96783 N =FP-A12-S09 x2 &EFS/40.2:D D
E E
F F
=
16 18 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A13-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A13-W1
=FP-A13-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
=FP-A13-S01 11 96710 1 -A12-X21 2 1 &EFS/19.5:E
=FP-A13-S01 12 96710 2 -A12-X21 3 2 &EFS/19.6:E
=FP-A13-H01 x1 96710 3 -A12-X21 4 3 &EFS/20.6:C
=FP-A13-H04 x1 96710 4 -A12-X21 5 5 &EFS/24.4:D
=FP-A13-H05 x1 96710 5 -A12-X21 6 6 &EFS/24.9:D
C C
=FP-A13-H06 x1 96710 6 -A12-X21 7 7 &EFS/25.2:C
=FP-A13-H07 x1 96710 7 -A12-X21 8 8 &EFS/25.6:C
=FP-A13-H08 x1 96710 8 -A12-X21 9 9 &EFS/25.9:C
=FP-A13-H09 x1 96710 9 -A12-X21 10 10 &EFS/26.4:C
=FP-A13-H10 x1 96710 10 -A12-X21 11 11 &EFS/26.8:C
=FP-A13-S03 x1 96710 11 -A12-X21 12 12 &EFS/28.7:C
=FP-A13-S02 11 96710 12 -A12-X21 14 13 &EFS/29.1:D
=FP-A13-S02 12 96710 13 -A12-X21 15 14 &EFS/29.2:D
D =FP-A13-S03 13 96710 14 -A12-X21 16 15 &EFS/29.7:C D
16 -A12-X21 17 96710 15 =FP-A13-S03 14 &EFS/29.7:D
=FP-A13-S04 11 96710 16 -A12-X21 19 17 &EFS/30.1:D
=FP-A13-S04 12 96710 17 -A12-X21 20 18 &EFS/30.1:D
=FP-A13-S05 13 96710 18 -A12-X21 21 19 &EFS/30.2:D
=FP-A13-S05 14 96710 19 -A12-X21 22 20 &EFS/30.2:D
=FP-A13-S05 x1 96710 20 -A12-X21 23 21 &EFS/31.5:C
=FP-A13-H02 x1 96710 21 -A12-X21 24 22 &EFS/34.2:C
=FP-A13-H03 x1 96710 22 -A12-X21 25 23 &EFS/34.7:C
E =FP-A13-S06 11 96710 23 -A12-X21 27 24 &EFS/36.5:D E
=FP-A13-S06 12 96710 24 -A12-X21 28 25 &EFS/36.6:D
=FP-A13-S07 13 96710 25 -A12-X21 29 26 &EFS/37.3:D
=FP-A13-S07 14 96710 26 -A12-X21 30 27 &EFS/37.4:D
=FP-A13-S07 x1 96710 27 -A12-X21 31 28 &EFS/37.4:D
=FP-A13-S08 11 96710 28 -A12-X21 33 29 &EFS/39.5:D
=FP-A13-S08 12 96710 29 -A12-X21 34 30 &EFS/39.6:D
=FP-A13-S09 13 96710 30 -A12-X21 35 31 &EFS/40.3:D
F F
=
17 19 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A13-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A13-W1
=FP-A13-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
=FP-A13-S09 14 96710 31 -A12-X21 36 32 &EFS/40.4:D
=FP-A13-S09 x1 96710 32 -A12-X21 37 33 &EFS/40.4:D
4 -A12-X21 N 96710 N =FP-A13-H01 x2 &EFS/20.6:D
96710 N =FP-A13-H04 x2 &EFS/24.4:D
96710 N =FP-A13-H05 x2 &EFS/24.9:D
C C
96710 N =FP-A13-H06 x2 &EFS/25.2:D
96710 N =FP-A13-H07 x2 &EFS/25.6:D
96710 N =FP-A13-H08 x2 &EFS/25.9:D
96710 N =FP-A13-H09 x2 &EFS/26.4:C
96710 N =FP-A13-H10 x2 &EFS/26.8:C
96710 N =FP-A13-S03 x2 &EFS/28.7:D
96710 N =FP-A13-S05 x2 &EFS/31.5:D
96710 N =FP-A13-H02 x2 &EFS/34.2:D
D 96710 N =FP-A13-H03 x2 &EFS/34.7:D D
96710 N =FP-A13-S07 x2 &EFS/37.4:D
96710 N =FP-A13-S09 x2 &EFS/40.4:D
E E
F F
=
18 20 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
+TB-A14-X21
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
=FP-A14-W1
=FP-A14-W1
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX-110
ÖLFLEX-110
=FP-A14-S01 11 96710 1 +GE-X2 4 1 &EFS/19.7:E
=FP-A14-S01 12 96710 2 +GE-X2 5 2 &EFS/19.8:E
=FP-A14-H01 x1 96710 3 +GE-X2 7 3 &EFS/20.8:C
=FP-A14-S02 11 96710 4 +GE-X2 31 5 &EFS/30.5:B
=FP-A14-S02 12 96710 5 +GE-X2 32 6 &EFS/30.6:B
C C
=FP-A14-S03 11 96710 6 +GE-X2 33 7 &EFS/30.6:B
=FP-A14-S03 12 96710 7 +GE-X2 34 8 &EFS/30.7:B
=FP-A14-S03 x1 96710 8 +GE-X2 36 9 &EFS/31.7:C
=FP-A14-H02 x1 96710 9 +GE-X2 44 10 &EFS/34.4:C
=FP-A14-H03 x1 96710 10 +GE-X2 46 11 &EFS/34.8:C
4 +GE-X2 N 96710 N =FP-A14-H01 x2 &EFS/20.8:D
96710 N =FP-A14-S03 x2 &EFS/31.7:D
96710 N =FP-A14-H02 x2 &EFS/34.4:D
D 96710 N =FP-A14-H03 x2 &EFS/34.8:D D
E E
F F
=
19 &EMZ/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE OVERVIEW
A A
CABLE NUMBER SOURCE TARGET CABLE TYPE CONDUCTORS USED LENGTH PAGE.COLUMN:ROW BEUMER NO. REMARK
TOTAL USED CROSS-SECTION
=D001+GE-M01-W1 +GE-X3 =D001+GE-M01 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/27.1:E CS

B B
=FP+GE-W1 +GE-X00 +GE-X0 ÖLFLEX-110 3.5 4 50 sqmm &EFS/10.1:E CS
=FP+GE-W2 +GE-X01 +GE-X1 ÖLFLEX-110 4 3 6 sqmm &EFS/10.3:E CS
=FP+GE-W3 +GE-X0 +TB-A11-X31 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 25 sqmm &EFS/11.2:C CS
=FP+GE-W4 +GE-X1 +TB-A11-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/11.4:C CS
=FP+GE-W6 +GE-X7 =C012+FIELD-DO1 ÖLFLEX-110 12 10 1 sqmm &EFS/23.1:B CS
C =FP+GE-W7 +TB-A11-X41 =D001+FIELD-B01 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/32.4:C CS C
=FP+GE-W8 +TB-A11-X41 =D001+FIELD-Y01 ÖLFLEX-110 12 12 1.5 sqmm &EFS/32.5:C CS
=FP+GE-W9 +TB-A11-X41 =D001+FIELD-S01 ÖLFLEX-110 5 4 1.5 sqmm &EFS/33.3:B CS
=FP+GE-W10 +TB-A11-X41 =D001+FIELD-S03 ÖLFLEX-110 3 2 1.5 sqmm &EFS/33.6:B CS
=FP+TB-A11-W1 +GE-X2 +TB-A11-X41 ÖLFLEX-110 18 14 1.5 sqmm &EFS/24.1:C CS
=FP+TB-A11-W2 +TB-A11-X41 =C019+GE-S03 ÖLFLEX-110 3 2 1.5 sqmm &EFS/24.1:B CS

D D
=FP+TB-A12-W1 +GE-X2 +TB-A12-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 36 33 1,5 sqmm &EFS/19.3:C CS
=FP+TB-A13-W1 +TB-A12-X21 +TB-A13-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 36 33 1.5 sqmm &EFS/19.5:C CS
=FP+TB-A14-W1 +GE-X2 +TB-A14-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 12 11 1.5 sqmm &EFS/19.7:C CS
E E
F F
CS = CUSTOMER SUPPLY
IC = INTERFACE CABLE
=
&EMA/20 2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EMZ PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CABLE OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE OVERVIEW
A A
=FP+GE-A01-W1 +FM-A21-X31 =C001+GE-A01 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/11.2:E 31469 IC
=FP+GE-A01-W2 +FM-A32-X31 =C001+GE-A01 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/11.3:E 31469 IC
=FP+GE-A01-W3 +FM-A21-X21 =C001+GE-A01 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/11.4:E 31456 IC

B B
=FP+GE-A01-W4 +FM-A32-X21 =C001+GE-A01 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/11.6:E 31456 IC
=FP+GE-W5 +TB-A11-X21 =C001+GE-A01 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1,5 sqmm &EFS/11.4:C 31456 IC
=FP+FM-A21-W21 +FM-A21-X31 +FM-A22-X31 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/12.3:B 31469 IC
=FP+FM-A21-W22 +FM-A22-X31 +FM-A23-X31 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/12.5:C 31469 IC
=FP+FM-A21-W23 +FM-A23-X31 +FM-A24-X31 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/12.7:D 31469 IC
C =FP+FM-A21-W24 +FM-A24-X31 +FM-A25-X31 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/13.1:A 31469 IC C
=FP+FM-A21-W28 +FM-A28-X31 +FM-A29-X31 ÖLFLEX-110 4 4 6 sqmm &EFS/14.1:A 31469 IC

D D
=FP+FM-A21-W40 +FM-A21-X21 +FM-A22-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/16.3:B 31456 IC
=FP+FM-A21-W41 +FM-A22-X21 +FM-A23-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/16.5:C 31456 IC
=FP+FM-A21-W42 +FM-A23-X21 +FM-A24-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/16.7:D 31456 IC

E =FP+FM-A21-W43 +FM-A24-X21 +FM-A25-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/17.1:A 31456 IC E
=FP+FM-A21-W47 +FM-A28-X21 +FM-A29-X21 ÖLFLEX-110 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/18.1:A 31456 IC

F F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE OVERVIEW
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
2 &EMB/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
CABLE NAME =D001+GE-M01-W1 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS CUSTOMER SCOPE
FUNCTION TEXT FILL MODULE 07-12 NO. OF CONDUCTORS 4 CROSS-SECTION 6 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
FUNCTION TEXT PAGE.COLUMN:ROW TARGET DESIGNATION FROM CONNECTION CONDUCTOR TARGET DESIGNATION TO CONNECTION PAGE.COLUMN:ROW FUNCTION TEXT
&EFS/27.1:E -X3 1 1 -M01 U1 &EFS/27.1:F MAIN DRIVE
&EFS/27.1:E -X3 2 2 -M01 V1 &EFS/27.1:F ==

B B
&EFS/27.1:E -X3 3 3 -M01 W1 &EFS/27.1:F ==
FILL MODULE 07-12 &EFS/27.1:E -X3 PE3 GNYE -M01 PE &EFS/27.1:F ==
C C
&EFS/35.1:E -X3 4 1 -M01 U1 &EFS/35.1:F RADIAL CONVEYOR
&EFS/35.1:E -X3 5 2 -M01 V1 &EFS/35.1:F ==
&EFS/35.1:E -X3 6 3 -M01 W1 &EFS/35.1:F ==
FILL MODULE 07-12 &EFS/35.2:E -X3 PE4 GNYE -M01 PE &EFS/35.1:F ==
D FUNCTION TEXT FILL MODULE 07-12 NO. OF CONDUCTORS 4 CROSS-SECTION 6 sqmm CABLE LENGTH D
&EFS/38.1:E -X3 7 1 -M01 U1 &EFS/38.1:F TANGENTIAL CONVEYOR
&EFS/38.1:E -X3 8 2 -M01 V1 &EFS/38.1:F ==
&EFS/38.1:E -X3 9 3 -M01 W1 &EFS/38.1:F ==
E FILL MODULE 07-12 &EFS/38.2:E -X3 PE5 GNYE -M01 PE &EFS/38.1:F == E
CABLE NAME =FP+GE-W1 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS CUSTOMER SCOPE
FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3.5 CROSS-SECTION 50 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
&EFS/10.1:F -X00 4 0,5 -X0 4 &EFS/10.1:E

F F
=
&EMZ/3 2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EMB PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CABLE DIAGRAM
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3.5 CROSS-SECTION 50 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
&EFS/10.1:F -X00 1 1 -X0 1 &EFS/10.1:E
&EFS/10.1:F -X00 2 2 -X0 2 &EFS/10.1:E

B B
&EFS/10.1:F -X00 3 3 -X0 3 &EFS/10.1:E
FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 4 CROSS-SECTION 6 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
&EFS/10.3:F -X01 1 1 -X1 1 &EFS/10.3:E

C C
&EFS/10.4:F -X01 2 2 -X1 2 &EFS/10.4:E
&EFS/10.4:F -X01 3 GNYE -X1 PE1 &EFS/10.4:E
D D
&EFS/10.6:E -X0 6 1 +TB-A11-X31 1 &EFS/11.2:C
&EFS/10.6:E -X0 7 2 +TB-A11-X31 2 &EFS/11.2:C
&EFS/10.6:E -X0 8 3 +TB-A11-X31 3 &EFS/11.2:C
FILL MODULE 01-06 &EFS/10.7:E -X0 9 GNYE +TB-A11-X31 PE &EFS/11.2:C FILL MODULE 01-06
E FUNCTION TEXT FILL MODULE 01-06 NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH E
&EFS/11.5:B -X1 3 1 +TB-A11-X21 1 &EFS/11.5:C
&EFS/11.5:B -X1 4 2 +TB-A11-X21 2 &EFS/11.5:C
&EFS/11.5:B -X1 PE2 GNYE +TB-A11-X21 PE &EFS/11.5:C FILL MODULE 01-06

F F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
FUNCTION TEXT SPILLAGE SYSTEM RUN NO. OF CONDUCTORS 12 CROSS-SECTION 1 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
SPILLAGE SYSTEM RUN &EFS/23.1:B -X7 27 1 =C012+FIELD-DO1 &EFS/23.1:C SPILLAGE SYSTEM RUN
== &EFS/23.1:D -X7 28 2 =C012+FIELD-DO1 &EFS/23.1:C ==

B B
DUST COLLECTOR RUN &EFS/23.3:B -X7 29 3 =C012+FIELD-DO2 &EFS/23.3:C DUST COLLECTOR RUN
LONG CONV. 01 RUN &EFS/23.4:B -X7 31 5 =C012+FIELD-DO3 &EFS/23.4:C LONG CONV. 01 RUN
== &EFS/23.5:B -X7 33 7 =C012+FIELD-DO4 &EFS/23.5:C ==
C == &EFS/23.5:D -X7 34 8 =C012+FIELD-DO4 &EFS/23.5:C == C
ROOT BLOWER RUN &EFS/23.6:B -X7 35 9 =C012+FIELD-DO5 &EFS/23.6:C ROOT BLOWER RUN
FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
D D
&EFS/32.2:C +TB-A11-X41 3 1 =D001+FIELD-B01 1 &EFS/32.4:B
&EFS/32.4:C +TB-A11-X41 4 2 =D001+FIELD-B01 2 &EFS/32.4:B
&EFS/32.4:C +TB-A11-X41 5 PE =D001+FIELD-B01 PE &EFS/32.4:B
FUNCTION TEXT PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE NO. OF CONDUCTORS 12 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
E E
&EFS/32.5:C +TB-A11-X41 6 1 =D001+FIELD-Y01 x1 &EFS/32.6:B FCG-1 OPEN POSITION
FCG-1 OPEN POSITION &EFS/32.6:C +TB-A11-X41 7 2 =D001+FIELD-Y01 x2 &EFS/32.6:B ==
== &EFS/32.6:C +TB-A11-X41 8 3 =D001+FIELD-Y02 x1 &EFS/32.7:B FCG-1 CLOSE POSITION
FCG-1 CLOSE POSITION &EFS/32.7:C +TB-A11-X41 9 4 =D001+FIELD-Y02 x2 &EFS/32.7:B ==

F F
=
2 4 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
FUNCTION TEXT PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE NO. OF CONDUCTORS 12 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
FCG-1 CLOSE POSITION &EFS/32.7:C +TB-A11-X41 10 5 =D001+FIELD-Y05 x1 &EFS/32.7:B PCV-1 OPEN/CLOSE POSITION
PCV-1 OPEN/CLOSE POSITION &EFS/32.8:C +TB-A11-X41 11 6 =D001+FIELD-Y05 x2 &EFS/32.7:B ==

B B
PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE &EFS/33.7:C +TB-A11-X41 18 7 =D001+FIELD-Y06 x1 &EFS/33.7:D PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE
== &EFS/33.7:D +TB-A11-X41 19 8 =D001+FIELD-Y06 x2 &EFS/33.7:D ==
RADIAL BELT START &EFS/37.8:C +TB-A11-X41 20 9 =D002+FIELD-Y03 x1 &EFS/37.8:B BAG DISCHARGE INTERLOCK
BAG DISCHARGE INTERLOCK &EFS/37.9:C +TB-A11-X41 21 10 =D002+FIELD-Y03 x2 &EFS/37.8:B ==
TANGENTIAL BELT START &EFS/40.8:C +TB-A11-X41 22 11 =D003+FIELD-Y04 x1 &EFS/40.8:B ==
C BAG DISCHARGE INTERLOCK &EFS/40.8:C +TB-A11-X41 23 12 =D003+FIELD-Y04 x2 &EFS/40.8:B == C
&EFS/33.3:C +TB-A11-X41 13 1 =D001+FIELD-S01 13 &EFS/33.3:A FCG 1
D FCG OPEN &EFS/33.3:C +TB-A11-X41 14 2 =D001+FIELD-S01 14 &EFS/33.3:A == D
== &EFS/33.4:C +TB-A11-X41 15 3 =D001+FIELD-S02 13 &EFS/33.4:A ==
FCG CLOSE &EFS/33.5:C +TB-A11-X41 16 4 =D001+FIELD-S02 14 &EFS/33.4:A ==
FUNCTION TEXT FCG CLOSE NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
E FUNCTION TEXT PAGE.COLUMN:ROW TARGET DESIGNATION FROM CONNECTION CONDUCTOR TARGET DESIGNATION TO CONNECTION PAGE.COLUMN:ROW FUNCTION TEXT E
FCG CLOSE &EFS/33.6:C +TB-A11-X41 17 1 =D001+FIELD-S03 14 &EFS/33.6:A PCV
PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE &EFS/33.7:C +TB-A11-X41 18 2 =D001+FIELD-S03 13 &EFS/33.6:A ==
F F
=
3 5 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
CABLE NAME =FP+TB-A11-W1 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS CUSTOMER SCOPE
FUNCTION TEXT FCG OPEN NO. OF CONDUCTORS 18 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
&EFS/24.0:C +GE-X2 8 1 -A11-X41 1 &EFS/24.1:B
&EFS/24.0:D +GE-X2 9 2 -A11-X41 2 &EFS/24.1:B

B B
&EFS/32.2:B +GE-X2 37 3 -A11-X41 3 &EFS/32.2:C
&EFS/32.4:D +GE-X2 38 4 -A11-X41 4 &EFS/32.4:C
&EFS/32.5:D +GE-X2 39 5 -A11-X41 6 &EFS/32.5:C
FCG-1 OPEN POSITION &EFS/32.6:D +GE-X2 N 6 -A11-X41 7 &EFS/32.6:C FCG-1 OPEN POSITION
&EFS/33.1:A +GE-X2 40 7 -A11-X41 12 &EFS/33.1:C
C FCG OPEN &EFS/33.3:D +GE-X2 41 8 -A11-X41 14 &EFS/33.3:C FCG OPEN C
FCG CLOSE &EFS/33.5:D +GE-X2 42 9 -A11-X41 16 &EFS/33.5:C FCG CLOSE
PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE &EFS/33.7:E +GE-X2 N 10 -A11-X41 19 &EFS/33.7:D PCV-2 OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE
RADIAL BELT START &EFS/37.7:B +GE-X2 52 11 -A11-X41 20 &EFS/37.8:C RADIAL BELT START
== &EFS/37.7:E +GE-X2 N 12 -A11-X41 21 &EFS/37.9:C BAG DISCHARGE INTERLOCK
TANGENTIAL BELT START &EFS/40.7:B +GE-X2 58 13 -A11-X41 22 &EFS/40.8:C TANGENTIAL BELT START
D D
== &EFS/40.7:E +GE-X2 N 14 -A11-X41 23 &EFS/40.8:C BAG DISCHARGE INTERLOCK
&EFS/24.1:B -A11-X41 1 1 =C019+GE-S03 13 &EFS/24.1:B PRESSURE SWITCH

E E
&EFS/24.1:B -A11-X41 2 2 =C019+GE-S03 14 &EFS/24.1:B ==
FUNCTION TEXT EMERGENCY STOP NO. OF CONDUCTORS 36 CROSS-SECTION 1,5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
EMERGENCY STOP &EFS/19.3:B +GE-X2 3 1 -A12-X21 1 &EFS/19.3:E EMERGENCY STOP

F F
=
4 6 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
EMERGENCY STOP &EFS/19.7:B +GE-X2 4 2 -A12-X21 3 &EFS/19.6:A EMERGENCY STOP
CONTROL ON &EFS/20.3:B +GE-X2 6 3 -A12-X21 4 &EFS/20.3:C CONTROL ON

B B
== &EFS/20.3:E +GE-X2 N 4 -A12-X21 N &EFS/20.3:D ==
COMPR. AIR FAULT &EFS/24.3:C +GE-X2 11 5 -A12-X21 5 &EFS/24.3:D COMPR. AIR FAULT
DUST/SPILLAGE ROOT BLOWER COLLECTOR DUST/SPILLAGE ROOT BLOWER
&EFS/24.7:C +GE-X2 13 6 -A12-X21 6 &EFS/24.7:D
RUN COLLECTOR RUN
MAIN DRIVE TRIP &EFS/25.1:B +GE-X2 14 7 -A12-X21 7 &EFS/25.1:C MAIN DRIVE TRIP
RADIAL BELT TRIP &EFS/25.4:B +GE-X2 15 8 -A12-X21 8 &EFS/25.4:C RADIAL BELT TRIP
C TANGENTIAL BELT TRIP &EFS/25.7:B +GE-X2 16 9 -A12-X21 9 &EFS/25.7:C TANGENTIAL BELT TRIP C
LONG CONV. 01 RUN &EFS/26.3:B +GE-X2 18 10 -A12-X21 10 &EFS/26.3:C LONG CONV. 01 RUN
LONG CONV. 02 RUN &EFS/26.7:B +GE-X2 20 11 -A12-X21 11 &EFS/26.7:C LONG CONV. 02 RUN
MAIN DRIVE START &EFS/28.5:C +GE-X2 22 12 -A12-X21 12 &EFS/28.5:C MAIN DRIVE START
MAIN DRIVE STOP &EFS/29.1:B +GE-X2 23 13 -A12-X21 13 &EFS/29.1:C MAIN DRIVE STOP
== &EFS/29.2:B +GE-X2 24 14 -A12-X21 15 &EFS/29.2:C ==

D D
MAIN DRIVE START &EFS/29.4:B +GE-X2 25 15 -A12-X21 16 &EFS/29.4:C MAIN DRIVE START
== &EFS/29.4:D +GE-X2 26 16 -A12-X21 17 &EFS/29.4:D ==
FCG STOP &EFS/30.1:A +GE-X2 27 17 -A12-X21 18 &EFS/30.1:B FCG STOP
== &EFS/30.1:A +GE-X2 28 18 -A12-X21 20 &EFS/30.1:B ==
FCG START &EFS/30.2:A +GE-X2 29 19 -A12-X21 21 &EFS/30.2:B FCG START
E == &EFS/30.2:A +GE-X2 30 20 -A12-X21 22 &EFS/30.2:B == E
== &EFS/31.3:A +GE-X2 35 21 -A12-X21 23 &EFS/31.3:C ==
FCG-1 OPEN &EFS/34.1:A +GE-X2 43 22 -A12-X21 24 &EFS/34.1:C FCG-1 OPEN
FCG-1 CLOSE &EFS/34.5:A +GE-X2 45 23 -A12-X21 25 &EFS/34.5:C FCG-1 CLOSE
RADIAL BELT STOP &EFS/36.5:B +GE-X2 47 24 -A12-X21 26 &EFS/36.5:B RADIAL BELT STOP
== &EFS/36.6:B +GE-X2 48 25 -A12-X21 28 &EFS/36.6:B ==

F F
=
5 7 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
RADIAL BELT START &EFS/37.1:B +GE-X2 49 26 -A12-X21 29 &EFS/37.1:D RADIAL BELT START
== &EFS/37.1:B +GE-X2 50 27 -A12-X21 30 &EFS/37.1:D ==

B B
== &EFS/37.2:B +GE-X2 51 28 -A12-X21 31 &EFS/37.2:D ==
TANGENTIAL BELT STOP &EFS/39.5:B +GE-X2 53 29 -A12-X21 32 &EFS/39.5:B TANGENTIAL BELT STOP
== &EFS/39.6:B +GE-X2 54 30 -A12-X21 34 &EFS/39.6:B ==
TANGENTIAL BELT START &EFS/40.1:B +GE-X2 55 31 -A12-X21 35 &EFS/40.1:D TANGENTIAL BELT START
== &EFS/40.1:B +GE-X2 56 32 -A12-X21 36 &EFS/40.1:D ==
C == &EFS/40.2:B +GE-X2 57 33 -A12-X21 37 &EFS/40.2:D == C
FUNCTION TEXT EMERGENCY STOP NO. OF CONDUCTORS 36 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
EMERGENCY STOP &EFS/19.4:E -A12-X21 2 1 -A13-X21 1 &EFS/19.5:E EMERGENCY STOP
D == &EFS/19.6:A -A12-X21 3 2 -A13-X21 2 &EFS/19.6:E == D
CONTROL ON &EFS/20.3:C -A12-X21 4 3 -A13-X21 3 &EFS/20.6:C CONTROL ON
== &EFS/20.3:D -A12-X21 N 4 -A13-X21 N &EFS/20.6:D ==
COMPR. AIR FAULT &EFS/24.3:D -A12-X21 5 5 -A13-X21 4 &EFS/24.4:D COMPR. AIR FAULT
DUST/SPILLAGE ROOT BLOWER COLLECTOR DUST/SPILLAGE ROOT BLOWER
&EFS/24.7:D -A12-X21 6 6 -A13-X21 5 &EFS/24.9:D
RUN COLLECTOR RUN
MAIN DRIVE TRIP &EFS/25.1:C -A12-X21 7 7 -A13-X21 6 &EFS/25.2:C MAIN DRIVE TRIP
E E
RADIAL BELT TRIP &EFS/25.4:C -A12-X21 8 8 -A13-X21 7 &EFS/25.6:C RADIAL BELT TRIP
TANGENTIAL BELT TRIP &EFS/25.7:C -A12-X21 9 9 -A13-X21 8 &EFS/25.9:C TANGENTIAL BELT TRIP
LONG CONV. 01 RUN &EFS/26.3:C -A12-X21 10 10 -A13-X21 9 &EFS/26.4:C LONG CONV. 01 RUN
LONG CONV. 02 RUN &EFS/26.7:C -A12-X21 11 11 -A13-X21 10 &EFS/26.8:C LONG CONV. 02 RUN
MAIN DRIVE START &EFS/28.5:C -A12-X21 12 12 -A13-X21 11 &EFS/28.7:C MAIN DRIVE START
F F
=
6 8 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
MAIN DRIVE STOP &EFS/29.1:C -A12-X21 14 13 -A13-X21 12 &EFS/29.1:D MAIN DRIVE STOP
== &EFS/29.2:C -A12-X21 15 14 -A13-X21 13 &EFS/29.2:D ==

B B
MAIN DRIVE START &EFS/29.4:C -A12-X21 16 15 -A13-X21 14 &EFS/29.7:C MAIN DRIVE START
== &EFS/29.4:D -A12-X21 17 16 -A13-X21 15 &EFS/29.7:D ==
FCG STOP &EFS/30.1:C -A12-X21 19 17 -A13-X21 16 &EFS/30.1:D FCG STOP
== &EFS/30.1:B -A12-X21 20 18 -A13-X21 17 &EFS/30.1:D ==
FCG START &EFS/30.2:B -A12-X21 21 19 -A13-X21 18 &EFS/30.2:D FCG START
C == &EFS/30.2:B -A12-X21 22 20 -A13-X21 19 &EFS/30.2:D == C
== &EFS/31.3:C -A12-X21 23 21 -A13-X21 20 &EFS/31.5:C ==
FCG-1 OPEN &EFS/34.1:C -A12-X21 24 22 -A13-X21 21 &EFS/34.2:C FCG-1 OPEN
FCG-1 CLOSE &EFS/34.5:C -A12-X21 25 23 -A13-X21 22 &EFS/34.7:C FCG-1 CLOSE
RADIAL BELT STOP &EFS/36.5:C -A12-X21 27 24 -A13-X21 23 &EFS/36.5:D RADIAL BELT STOP
== &EFS/36.6:B -A12-X21 28 25 -A13-X21 24 &EFS/36.6:D ==

D D
RADIAL BELT START &EFS/37.1:D -A12-X21 29 26 -A13-X21 25 &EFS/37.3:D RADIAL BELT START
== &EFS/37.1:D -A12-X21 30 27 -A13-X21 26 &EFS/37.4:D ==
== &EFS/37.2:D -A12-X21 31 28 -A13-X21 27 &EFS/37.4:D ==
TANGENTIAL BELT STOP &EFS/39.5:C -A12-X21 33 29 -A13-X21 28 &EFS/39.5:D TANGENTIAL BELT STOP
== &EFS/39.6:B -A12-X21 34 30 -A13-X21 29 &EFS/39.6:D ==
E TANGENTIAL BELT START &EFS/40.1:D -A12-X21 35 31 -A13-X21 30 &EFS/40.3:D TANGENTIAL BELT START E
== &EFS/40.1:D -A12-X21 36 32 -A13-X21 31 &EFS/40.4:D ==
== &EFS/40.2:D -A12-X21 37 33 -A13-X21 32 &EFS/40.4:D ==
F F
=
7 9 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
EMERGENCY STOP &EFS/19.7:B +GE-X2 4 1 -A14-X21 1 &EFS/19.7:E EMERGENCY STOP
== &EFS/19.8:B +GE-X2 5 2 -A14-X21 2 &EFS/19.8:E ==

B B
CONTROL ON &EFS/20.8:B +GE-X2 7 3 -A14-X21 3 &EFS/20.8:C CONTROL ON
== &EFS/20.8:E +GE-X2 N 4 -A14-X21 N &EFS/20.8:D ==
FCG STOP &EFS/30.5:A +GE-X2 31 5 -A14-X21 4 &EFS/30.5:B FCG STOP
== &EFS/30.6:A +GE-X2 32 6 -A14-X21 5 &EFS/30.6:B ==
FCG START &EFS/30.6:A +GE-X2 33 7 -A14-X21 6 &EFS/30.6:B FCG START
C == &EFS/30.7:A +GE-X2 34 8 -A14-X21 7 &EFS/30.7:B == C
== &EFS/31.7:A +GE-X2 36 9 -A14-X21 8 &EFS/31.7:C ==
FCG-1 OPEN &EFS/34.4:A +GE-X2 44 10 -A14-X21 9 &EFS/34.4:C FCG-1 OPEN
FCG-1 CLOSE &EFS/34.8:A +GE-X2 46 11 -A14-X21 10 &EFS/34.8:C FCG-1 CLOSE
CABLE NAME =FP+GE-A01-W1 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
D D
&EFS/12.1:E +FM-A21-X31 1 1 =C001-A01 1 &EFS/11.2:D
&EFS/12.1:E +FM-A21-X31 3 2 =C001-A01 2 &EFS/11.2:D
&EFS/12.2:E +FM-A21-X31 5 3 =C001-A01 3 &EFS/11.2:D
&EFS/12.2:E +FM-A21-X31 7 GNYE =C001-A01 4 &EFS/11.2:D

E E
&EFS/14.7:E +FM-A32-X31 2 1 =C001-A01 1 &EFS/11.2:D
&EFS/14.8:E +FM-A32-X31 4 2 =C001-A01 2 &EFS/11.2:D

F F
=
8 10 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/14.8:E +FM-A32-X31 6 3 =C001-A01 3 &EFS/11.2:D
&EFS/14.9:E +FM-A32-X31 8 GNYE =C001-A01 4 &EFS/11.2:D

B B
FUNCTION TEXT FILL MODULE 01-06 NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
&EFS/16.1:F +FM-A21-X21 1 1 =C001-A01 5 &EFS/11.5:D
&EFS/16.1:F +FM-A21-X21 3 2 =C001-A01 6 &EFS/11.5:D

C C
&EFS/16.2:F +FM-A21-X21 5 GNYE =C001-A01 7 &EFS/11.5:D
FUNCTION TEXT FILL MODULE 07-12 NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
&EFS/18.7:F +FM-A32-X21 2 1 =C001-A01 5 &EFS/11.5:D

D D
&EFS/18.8:F +FM-A32-X21 4 2 =C001-A01 6 &EFS/11.5:D
&EFS/18.8:F +FM-A32-X21 6 GNYE =C001-A01 7 &EFS/11.5:D
CABLE NAME =FP+GE-W5 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1,5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
E E
&EFS/11.5:C +TB-A11-X21 2 BK =C001-A01 6' &EFS/11.5:D
FILL MODULE 01-06 &EFS/11.5:C +TB-A11-X21 PE GNYE =C001-A01 7' &EFS/11.5:D
&EFS/11.5:C +TB-A11-X21 1 RD =C001-A01 5' &EFS/11.5:D
F F
=
9 11 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
CABLE NAME =FP+FM-A21-W21 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
&EFS/12.2:E -A21-X31 6 BU -A22-X31 5 &EFS/12.4:E
&EFS/12.2:E -A21-X31 8 GNYE -A22-X31 7 &EFS/12.4:E

B B
&EFS/12.1:E -A21-X31 2 RD -A22-X31 1 &EFS/12.3:E
&EFS/12.1:E -A21-X31 4 YE -A22-X31 3 &EFS/12.3:E
C C
&EFS/12.4:E -A22-X31 6 BU -A23-X31 5 &EFS/12.6:E
&EFS/12.3:E -A22-X31 2 RD -A23-X31 1 &EFS/12.5:E
&EFS/12.4:E -A22-X31 4 YE -A23-X31 3 &EFS/12.6:E
D FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 4 CROSS-SECTION 6 sqmm CABLE LENGTH D
&EFS/12.6:E -A23-X31 6 BU -A24-X31 5 &EFS/12.8:E
&EFS/12.5:E -A23-X31 2 RD -A24-X31 1 &EFS/12.7:E
E &EFS/12.6:E -A23-X31 4 YE -A24-X31 3 &EFS/12.8:E E
&EFS/12.8:E -A24-X31 6 BU -A25-X31 5 &EFS/13.2:E

F F
=
10 12 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/12.7:E -A24-X31 2 RD -A25-X31 1 &EFS/13.1:E

B B
&EFS/12.8:E -A24-X31 4 YE -A25-X31 3 &EFS/13.1:E
&EFS/13.2:E -A25-X31 6 BU -A26-X31 5 &EFS/13.4:E

C C
&EFS/13.1:E -A25-X31 2 RD -A26-X31 1 &EFS/13.3:E
&EFS/13.1:E -A25-X31 4 YE -A26-X31 3 &EFS/13.3:E

D D
&EFS/13.4:E -A26-X31 6 BU -A27-X31 5 &EFS/13.6:E
&EFS/13.3:E -A26-X31 2 RD -A27-X31 1 &EFS/13.5:E
&EFS/13.4:E -A26-X31 4 YE -A27-X31 3 &EFS/13.6:E
E CABLE NAME =FP+FM-A21-W27 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX-110 REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE E
&EFS/13.6:E -A27-X31 6 BU -A28-X31 5 &EFS/13.8:E

F F
=
11 13 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/13.5:E -A27-X31 2 RD -A28-X31 1 &EFS/13.7:E
&EFS/13.6:E -A27-X31 4 YE -A28-X31 3 &EFS/13.8:E

B B
&EFS/13.8:E -A28-X31 6 BU -A29-X31 5 &EFS/14.2:E

C C
&EFS/13.7:E -A28-X31 2 RD -A29-X31 1 &EFS/14.1:E
&EFS/13.8:E -A28-X31 4 YE -A29-X31 3 &EFS/14.1:E
D D
&EFS/14.2:E -A29-X31 6 BU -A30-X31 5 &EFS/14.4:E
&EFS/14.1:E -A29-X31 2 RD -A30-X31 1 &EFS/14.3:E
&EFS/14.1:E -A29-X31 4 YE -A30-X31 3 &EFS/14.3:E
E FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 4 CROSS-SECTION 6 sqmm CABLE LENGTH E
&EFS/14.4:E -A30-X31 6 BU -A31-X31 5 &EFS/14.6:E
&EFS/14.3:E -A30-X31 2 RD -A31-X31 1 &EFS/14.5:E

F F
=
12 14 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/14.4:E -A30-X31 4 YE -A31-X31 3 &EFS/14.6:E

B B
&EFS/14.6:E -A31-X31 6 BU -A32-X31 5 &EFS/14.8:E
&EFS/14.5:E -A31-X31 2 RD -A32-X31 1 &EFS/14.7:E

C C
&EFS/14.6:E -A31-X31 4 YE -A32-X31 3 &EFS/14.8:E
&EFS/16.2:F -A21-X21 6 GNYE -A22-X21 5 &EFS/16.4:F

D D
&EFS/16.1:F -A21-X21 2 L -A22-X21 1 &EFS/16.3:F
&EFS/16.2:F -A21-X21 4 N -A22-X21 3 &EFS/16.3:F
E E
&EFS/16.3:F -A22-X21 2 L -A23-X21 1 &EFS/16.5:F
&EFS/16.4:F -A22-X21 4 N -A23-X21 3 &EFS/16.5:F
F F
=
13 15 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/16.5:F -A23-X21 2 L -A24-X21 1 &EFS/16.7:F

B B
&EFS/16.6:F -A23-X21 4 N -A24-X21 3 &EFS/16.7:F

C C
&EFS/16.7:F -A24-X21 2 L -A25-X21 1 &EFS/17.1:F
&EFS/16.8:F -A24-X21 4 N -A25-X21 3 &EFS/17.1:F
D D
&EFS/17.1:F -A25-X21 2 L -A26-X21 1 &EFS/17.3:F
&EFS/17.2:F -A25-X21 4 N -A26-X21 3 &EFS/17.3:F

E E
&EFS/17.3:F -A26-X21 2 L -A27-X21 1 &EFS/17.5:F
&EFS/17.4:F -A26-X21 4 N -A27-X21 3 &EFS/17.5:F
F F
=
14 16 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/17.5:F -A27-X21 2 L -A28-X21 1 &EFS/17.7:F

B B
&EFS/17.6:F -A27-X21 4 N -A28-X21 3 &EFS/17.7:F

C C
&EFS/17.7:F -A28-X21 2 L -A29-X21 1 &EFS/18.1:F
&EFS/17.8:F -A28-X21 4 N -A29-X21 3 &EFS/18.1:F
D D
&EFS/18.1:F -A29-X21 2 L -A30-X21 1 &EFS/18.3:F
&EFS/18.2:F -A29-X21 4 N -A30-X21 3 &EFS/18.3:F

E E
&EFS/18.3:F -A30-X21 2 L -A31-X21 1 &EFS/18.5:F
&EFS/18.4:F -A30-X21 4 N -A31-X21 3 &EFS/18.5:F
F F
=
15 17 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
&EFS/18.5:F -A31-X21 2 L -A32-X21 1 &EFS/18.7:F

B B
&EFS/18.6:F -A31-X21 4 N -A32-X21 3 &EFS/18.7:F
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
16 &EPB/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
REFERENCE DESIGNATION AMOUNT DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER BEUMER NO.
+GE-X0 7 TERMINAL 50 SQ.MM STUD-TYPE WAGO 50 Sq.mm 97253

PCS
+GE-X0 2 EARTH TERMINAL 50 SQ.MM STUD-TYPE WAGO 50 Sq.mm 97254

PCS
+GE-X1 4 TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96772

PCS
B B
+GE-X1 2 EARTH TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96779
PCS
+GE-X2 70 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96710
PCS
+GE-X3 9 TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96772

PCS
+GE-X3 3 EARTH TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96779

PCS
C C
+GE-X7 40 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96710
PCS
+GE-XAC.EPH 3 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96783
PCS
+GE-XAC.PH 3 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96783
PCS
+TB-A11-X21 2 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96710
PCS
D D
+TB-A11-X21 1 EARTH TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96776
PCS
+TB-A11-X31 3 TERMINAL 35 SQ.MM STUD TYPE WAGO 35 Sq.mm 96774

PCS
+TB-A11-X31 1 EARTH TERMINAL 35 SQ.MM STUD TYPE WAGO 35 Sq.mm 96780

PCS
PCS
E E
+TB-A12-X21 56 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96783
PCS
PCS
PCS
=C001+GE-F01 1 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER MCB 2A,1P 5SL41027RC SIEMENS 5SL41027RC 96554
PCS
F &EFS/10.2:C F
=
&EMB/17 2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EPB PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ PARTS LIST
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
PCS
&EFS/10.2:C
PCS
&EFS/10.2:C
PCS
&EFS/10.3:B
B B
=C001+GE-H01 1 LAMP 3SB5285-6HC03 RED SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HC03 96767
PCS
&EFS/10.3:C
=C001+GE-H02 1 LAMP 3SB5285-6HD03 YELLOW SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HD03 96768
PCS
&EFS/10.3:C
=C001+GE-H03 1 LAMP 3SB5285-6HF03 BLUE SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HF03 96769
PCS
&EFS/10.3:C
=C001+GE-Q01 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER , TRIP UNIT 3VT9225-6AC00 SIEMENS 3VT2725-3AA36- 0AA0 97280
PCS
&EFS/10.1:B
C C
=C001+GE-Q01 1 ROTARY HANDLE 3VT9200-3HQ00 FOR 3VT 200A SIEMENS 3VT9200-3HQ00 97281
PCS
&EFS/10.1:B
=C001+GE-Q01 1 AUXILLARY SWITCH 3VT9225-6AC00 FOR VT250 SIEMENS 3VT9225-6AC00 97293
PCS
&EFS/10.1:B
=C001+GE-Q02 1 MCCB 3VT1712-2DC36-0AA0 125 A SIEMENS 3VT17122DC36 83566
PCS
&EFS/10.6:B
=C003+GE-D01 1 LIMIT SWITCH 3SE3020-0A POSITION SWITCH SIEMENS 3SE3020-0A 83841
PCS
&EFS/15.5:D
D D
=C003+GE-E01 1 CABINET LIGHT 11W HAVELLS CABINET LIGHT 11W 97880
PCS
&EFS/15.6:D
PCS
&EFS/15.2:A
PCS
&EFS/15.7:C
PCS
E &EFS/15.5:C
E
=C003+GE-T01 1 CONTROL TRANSFORMER 1KVA - 415/220 VAC STEP-UP CONTROL TRANSFORMER 97876
PCS
&EFS/15.2:B
=C010+GE-H04 1 LAMP 3SB52 85-6HE03 GREEN SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HE03 99339
PCS
&EFS/20.2:D
=C010+GE-K01 1 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2122-1AP00 S00,2NO+2NC SIEMENS 3RH2122-1AP00 97396
PCS
&EFS/20.1:D
=C010+GE-S01 1 E-STOP PUSHBUTTON 3SB5203-0UC01 SIEMENS 3SB5203-0UC01 83127
PCS
F &EFS/19.1:E F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A

PCS
&EFS/21.5:D
PCS
&EFS/21.6:D
=C011+GE-K02 1 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2122-1AP00 S00,2NO+2NC SIEMENS 3RH2122-1AP00 97396
PCS
&EFS/21.2:D
B B
=C011+GE-K03 1 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2140-1AP00 S00,4NO SIEMENS 3RH2140-1AP00 97399
PCS
&EFS/21.3:D
=C011+GE-K03 1 CONTACT BLOCK 3RH2911-1FA40 4NO FOR CONTACTOR SIEMENS 3RH2911-1FA40 62457
PCS
&EFS/21.3:D
=C011+GE-S02 1 SELECTOR SWITCH WITH 1NC BLOCK SIEMENS 3SB5000-4AB01 96267
PCS
&EFS/21.2:A
=C012+GE-K01 1 RELAY COIL,2C/O,MY2N 220VAC OMRON MY2N 84599
PCS
&EFS/23.1:D
C C
=C012+GE-K01 1 RELAY BASE FOR MY2N OMRON PYF-08A-N 96800
PCS
&EFS/23.1:D
PCS
&EFS/23.3:D
PCS
&EFS/23.3:D
PCS
&EFS/23.4:D
D D
PCS
&EFS/23.4:D
PCS
&EFS/23.5:D
PCS
&EFS/23.5:D
PCS
E &EFS/23.6:D
E
PCS
&EFS/23.6:D
=C019+GE-H07 1 LAMP 3SB5285-6HC03 RED SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HC03 96767
PCS
&EFS/24.2:D
PCS
&EFS/24.6:D
PCS
F &EFS/26.2:D F
=
2 4 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A

PCS
&EFS/26.6:D
PCS
&EFS/24.0:D
PCS
&EFS/24.6:D
B B
PCS
&EFS/26.1:D
PCS
&EFS/26.5:D
=C019+GE-S03 1 PRESSURE SWITCH GM-201-01-A7K-55 SWITZER GM-201-01-A7K-55 75887
PCS
&EFS/24.1:B
=D001+GE-H01 1 LAMP 3SB5285-6HC03 RED SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HC03 96767
PCS
&EFS/28.1:D
C C
=D001+GE-H02 1 LAMP 3SB52 85-6HE03 GREEN SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HE03 99339
PCS
&EFS/28.4:D
PCS
&EFS/31.2:C
PCS
&EFS/33.3:E
PCS
&EFS/33.5:E
D D
=D001+GE-K01 1 CONTACTOR, AC-3, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V, SZ S0 SCREW TERMINAL SIEMENS 3RT2025-1AL20 98581
PCS
&EFS/28.3:D
=D001+GE-K01 1 AUXILARY CONTACTOR BLOCK 3RH2911-1HA20, 2NO SIEMENS 3RH2911-1HA20 96362
PCS
&EFS/28.3:D
=D001+GE-K02 1 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2122-1AP00 S00,2NO+2NC SIEMENS 3RH2122-1AP00 97396
PCS
&EFS/28.2:D
PCS
E &EFS/29.4:E
E
PCS
&EFS/29.4:E
=D001+GE-K04 1 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2140-1AP00 S00,4NO SIEMENS 3RH2140-1AP00 97399
PCS
&EFS/30.4:D
=D001+GE-Q01 1 MOTOR PROTECTING SWITCH 3RV2011-1JA10 6A-10A SIEMENS 3RV2011-1JA10 79605
PCS
&EFS/27.1:B
=D001+GE-Q01 1 AUXILLARY CONTACT FOR MPCB SIEMENS 3RV2901-1E 61723
PCS
F &EFS/27.1:B F
=
3 5 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=D001+GE-T01 1 FREQU.-CONVERTER ACS550-01-05A4-4 WITH BASIC PANEL ABB ACS550-01-05A4-4 76716

PCS
&EFS/27.0:C
=D001+GE-T02 1 TIMER A1D1 - X (CSA) 0,3 SEC-30 MINUTE EAPL A1D1 - X (CSA) 79596
PCS
&EFS/32.3:D
=D001+FIELD-B01 1 PROXIMITY SWITCH NBB15-30GM50-WO PEPPERL & FUCHS NBB15-30GM50-WO 77596
PCS
&EFS/32.4:B
B B
PCS
&EFS/36.2:D
PCS
&EFS/36.4:D
PCS
&EFS/36.1:D
PCS
&EFS/37.5:D
C C
PCS
&EFS/37.5:D
=D002+GE-Q01 1 MPCB 3RV2011-IEA10 2.8A - 4A SIEMENS 3RV2011-IEA10 82518
PCS
&EFS/35.1:B
PCS
&EFS/35.1:B
=D002+GE-T01 1 TIMER B1DH-Q 0,6 - 60 SECOND EAPL B1DH-Q 75876
PCS
&EFS/37.6:D
D D
PCS
&EFS/39.2:D
PCS
&EFS/39.4:D
PCS
&EFS/39.1:D
PCS
E &EFS/40.5:D
E
PCS
&EFS/40.5:D
=D003+GE-Q01 1 MPCB 3RV2011-IEA10 2.8A - 4A SIEMENS 3RV2011-IEA10 82518
PCS
&EFS/38.1:B
PCS
&EFS/38.1:B
=D003+GE-T01 1 TIMER B1DH-Q 0,6 - 60 SECOND EAPL B1DH-Q 75876
PCS
F &EFS/40.6:D F
=
4 6 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=FP+GE-A01 1 CABINET 800X2000X500MM TS 8805.500 RITTAL TS8805.500 49010

PCS
&EDA/8.0:A
=FP+GE-A01 1 SIDE WALL TS8105.235 RITTAL TS8105.235 48370
PCS
&EDA/8.0:A
=FP+GE-XT01 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ. MM. ISOLATING TERMINAL PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq. mm. 96786
PCS
&EFS/15.2:E
B B
=FP+TB-A11 1 CONTROL CABINET AE 1045.500 400X500X210 RITTAL AE1045.500 99399
PCS
&EFS/11.1:C
=FP+TB-A12 1 Control cabinet AE1039.500 - - RITTAL AE1039.500 48389
PCS
&EFS/19.3:D
=FP+TB-A12-H01 1 LAMP 3SB52 85-6HE03 GREEN SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HE03 99339
PCS
&EFS/20.3:D
PCS
&EFS/34.1:C
C C
PCS
&EFS/34.5:C
=FP+TB-A12-H04 1 LAMP 3SB5285-6HC03 RED SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HC03 96767
PCS
&EFS/24.3:D
PCS
&EFS/24.7:D
PCS
&EFS/25.1:D
D D
PCS
&EFS/25.4:D
PCS
&EFS/25.7:D
PCS
&EFS/26.3:C
PCS
E &EFS/26.7:C
E
=FP+TB-A12-S01 1 E-STOP PUSHBUTTON 3SB5203-0UC01 SIEMENS 3SB5203-0UC01 83127
PCS
&EFS/19.3:E
=FP+TB-A12-S02 1 PUSHBUTTON RED 3SB5000-0AC01 SIEMENS 3SB5000-0AC01 96728
PCS
&EFS/29.1:C
=FP+TB-A12-S02 1 NC 24 VDC AUXILLARY CONTACT 3SB54 00-0C SIEMENS 3SB54 00-0C 96533
PCS
&EFS/29.1:C
=FP+TB-A12-S02 1 LAMPHOLDER 3SB54-007TC FOR RED SIEMENS 3SB54-007TC 97082
PCS
F &EFS/29.1:C F
=
5 7 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=FP+TB-A12-S03 1 PUSHBUTTON GREEN 3SB5000-0AE01 SIEMENS 3SB5000-0AE01 96727

PCS
&EFS/29.4:C
=FP+TB-A12-S03 1 SWITCHIN ELEMENT NO-TYPE SIEMENS 3SB5400 0B 83146
PCS
&EFS/29.4:C
=FP+TB-A12-S03 1 LAMPHOLDER 3SB54-007TE FOR GREEN SIEMENS 3SB54-007TE 97081
PCS
&EFS/29.4:C
B B
PCS
&EFS/30.1:C
PCS
&EFS/30.1:C
PCS
&EFS/30.1:C
PCS
&EFS/30.2:C
C C
PCS
&EFS/30.2:C
PCS
&EFS/30.2:C
PCS
&EFS/36.5:C
PCS
&EFS/36.5:C
D D
PCS
&EFS/36.5:C
PCS
&EFS/37.1:D
PCS
&EFS/37.1:D
PCS
E &EFS/37.1:D
E
PCS
&EFS/39.5:C
PCS
&EFS/39.5:C
PCS
&EFS/39.5:C
PCS
F &EFS/40.1:D F
=
6 8 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A

PCS
&EFS/40.1:D
PCS
&EFS/40.1:D
=FP+TB-A13 1 Control cabinet AE1039.500 - - RITTAL AE1039.500 48389
PCS
&EFS/19.5:D
B B
PCS
&EFS/20.6:D
PCS
&EFS/34.2:C
PCS
&EFS/34.7:C
PCS
&EFS/24.4:D
C C
PCS
&EFS/24.9:D
PCS
&EFS/25.2:D
PCS
&EFS/25.6:D
PCS
&EFS/25.9:D
D D
PCS
&EFS/26.4:C
PCS
&EFS/26.8:C
PCS
&EFS/19.5:E
PCS
E &EFS/29.1:D
E
PCS
&EFS/29.1:D
PCS
&EFS/29.1:D
PCS
&EFS/29.7:C
PCS
F &EFS/29.7:C F
=
7 9 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A

PCS
&EFS/29.7:C
PCS
&EFS/30.1:D
PCS
&EFS/30.1:D
B B
PCS
&EFS/30.1:D
PCS
&EFS/30.2:D
PCS
&EFS/30.2:D
PCS
&EFS/30.2:D
C C
PCS
&EFS/36.5:D
PCS
&EFS/36.5:D
PCS
&EFS/36.5:D
PCS
&EFS/37.3:D
D D
PCS
&EFS/37.3:D
PCS
&EFS/37.3:D
PCS
&EFS/39.5:D
PCS
E &EFS/39.5:D
E
PCS
&EFS/39.5:D
PCS
&EFS/40.3:D
PCS
&EFS/40.3:D
PCS
F &EFS/40.3:D F
=
8 10 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=FP+TB-A14 1 TERMINAL BOX 380X300X210 (WXHXD) AE 1031.500 RITTAL AE 1031.500 97184

PCS
&EFS/19.7:D
PCS
&EFS/20.8:D
PCS
&EFS/34.4:C
B B
PCS
&EFS/34.8:C
PCS
&EFS/19.7:E
=FP+TB-A14-S02 1 SELECTOR SWITCH WITH 1NC BLOCK SIEMENS 3SB5000-4AB01 96267
PCS
&EFS/30.5:C
PCS
&EFS/30.6:C
C C
PCS
&EFS/30.6:C
PCS
&EFS/30.6:C
D D
E E
F F
=
9 &EPC/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SUMMARIZED PART LIST
A A
NUMBER BEUMER NO. DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER TYPE NUMBER QUANTITY
1 76716 FREQU.-CONVERTER ACS550-01-05A4-4 WITH BASIC PANEL ABB ACS550-01-05A4-4 1

PCS
2 79596 TIMER A1D1 - X (CSA) 0,3 SEC-30 MINUTE EAPL A1D1 - X (CSA) 1
PCS
3 75876 TIMER B1DH-Q 0,6 - 60 SECOND EAPL B1DH-Q 2

PCS
B 4 97880 CABINET LIGHT 11W HAVELLS CABINET LIGHT 11W 1 B

PCS
5 84599 RELAY COIL,2C/O,MY2N 220VAC OMRON MY2N 5

PCS
6 96800 RELAY BASE FOR MY2N OMRON PYF-08A-N 5

PCS
7 77596 PROXIMITY SWITCH NBB15-30GM50-WO PEPPERL & FUCHS NBB15-30GM50-WO 1

PCS
8 97253 TERMINAL 50 SQ.MM STUD-TYPE WAGO 50 Sq.mm 7

PCS
C C
9 97254 EARTH TERMINAL 50 SQ.MM STUD-TYPE WAGO 50 Sq.mm 2
PCS
10 96772 TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 13

PCS
11 96779 EARTH TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 5

PCS
12 96710 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 218
PCS
D D
13 96783 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 62
PCS
14 96776 EARTH TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 1
PCS
15 96774 TERMINAL 35 SQ.MM STUD TYPE WAGO 35 Sq.mm 3

PCS
16 96780 EARTH TERMINAL 35 SQ.MM STUD TYPE WAGO 35 Sq.mm 1

PCS
E 17 96786 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ. MM. ISOLATING TERMINAL PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq. mm. 1 E
PCS
18 48370 SIDE WALL TS8105.235 RITTAL TS8105.235 1

PCS
19 99399 CONTROL CABINET AE 1045.500 400X500X210 RITTAL AE1045.500 1

PCS
20 48389 Control cabinet AE1039.500 - - RITTAL AE1039.500 2

PCS
F F
=
&EPB/10 2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EPC PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ SUMMARIZED PARTS LIST
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
21 97184 TERMINAL BOX 380X300X210 (WXHXD) AE 1031.500 RITTAL AE 1031.500 1

PCS
22 49010 CABINET 800X2000X500MM TS 8805.500 RITTAL TS8805.500 1

PCS
23 96362 AUXILARY CONTACTOR BLOCK 3RH2911-1HA20, 2NO SIEMENS 3RH2911-1HA20 4

PCS
B 24 96554 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER MCB 2A,1P 5SL41027RC SIEMENS 5SL41027RC 4 B

PCS
25 96552 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER MCB 10A,2P 5SL42107RC SIEMENS 5SL42107RC 3

PCS
26 96767 LAMP 3SB5285-6HC03 RED SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HC03 13

PCS
27 96768 LAMP 3SB5285-6HD03 YELLOW SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HD03 1

PCS
28 96769 LAMP 3SB5285-6HF03 BLUE SIEMENS 3SB5285-6HF03 1

PCS
C C
29 97280 CIRCUIT BREAKER , TRIP UNIT 3VT9225-6AC00 SIEMENS 3VT2725-3AA36- 0AA0 1
PCS
30 97281 ROTARY HANDLE 3VT9200-3HQ00 FOR 3VT 200A SIEMENS 3VT9200-3HQ00 1

PCS
31 97293 AUXILLARY SWITCH 3VT9225-6AC00 FOR VT250 SIEMENS 3VT9225-6AC00 1

PCS
32 83566 MCCB 3VT1712-2DC36-0AA0 125 A SIEMENS 3VT17122DC36 1

PCS
D D
33 83841 LIMIT SWITCH 3SE3020-0A POSITION SWITCH SIEMENS 3SE3020-0A 1
PCS
34 99339 LAMP 3SB52 85-6HE03 GREEN SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HE03 25

PCS
35 97396 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2122-1AP00 S00,2NO+2NC SIEMENS 3RH2122-1AP00 8

PCS
36 83127 E-STOP PUSHBUTTON 3SB5203-0UC01 SIEMENS 3SB5203-0UC01 4

PCS
E 37 97399 AUXILLARY CONTACTOR 3RH2140-1AP00 S00,4NO SIEMENS 3RH2140-1AP00 6 E

PCS
38 62457 CONTACT BLOCK 3RH2911-1FA40 4NO FOR CONTACTOR SIEMENS 3RH2911-1FA40 1

PCS
39 96267 SELECTOR SWITCH WITH 1NC BLOCK SIEMENS 3SB5000-4AB01 2

PCS
40 98581 CONTACTOR, AC-3, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V, SZ S0 SCREW TERMINAL SIEMENS 3RT2025-1AL20 3

PCS
F F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
41 79605 MOTOR PROTECTING SWITCH 3RV2011-1JA10 6A-10A SIEMENS 3RV2011-1JA10 1

PCS
42 61723 AUXILLARY CONTACT FOR MPCB SIEMENS 3RV2901-1E 3

PCS
43 96728 PUSHBUTTON RED 3SB5000-0AC01 SIEMENS 3SB5000-0AC01 8

PCS
B 44 96533 NC 24 VDC AUXILLARY CONTACT 3SB54 00-0C SIEMENS 3SB54 00-0C 8 B

PCS
45 96727 PUSHBUTTON GREEN 3SB5000-0AE01 SIEMENS 3SB5000-0AE01 9

PCS
46 83146 SWITCHIN ELEMENT NO-TYPE SIEMENS 3SB5400 0B 9

PCS
47 97876 CONTROL TRANSFORMER 1KVA - 415/220 VAC STEP-UP CONTROL TRANSFORMER 1

PCS
48 75887 PRESSURE SWITCH GM-201-01-A7K-55 SWITZER GM-201-01-A7K-55 1

PCS
C C
49 82518 MPCB 3RV2011-IEA10 2.8A - 4A SIEMENS 3RV2011-IEA10 2
PCS
50 97082 LAMPHOLDER 3SB54-007TC FOR RED SIEMENS 3SB54-007TC 8

PCS
51 97081 LAMPHOLDER 3SB54-007TE FOR GREEN SIEMENS 3SB54-007TE 9

PCS
D D
E E
F F
=
2 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
FILLMODULE CLOCKWISE A
MANUFACTURER BEUMER Technology India Private Limited

B WIRING DIAGRAM NO 855498 B
Prabhat Bhavan, 2nd Floor
400 083 Mumbai, India
YEAR OF CONSTRUCTION 2014
TELEPHONE +91 (22) 6730-4500 INTERNET WWW.BEUMERGROUP.COM
NOMINAL RATING 415 - 50 Hz

CUSTOMER SUPPORT HOTLINE SPARE PART MANAGEMENT
C CONTROL VOLTAGE 220VAC/ 24VDC C

EMAIL India@BEUMERGROUP.COM ashish.srivastava@beumergroup.com
TEL. +91 22 6730 4506 +91 124 4799 972 RECOMMENDED BACK-UP FUSE 16 A
CUSTOMER Kanodia Infratech Limited SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT Ik = 25 KA
Kurari PROTECTION CLASS IEC IP55

D D
Dist. Kaimoor
India
IDENTIFIER 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ 2NOS 12 S FILLPAC WITH ACCE+
ORDER NUMBER 615-450003

E E
THIS DRAWING IS DESIGNED WITH THE CAE SYSTEM EPLAN AND MAY NOT BE CHANGED MANUALLY
THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL DATA CONTAINED HEREIN ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF THE BEUMER GROUP. ANY REPRODUCTION, TRANSMISSION, TRANSCRIPTION, ETC OR ANY KIND OF SUPPLY TO OTHERS IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN WITHOUT EXPRESS PRIOR WRITTEN
CONSENT. REFER TO PROTECTION NOTICE ISO 16016
F F
=
&EBH/2 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EAA PAGE 1
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TITLE PAGE
NAME SO.AR
VERSION WIRING DIA. NO 855498 OF PAGES 43
615-450003 FILLMODULE CLOCKWISE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
REVISION OVERVIEW
A A
NUMBER VERSION DATE NAME COMPANY CODE COMMENTS
1 -A- 14.01.2015 SO.AR 06 WIRING DIAGRAM AS BUILT
3
B B
C 7 C
10
D D
11
12
13
E 14 E
15
16
17
F F
=
&EAA/1 &EAB/3 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EBH PAGE 2
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ REVISION OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A A
&EAA 1 TITLE PAGE 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EFP =M001 +GE 21 OUTPUT CARD OVERVIEW 26.03.2015 SO.AR
&EBH 2 REVISION OVERVIEW 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMA 1 TERMINAL DIAGRAM =C001+GE-X0 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EAB 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 06.04.2015 SO.AR &EMA 2 TERMINAL DIAGRAM =C003+GE-X2 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDB 4 DESIGNATION SYSTEM 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMA 3 TERMINAL DIAGRAM =C004+GE-XDC 20.05.2015 SO.AR
B &EDB 4.A DESIGNATION SYSTEM 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMA 4 TERMINAL DIAGRAM =D477+FM-X1 20.05.2015 SO.AR B
&EDB 5 STRUCTURE IDENTIFIER OVERVIEW 20.05.2015 SO.AR &EMA 5 TERMINAL DIAGRAM =D477+FM-X2 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6 GENERAL NOTES 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMA 6 TERMINAL DIAGRAM =D477+FM-X3 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6.A GENERAL NOTES 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMZ 1 CABLE OVERVIEW 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6.B OVERVIEW NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMB 1 CABLE DIAGRAM 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EEB 6.C SYMBOL OVERVIEW 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EMB 2 CABLE DIAGRAM 20.05.2015 SO.AR
C C
&ELD 7 EARTHING PLAN 27.03.2015 SO.AR &EMB 3 CABLE DIAGRAM 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8 CONTROL CABINET 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EPB 1 PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8.A CONTROL CABINET 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EPB 2 PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EDA 8.B CONTROL CABINET 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EPB 3 PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFC 9 SCREEN DISPLAY LAYOUT DRAWING 27.03.2015 SO.AR &EPB 4 PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR
D D
&EFS =C001 +GE 10 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EPC 1 SUMMARIZED PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C003 +GE 11 CONTROL VOLTAGE AC 26.03.2015 SO.AR &EPC 2 SUMMARIZED PARTS LIST 20.05.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C004 +GE 12 CONTROL VOLTAGE DC 26.03.2015 SO.AR
&EFS =C019 +GE 14 FAULT MESSAGES 26.03.2015 SO.AR
E &EFS =C020 +GE 15 FILL MODULE CONTROLLER 26.03.2015 SO.AR E
&EFS =D477 +FM 16 FILL MODULE 26.03.2015 SO.AR
&EFP =L001 +GE 20 INPUT CARD OVERVIEW 26.03.2015 SO.AR

F F
=
&EBH/2 &EDB/4 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EAB PAGE 3
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3L2 3L2
3L3 3L3
A A
COMPLETE DEVICE DESIGNATION COMPLETE TERMINAL STRIP DESIGNATION
1 3 5 13 21
* ** ***
+A01-F01 * **
1,4-2,0A 14 22
=XXXXXX.PP01 .D001 +A01-F01 1,75A
=XXXXXX.PP01 .TE +A01-X3 (1)
/25.5:E
ENUMERATION NUMBER FOR DEVICES I> I> I> (OPTION) IF TERMINAL IS LOCATED IN TERMINAL BOX
2 4 6
DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR DEVICES VOLTAGE AT TERMINAL STRIP

1 3 5
LOCATION +A01 DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR TERMINAL STRIP
B B
-Q01 2 4 6
/18.2:E
COMPONENT GRD
LOCATION
SUBSYSTEM =.TE+A01-X3 1 2 3 4 COMPONENT
SYSTEM =.TE+A11-W1 1 2 3 GYNE SUBSYSTEM

ÖZ-J
4X1
C SYSTEM C
DEVICE DESIGNATION FOR EXTERNAL TERMINAL-BOXES
=.TE+A11
/36.2:E
* ** -X31 1 2 3 4
=XXXXXX .PP01 .TE +A11
}
LOCATION .D001 COMPONENT TIMING BELT 1
=.TE+A12-W1 1 2 3 GYNE .TE COMPONENT UNIT OF TIMING BELTS

COMPONENT KAWEFLEX 3130
4X1
.D002 COMPONENT TIMING BELT 2
( D001 + D002 )
=+A12
SUBSYSTEM /36.2:D
D -X32 1 2 3 4 +A01 LOCATION CONTROL CABINET
D
SYSTEM
-M01-W1 GY BK BN GYNE
ÖZ-J
4X1
U V W
+TE LOCATION UNIT OF TIMING BELTS ( D001 + D002 )
E M E
3~
-M01 PE
0,55KW
1,75A
SUBSYSTEM
"*, **, ***, ****, COMPONENT
THIS STRUCTURE CHARACTERISTICS ARE THE SHEET HEAD AND SYSTEM
F BE IN ACCORDANCE AM NOT BMK PICTURED F
LOCATION
PREVIOUS PAGE ORDER-NO TYPE OF MACHINE PAGE DESIGNATION NEXT PAGE =XXXXXX.PP01.D001
=
&EAB/3 4.A +TE
+
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3L2 3L2
3L3 3L3
A A
COMPLETE CABLE NUMBER
1 3 5 13 11
* ** *** ****
+A01-F01
1,4-2,0A 14 12
=XXXXXX.PP01 .D001 +TE -M01 -W1 1,75A
/25.5:E
COUNTING NUMBER CABLE I> I> I>
2 4 6
CODE LETTER FOR CABLES
1 3 5
ENUMERATION NUMBER FOR DEVICES +A01
B B
-Q01 2 4 6
/18.2:E
DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR DEVICES GRD
LOCATION =.TE+A01-X3 1 2 3 4
COMPONENT =.TE+A11-W1 1 2 3 GYNE

ÖZ-J
4X1
SUBSYSTEM
C C
=.TE+A11
SYSTEM /36.2:E
-X31 1 2 3 4
CABLE REPRESENTATION COMPLETE DEVICE DESIGNATION

=.TE+A12-W1 1 2 3 GYNE
KAWEFLEX 3130
* ** *** **** 4X1 * ** *** ****
=XXXXXX .PP01 .D001 +TE -M01 -W1 CABLE NUMBER =XXXXXX .PP01 .D001 +TE -M01
=.TE+A12 ENUMERATION NUMBER FOR DEVICES
/36.2:D
D -X32 1 2 3 4
D
ÖZ-J CABLE TYPE DESIGNATION CHARACTER FOR DEVICES
4x1 WIRE QUANTITY X CROSS SECTION LOCATION

-M01-W1 GY BK GYNE
ÖZ-J
CONDUCTOR COLOUR 4X1 COMPONENT
GY BK BN GNYE
U V W
SUBSYSTEM
E M E
3~
SYSTEM
-M01 PE
0,55KW
1,75A
F F
=XXXXXX.PP01.D001
=
4 5 +TE
+
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDB PAGE 4.A
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
STRUCTURE IDENTIFIER OVERVIEW
A DOCUMENT TYPE STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION MOUNTING LOCATION STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION A
&EAA ELECTRICAL DATASHEET +GE GENERAL
&EBH REVISION INFORMATION +FM FILL MODULE
&EAB LIST OF CONTENTS
&EDB DESCRIPTION OF DESIGNATION SYSTEM
B &EEB STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS B
&ELD EARTHING PLAN
&EDA DIMENSION DRAWING
&EFC SCREEN DISPLAY LAYOUT DRAWING
&EFS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
&EFP SIGNAL (I/O) LIST

C C
&EMA TERMINAL DIAGRAM
&EMZ CABLE OVERVIEW
&EMB CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
&EPB PARTS LIST
&EPC SUMMARIZED PARTS LIST

D HIGHER-LEVEL FUNCTION STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION D
=C001 INCOMING POWER SUPPLY
=C003 CONTROL VOLTAGE AC
=C004 CONTROL VOLTAGE DC
=C005 EMERGENCY STOP
E =C019 FAULT MESSAGES E
=C020 PLC CONCEPT
=D477 FILL MODULE
=L001 INPUT CARD OVERVIEW
=M001 OUTPUT CARD OVERVIEW
=FP FILLPAC
F F
=
4.A &EEB/6 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ STRUCTURE IDENTIFIER OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CONTROL CABINET CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A THIS SWITCHGEAR WAS PLANNED AND BUILT ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING REGULATIONS: EN60439-1; EN60204-1; EN50274; BGV A3; EN50102 A
MINIMUM CROSS SECTION OF A LINE CABLE ENTRY CONTROL CABINET COLOUR CORE IDENTIFICATION YES
X NO
MAIN CURRENT IN TOP POSITION RAL 7035 CONTROL CABINET

IEC 60204
MARKING OF DEVICES CONTROL CABINET + JUNCTION BOX
CONTROLLER IN BOTTOM POSITION
B IEC 60204 X B
PAGE / CONTINUOUS NUMBER
ENGLISH
CONTACT NUMBER
FOR SELECTING WIRE COLOURS STANDARD
WIRING COLOURS RIGHT CLICK ON THE ANCHOR MARK AND
TERMINAL STRIP IDENTIFICATION
OTHER X
SELECT ASSIGN VALUE SET CROSS REFRENCE
POWER L1 BLACK -X0 -X01 SUPPLY
SPECIFIC REGULATIONS
C POWER L2 BLACK
-X1 -X11 -X111 24DC, AS-i INTERFACE C
POWER L3 BLACK ACCORDING TO UL (UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC).

-X2 -X21 -X211 110-230VAC
NEUTRAL N BLUE
ACCORDING TO CSA (CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION)
-X3 -X31 400-500VAC
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR PE YELLOW GREEN
AWG-WIRING
-X4 -X41 THERMAL PROTECTION
CONTROL VOLTAGE AC PH RED
D CUSTOMERS-/ FACTORY INSTRUCTION D
CONTROL VOLTAGE AC EPH BLACK -X5 -X51 EMERGENCY STOP
FERTILIZER INDUSTRIE
CONTROL VOLTAGE DC L+ BLUE
-X7 -X71 FLOATING CONTACTS
CONTROL VOLTAGE DC M0V GREY ACCORDING TO CCC (CHINA COMPULSORY CERTIFIC.)

-XPE -XPE POTENTIAL EQUALIZER
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE DC L+ ORANGE
ACCORDING TO IEC (INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL
X
E COMMISSION) E
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE DC M0V ORANGE THREE-DIGIT = DISTRIBUTOR (PLUGGED)
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE AC PH ORANGE

TWO-DIGIT = TERMINAL BOX
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE AC EPH ORANGE
THERMISTOR BROWN
ONE-DIGIT = CONTROL CABINET
F ANALOG SIGNALS WHITE F
=
&EDB/5 6.A +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DESIGNATION SYSTEM
A A
COLOUR CODE ACCORD. TO IEC 757 REFERENCES IN CIRCUIT DIAGRAM GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS
BLACK BK EXAMPLE SPH SAFETY PHOTOCELL
EC END CONTACT
BROWN BN
=.C010 23
+AL
-K01 24
PC PRE-CONTACT
B RED RD B
/20.3:C
L LEFT
ORANGE OR =.C010 THIS CONTACT CAN BE FOUND IN THE COMPONENT =.C010
R RIGHT
+AL THE DEVICE CAN BE FOUND IN LOCATION +AL
YELLOW YE
POS POSITION
-K01 THE CONTACT IS FROM CONTACTOR -K01
C GREEN GN C
EP EMPTY PALLET
/20.3:C THE MAIN DEVICE IS ON PAGE 20 PATH 3:C
BLUE BU FP FULL PALLET
+A01 SS SUPPLY SECTION

PURPLE VT 51
-X1
FE FEED
GREY GY
D +A01 THIS CLAMP IS IN LOCATION +A01 D
HO HOIST
WHITE WH -X1 THIS CLAMP BELONGS TO THE TERMINAL STRIP -X1
LPS LAYER PUSHER SIDE
51 TERMINAL NUMBER 51
PINK PK
LTS LAY-OFF TABLE SIDE
GOLD GD 2L+AL /43.1:B

E E
"THESE SYMBOLS REFER TO THE POTENTIAL 2L+AL TO PAGE 43, CURRENT ABBREVIATIONS FOR CABLE DESIGNATION
TURQUOISE TQ PATH 1:B"
CS CUSTOMER SUPPLY
SILVER SR RD
IC INTERFACE CABLE
GREEN/YELLOW GNYE THIS CONNECTION IS THE RED WIRE OF A CABLE

F F
=
6 6.B +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6.A
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IT TT TN-S
L1 L1 L1
A A
L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
N N
PE
INSULATION MONITOR
B PE PE PE PE PE B
DESIGNED X
C EXECUTED C
TN-C TN-C-S
L1 L1
D L2 L2 D
L3 L3
PEN N
PEN
PE
PE PE
E E
DESIGNED
F
EXECUTED F
=
6.A 6.C +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6.B
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ OVERVIEW NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SYMBOL OVERVIEW
A FILLMODUL CONTROLLER DR16 A
-A1 0V GRD +24 -A2

POWER
-A01.4 -A01.3 -01
1L+
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
L+
1M
M
TX+
CANBUS
B POWER INPUT B
ADDRESS
TX-
INPUT / OUTPUT
TE+
RS422
0V
EFS100TS
RX+
RX-
C CAN BUS OUTPUT C

RS422
GND´
GND
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1L+
CH
CL
1M
FILLMODUL CONTROLLER
D D
LOAD CELL CANB1

+SENSE
-SENSE
SHIELD
+EXC
+VIN
-VIN
-EXC
CH
CL
VC
0V
T+
T-
-A01.2 -A01.1
E E
F F
=
6.B &ELD/7 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EEB PAGE 6.C
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ SYMBOL OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
K
AN
BL
L LY
C C
NA
IO
NT
TE
IN
FT
D D
LE
GE
PA
E E
F F
=
&EEB/6.C &EDA/8 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &ELD PAGE 7
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ EARTHING PLAN
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
=C001+GE-A01
CONTROL CABINET
80 mm
60 X 80
200 mm
B B
298 mm
=D477 =D477
=C001 =C003 -X2 -X3
-X2 =D477
-X0
-X1
165 mm
MOTOR FAULT FILLMODULE READY
=C005 =C019
-H01 -H02
150 mm 80 mm 150 mm
C C
25
60 X 25
207 mm 86,5 mm
600 mm
570 mm
=D477+FM-Q01
=D477+FM-K01
=C003+GE-F01
=C004+GE-F02
125 mm
300 mm
117 mm
=C020+GE-A01 35 X 15
EFS100TS
60 X 25
D D
60 X 25
25
=C004
-XDC
=C004+GE-XT01
=C004+GE-T01
SPOUT ON/OFF EMERGENCY STOP RESET
125 mm
185 mm
35 X 15 =C020+GE-A02
E E
=C005 =D477
-S02 =C005 -S02
-S01
100 mm
25
60 X 25
110 mm 80 mm 80 mm 110 mm 334 mm
F 380 mm F
=
&ELD/7 8.A +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CONTROL CABINET
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
30 mm 40 mm
80 mm
PG16
CUT OUT AT MOUNTING

B
PG11
275 mm PG11 PG11 PLATE FOR CABLE GLANDS
B
C C
600 mm
D D
E E
380 mm
F **PG16 - 05 Nos. F
PG11 - 12 Nos.
=
8 8.B +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.A
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A CONTROL CABINET BACK VIEW CONTROL CABINET SIDE VIEW

A
WITH HINGE DETAIL WITH HINGE DETAIL
30\U+00B0
60,18
110 110 170 60
B 2 B
24,5 24,5 147
21,73
100
25
C C
54
600
D Ø7 Holes 10 Nos. D
300
25
25
100
100
E E
24,5 24,5
380 210
1
F F
=
8.A &EFC/9 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EDA PAGE 8.B
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
K
AN
BL
L LY
C C
NA
IO
NT
TE
IN
FT
D D
LE
GE
PA
E E
F F
=
&EDA/8.B &EFS/10 +
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EFC PAGE 9
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ SCREEN DISPLAY LAYOUT DRAWING
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1L1 / 16.0:A
1L2 / 16.0:A
1L3 / 16.0:A
A A
B B
-GRD
C C
-X0:1/-Q01:1
-X0:3/-Q01:3
-X0:5/-Q01:5
-GRD:/-X0:7
-X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
=FP+GE
-A01-W1
4x6 sqmm 1 2 3 GNYE
E E
R Y B PE
INCOMER POWER SUPPLY

FROM SLIP RING
415 VAC 3Φ
F F
= C001
&EFC/9 11 + GE
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EFS PAGE 10
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
1 3
-F01
C2Amp. 2 4
MCB
B B
-GRD
-F01:2/-T01:L
-F01:4/-T01:N
-X2:1/-F01:1
-X2:3/-F01:3
-GRD:/-X2:5
C C
-X2 1 2 3 4 5 6
D D
=FP+GE
-A01-W3
3x1,5 sqmm 1 2 GNYE
2L1 / 12.0:A
2L2 / 12.0:A
E E
L N1 PE1
230 VAC
UPS SUPPLY FROM CLIENT
THROUGH SLIP RING
F F
= C003
10 12 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CONTROL VOLTAGE AC
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11.9:E / 2L1
11.9:E / 2L2
A A
-GRD
-GRD:/-T01:PE
-T01 L N PE
B 115/230VAC B
24VDC/4Amp. 1 3
POWER SUPPLY
-F02
C6Amp. 2 4
MCB
-V -V' +V' +V
-T01:+V/-F02:1
-F02:2/-XDC:11L+
-F02:4/-XDC:1M0V
C C
-T01:-V/-F02:3
D D
-XT01:1/-T01:-V
-XDC 1L+ -XDC M0V
-XDC:3M0V/-A02-01:1M
-XDC:21L+/-S01:11
-XDC:2M0V/-H01:
E E
1
-XT01 BEFORE REMOVING THIS BRIDGE
MAKE SURE THAT AN INSULATION
MONITOR ACCORDING TO VDE
2 0113 / EN 60204-1 EXISTS
1L+
M0V1
M0V2
-XT01:2/-GRD:1
/13.0:A
/13.0:C
/15.0:A
GRD:1
F F
= C004
11 13 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ CONTROL VOLTAGE DC
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-S01:11/-S02:11
12.5:E / 1L+
A A
11 11
-S01 -S02
PUSH BUTTON 12 SELECTOR SWITCH 12
EMERGENCY STOP SPOUT ON/OFF
-S02:12/-A01-A01.4:+24
B B
-S01:12/-Q01:21
1L+PS / 15.0:A
-S01:12/-A01:3
C 1L+E / 14.0:A C
-H01:X2/-H02:X2
12.7:E / M0V1 M0V1 / 14.0:E
=D477 21
+FM
-Q01 22
/16.2:B
-Q01:22/-H01:X1
I0.3 &EFP/20.1:B
-H01:X1/-A01:4
D 4 MOTOR OVERLOAD D
=C020+GE-A01
x1
E -H01 E
RD x2
MOTOR FAULT
F F
= C005
12 14 + GE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-A01:3/-A02-01:1L+
13.9:C / 1L+E 1L+E / 15.0:A
A A
B B
I0.2 &EFP/20.1:B
3 RESET
=C020+GE-A01
C C
Q0.2 &EFP/21.1:B
-H02:X1/-A01:12
12 FILL MODULE READY
=C020+GE-A01
x1
D -H02 D
GN x2
FILLMODULE READY
-H02:X2/-A01-A01.4:0V
13.9:C / M0V1 M0V1 / 15.0:A
E E
F F
= C019
13 15 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FAULT MESSAGES
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-A01-A01.4:+24/-A02-01:M
13.9:C / 1L+PS
-A01-A01.4:0V/-A02-01:L+
14.9:E / M0V1
A -A02-01:1L+/-X1:1 A
14.9:A / 1L+E 1L+E / 18.0:A
-A02-01:1M/-K01:
12.7:E / M0V2 M0V2 / 16.4:E
-A01 0V GRD +24

&EFP/20.1:A -A02
&EFP/21.1:A POWER
-A01.4
B -01 B
TX+
1L+
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
L+
1M
M
CANBUS
TX- POWER INPUT
ADDRESS
TE+ INPUT / OUTPUT
-A01.3
RS422
0V
EFS100TS
RX+
C RX-
C
CAN BUS OUTPUT

RS422
GND´
GND
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1L+
FILLMODUL CONTROLLER
CH
CL
1M
D D
-A01.2 -A01.1
LOAD CELL CANB1
+SENSE
-SENSE
SHIELD
+EXC
+VIN
-VIN
-EXC
CH
CL
VC
0V
T+
T-
E E
-A02
+SUPPLY
-SUPPLY
-SHIELD
+MEAS.
-MEAS.
PT LTD. LOAD CELL -

LBB0200S000
F (200 KG.) F
= C020
14 16 + GE
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FILL MODULE CONTROLLER
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10.9:A / 1L1
10.9:A / 1L2
10.9:A / 1L3
A A
1 3 5 21
-Q01
8-13 AMP. 22
5.5 KW
/13.1:D
MPCB I> I> I>
2 4 6
B B
-Q01:2/-K01:1
-Q01:4/-K01:3
-Q01:6/-K01:5
C 1 3 5 Q0.0 &EFP/21.1:A C
-K01 10 MOTOR ON
/16.5:D 2 4 6 =C020+GE-A01
-K01:/-A01:10
D D
-GRD
-K01
32Amp.
-K01:2/-X3:1
-K01:4/-X3:2
-K01:6/-X3:3
-GRD:/-X3:PE
-K01:/-X2:2
15.9:A / M0V2 M0V2 / 17.0:F
E E
-X3 1 2 3 PE
-M01-W3
1 2 3 GNYE
ÖLFLEX
4x2,5 sqmm
-M01
5,5KW
11Amp. U1 V1 W1
M 1 2 /16.2:C
3 4 /16.3:C
F 3~ 5 6 /16.3:C
F
GND
= D477
15 17 + FM
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ FILL MODULE
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Q0.1 &EFP/21.1:B
11 BAG DISCHARGE
A
=C020+GE-A01 A
Q0.3 &EFP/21.1:B
13 BAG HOLD
=C020+GE-A01
Q0.4 &EFP/21.1:B
14 COARSE FEED
=C020+GE-A01
Q0.5 &EFP/21.1:B
B 15 FINE FEED & IMPELLER AERATION B
=C020+GE-A01
Q0.6 &EFP/21.1:B
16 NOZZLE AERATION
=C020+GE-A01
Q0.7 &EFP/21.1:B
17 SPARE
=C020+GE-A01
-X2:11/-A01:17
-X2:1/-A01:11
-X2:3/-A01:13
-X2:5/-A01:14
-X2:7/-A01:15
-X2:9/-A01:16
C C
-X2 1 3 5 7 9 11
-Y04-W4 -Y03-W4 -Y01-W4 -Y02-W4 -Y05-W4

ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX
3x1 sqmm 1 3x1 sqmm 1 3x1 sqmm 1 3x1 sqmm 1 3x1 sqmm 1
D D
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
PE PE PE PE PE
-V04 -Y04 -V03 -Y03 -V01 -Y01 -V02 -Y02 -V05 -Y05
2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
-Y04-W4 -Y03-W4 -Y01-W4 -Y02-W4 -Y05-W4

2 GNYE 2 GNYE 2 GNYE 2 GNYE 2 GNYE
ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX ÖLFLEX
E 3x1 sqmm 3x1 sqmm 3x1 sqmm 3x1 sqmm 3x1 sqmm E
-X2 2 13 4 14 6 15 8 16 10 17 12 18
-GRD -GRD -GRD -GRD -GRD -GRD

-X2:12/-X1:3
16.8:E / M0V2 MOV2 / 18.0:A
F F
BAG DISCHARGE BAG HOLD COARSE FEED FINE FEED & NOZZLE
IMPELLER AERATION AERATION
= D477
16 18 + FM
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
15.9:A / 1L+E
17.9:F / MOV2
A A
-X1 1 3 4 6
B -B01-W5 -B01-W6 B
PEPPER & FUCHS BN BU PEPPER & FUCHS BN BU
3 m 2 m
3x0,34 sqmm 3x0,34 sqmm
1 2 1 2
+ - + -
-B01 -B02
INDUCTIVE INDUCTIVE
SENSOR 3 SENSOR 3
C C
-B01-W5 WH -B01-W6 WH
PEPPER & FUCHS PEPPER & FUCHS

3x0,34 sqmm 3x0,34 sqmm
-X1 2 5
-X1:2/-A01:1
-X1:5/-A01:2
I0.0 &EFP/20.1:A
D 1 BAG HOLD D
=C020+GE-A01
I0.1 &EFP/20.1:B
2 BAG DISCHARGE
=C020+GE-A01
E E
F F
= D477
17 19 + FM
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
I0.4 &EFP/20.1:B
5 SORT 1
A
=C020+GE-A01 A
I0.5 &EFP/20.1:B
6 SORT 2
=C020+GE-A01
I0.6 &EFP/20.1:B
7 SPARE
=C020+GE-A01
I0.7 &EFP/20.1:B
-X1:10/-A01:6
-X1:7/-A01:5
B 8 FILL MODULE RESET B
-A01:8/-S02:13
=C020+GE-A01
-W7
3x1.5 sqmm
E01 /
TO FILL
MODULE
02-16
E02 /
C -X1 7 8 10 11 C
-W8
/19.2:D
ÖLFLEX
3x1.5 sqmm 2 3
-A15 12 14 13
ONLY ON SPOUT 01
-S01 -S02
D KEY SELECTOR 11 BU PUSH BUTTON 14 D
SWITCH RESET
-W8
/19.2:D 1
-X1 9
-X1:9/-S02:14
/ 1L+E
E E
SORT 1/SORT 2 PUSHBUTTON RESET
F F
= D477
18 &EFP/20 + FM
NAME SO.AR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PLC CARD OVERVIEW
A A
=C020+GE-A01
&EFS/15.1:B
1
I0.0 =D477+FM-B01:3 &EFS/18.6:D BAG HOLD SACK HALTEN
2
I0.1 =D477+FM-B02:3 &EFS/18.6:D BAG DISCHARGE SACKABWURF
3
I0.2 =D477+FM-Q01:21 &EFS/14.6:B RESET QUITTIEREN
4
I0.3 =D477+FM-Q01:22 &EFS/13.6:D MOTOR OVERLOAD MOTOR SCHUTZSCHALTER TURBINE
B 5 B
I0.4 =D477+FM-S01:12 &EFS/19.6:A SORT 1 SORT 1
6
I0.5 =D477+FM-S01:14 &EFS/19.6:A SORT 2 SORT 2
7
I0.6 =D477+FM-X1:10 &EFS/19.6:B SPARE RESERVE
8
I0.7 =D477+FM-S02:13 &EFS/19.6:B FILL MODULE RESET FILL-MODUL QUITTIEREN
C C
D D
E E
F F
= L001
&EFS/19 21 + GE
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EFP PAGE 20
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ INPUT CARD OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PLC CARD OVERVIEW
A A
=C020+GE-A01
&EFS/15.1:B
10
Q0.0 =D477+FM-K01:A1 &EFS/16.6:C MOTOR ON MOTOR EIN
11
Q0.1 =D477+FM-X2:1 &EFS/17.6:A BAG DISCHARGE SACKABWURF
12
Q0.2 =C019-H02 &EFS/14.6:D FILL MODULE READY FILL-MODUL BEREIT
13
Q0.3 =D477+FM-R2:A1 &EFS/17.6:A BAG HOLD SACK HALTEN
B 14 B
Q0.4 =D477+FM-R3:A1 &EFS/17.6:B COARSE FEED GROBSTROM
15
Q0.5 =D477+FM-R4:A1 &EFS/17.6:B FINE FEED & IMPELLER AERATION FEINSTROM & TURBINEN BELUFTUNG
16
Q0.6 =D477+FM-R5:A1 &EFS/17.6:B NOZZLE AERATION FULLROHRBELUFTUNG
17
Q0.7 =D477+FM-R6:A1 &EFS/17.6:C SPARE RESERVE
C C
D D
E E
F F
= M001
20 &EMA/1 + GE
DATE 20.05.2015 TECH. POS. DOCUMENT TYPE &EFP PAGE 21
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ OUTPUT CARD OVERVIEW
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
=C001+GE-X0
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B

96772 1 =D477+FM-Q01 1 &EFS/10.1:D
96772 2 &EFS/10.1:D
96772 3 =D477+FM-Q01 3 &EFS/10.1:D
96772 4 &EFS/10.1:D
96772 5 =D477+FM-Q01 5 &EFS/10.1:D
C C
96772 6 &EFS/10.1:D
96779 7 -GRD &EFS/10.1:D
96779 8 &EFS/10.2:D
D D
E E
F F
=
&EFP/21 2 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM =C001+GE-X0
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
=C003+GE-X2
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B

96710 1 -F01 1 &EFS/11.1:D
96710 2 &EFS/11.1:D
96710 3 -F01 3 &EFS/11.1:D
96710 4 &EFS/11.1:D
96776 5 -GRD &EFS/11.1:D
C C
-X2 6
96776 6 -X2 5 &EFS/11.1:D
D D
E E
F F
=
1 3 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM =C003+GE-X2
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
=C004+GE-XDC
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B

=C005-S01 11 96783 1L+ -F02 2 &EFS/12.5:E
=C005-H01 x2 96783 M0V -F02 4 &EFS/12.7:E
=C020-A02-01 1M
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
2 4 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM =C004+GE-XDC
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
=D477+FM-X1
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
-B01-W6
-B01-W5
-B01-W5
-B01-W6
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
-W8
-W8
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
PEPPER & FUCHS
PEPPER & FUCHS
PEPPER & FUCHS
PEPPER & FUCHS

B B
ÖLFLEX
ÖLFLEX
BN -B01 1 96710 1 =C020+GE-A02-01 1L+ &EFS/18.2:B
=C020+GE-A01 1 96710 2 -B01 3 WH &EFS/18.2:D
BU -B01 2 96710 3 -X2 12 &EFS/18.2:B
BN -B02 1 96710 4 &EFS/18.3:B
=C020+GE-A01 2 96710 5 -B02 3 WH &EFS/18.3:D
C C
BU -B02 2 96710 6 &EFS/18.3:B
2 -A15-S01 12 96710 7 =C020+GE-A01 5 &EFS/19.2:C
96710 8 &EFS/19.2:C
-S02 14 96710 9 -A15-S01 11 1 &EFS/19.2:D
3 -A15-S01 14 96710 10 =C020+GE-A01 6 &EFS/19.3:C
96710 11 &EFS/19.3:C
D D
E E
F F
=
3 5 +
PLANT 2 NOS. CEMENT SILO EQPT 1500 T+ TERMINAL DIAGRAM =D477+FM-X1
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
=D477+FM-X2
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
-Y05-W4
-Y02-W4
-Y01-W4
-Y03-W4
-Y04-W4
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX
ÖLFLEX
ÖLFLEX
ÖLFLEX
ÖLFLEX

1 -Y04 1 96783 1 =C020+GE-A01 11 &EFS/17.1:C
2 -Y04 2 60517 2 -K01 &EFS/17.1:E
1 -Y03 1 96783 3 =C020+GE-A01 13 &EFS/17.2:C
2 -Y03 2 60517 4 &EFS/17.2:E
1 -Y01 1 96783 5 =C020+GE-A01 14 &EFS/17.4:C
C C
2 -Y01 2 60517 6 &EFS/17.4:E
1 -Y02 1 96783 7 =C020+GE-A01 15 &EFS/17.5:C
2 -Y02 2 60517 8 &EFS/17.5:E
1 -Y05 1 96783 9 =C020+GE-A01 16 &EFS/17.7:C
2 -Y05 2 60517 10 &EFS/17.7:E
96783 11 =C020+GE-A01 17 &EFS/17.8:C
60517 12 -X1 3 &EFS/17.8:E
GNYE -Y04 PE 96776 13 -GRD &EFS/17.1:E
D GNYE -Y03 PE 96776 14 -GRD &EFS/17.3:E D
GNYE -Y01 PE 96776 15 -GRD &EFS/17.4:E
GNYE -Y02 PE 96776 16 -GRD &EFS/17.6:E
GNYE -Y05 PE 96776 17 -GRD &EFS/17.7:E
96776 18 -GRD &EFS/17.8:E
E E
F F
=
4 6 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL DIAGRAM
TERMINAL STRIP
A A
=D477+FM-X3
CABLE NAME
CABLE NAME
-M01-W3
DEVICE CONNECTION
CONNECTION POINT
CONNECTION POINT
TERMINAL
JUMPER
CABLE TYPE
CABLE TYPE
B B
ÖLFLEX

1 -M01 U1 96710 1 -K01 2 &EFS/16.2:E
2 -M01 V1 96710 2 -K01 4 &EFS/16.3:E
3 -M01 W1 96710 3 -K01 6 &EFS/16.3:E
GNYE -M01 GND 96776 PE -GRD &EFS/16.3:E
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
5 &EMZ/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE OVERVIEW
A A
=D477+FM-B01-W5 =D477+FM-X1 =D477+FM-B01 PEPPER & FUCHS 3 3 0,34 sqmm 3 m &EFS/18.2:B IC
=D477+FM-B01-W6 =D477+FM-X1 =D477+FM-B02 PEPPER & FUCHS 3 3 0,34 sqmm 2 m &EFS/18.3:B IC
=D477+FM-M01-W3 =D477+FM-X3 =D477+FM-M01 ÖLFLEX 4 4 2,5 sqmm 5 m &EFS/16.2:E IC

B B
=D477+FM-W8 =D477+FM-X1 =D477+FM-A15-S01 ÖLFLEX 3 3 1.5 sqmm &EFS/19.2:D IC
=D477+FM-Y01-W4 =D477+FM-X2 =D477+FM-Y01 ÖLFLEX 3 3 1 sqmm &EFS/17.4:D IC
C =D477+FM-Y05-W4 =D477+FM-X2 =D477+FM-Y05 ÖLFLEX 3 3 1 sqmm &EFS/17.6:D IC C
D D
E E
F F
=
&EMA/6 &EMB/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
CABLE NAME =D477+FM-B01-W5 CABLE TYPE PEPPER & FUCHS REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
FUNCTION TEXT NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 0,34 sqmm CABLE LENGTH 3 m
&EFS/18.2:B -X1 1 BN -B01 1 &EFS/18.2:C INDUCTIVE SENSOR
&EFS/18.2:B -X1 3 BU -B01 2 &EFS/18.2:C ==

B B
&EFS/18.2:D -X1 2 WH -B01 3 &EFS/18.2:C ==
CABLE NAME =D477+FM-B01-W6 CABLE TYPE PEPPER & FUCHS REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
&EFS/18.3:B -X1 4 BN -B02 1 &EFS/18.3:C INDUCTIVE SENSOR

C C
&EFS/18.3:B -X1 6 BU -B02 2 &EFS/18.3:C ==
&EFS/18.3:D -X1 5 WH -B02 3 &EFS/18.3:C ==
CABLE NAME =D477+FM-M01-W3 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
D D
&EFS/16.2:E -X3 1 1 -M01 U1 &EFS/16.2:F
&EFS/16.3:E -X3 2 2 -M01 V1 &EFS/16.2:F
&EFS/16.3:E -X3 3 3 -M01 W1 &EFS/16.2:F
&EFS/16.3:E -X3 PE GNYE -M01 GND &EFS/16.2:F
CABLE NAME =D477+FM-W8 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
E FUNCTION TEXT SORT 1/SORT 2 NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1.5 sqmm CABLE LENGTH E
SORT 1/SORT 2 &EFS/19.2:D -X1 9 1 -A15-S01 11 &EFS/19.2:D KEY SELECTOR SWITCH
&EFS/19.2:C -X1 7 2 -A15-S01 12 &EFS/19.2:D ==
SORT 1/SORT 2 &EFS/19.3:C -X1 10 3 -A15-S01 14 &EFS/19.2:D ==

F F
=
&EMZ/1 2 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
CABLE NAME =D477+FM-Y01-W4 CABLE TYPE ÖLFLEX REMARKS INTERFACE CABLE
FUNCTION TEXT COARSE FEED NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
COARSE FEED &EFS/17.4:C -X2 5 1 -Y01 1 &EFS/17.4:D COARSE FEED
== &EFS/17.4:E -X2 6 2 -Y01 2 &EFS/17.4:D ==

B B
== &EFS/17.4:E -X2 15 GNYE -Y01 PE &EFS/17.4:D
FUNCTION TEXT FINE FEED & IMPELLER AERATION NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
FINE FEED & IMPELLER AERATION &EFS/17.5:C -X2 7 1 -Y02 1 &EFS/17.5:D FINE FEED & IMPELLER AERATION
C C
== &EFS/17.5:E -X2 8 2 -Y02 2 &EFS/17.5:D ==
FUNCTION TEXT BAG HOLD NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
D D
BAG HOLD &EFS/17.2:C -X2 3 1 -Y03 1 &EFS/17.2:D BAG HOLD
== &EFS/17.2:E -X2 4 2 -Y03 2 &EFS/17.2:D ==
FUNCTION TEXT BAG DISCHARGE NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
E E
BAG DISCHARGE &EFS/17.1:C -X2 1 1 -Y04 1 &EFS/17.1:D BAG DISCHARGE
== &EFS/17.1:E -X2 2 2 -Y04 2 &EFS/17.1:D ==
F F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CABLE DIAGRAM
A A
FUNCTION TEXT NOZZLE AERATION NO. OF CONDUCTORS 3 CROSS-SECTION 1 sqmm CABLE LENGTH
NOZZLE AERATION &EFS/17.7:C -X2 9 1 -Y05 1 &EFS/17.7:D NOZZLE AERATION
== &EFS/17.7:E -X2 10 2 -Y05 2 &EFS/17.7:D ==

B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
2 &EPB/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=D477+FM-A15 1 PVC JUNCTION BOX 100X100X60MM ENEXCO 100x100x60mm 78583

PCS
&EFS/19.1:D
=C020+GE-A01 1 Operator panel EFS100TS - - ESAT EFS100TS 61113
PCS
&EFS/15.1:B
=C020+GE-A02 1 Dig.input/outp.mod. DR16 - - ESAT DR16 61114
PCS
&EFS/15.5:B
B B
=D477+FM-B01 1 PROXIMITY SWITCH NBN8-18GM60-A2 P&F MAKE, M 18 DIA. PEPPERL & FUCHS NBN8-18GM60-A2 75889
PCS
&EFS/18.2:C
=D477+FM-B02 1 Proximity switch NBB15-30GM60-A2 P&F make, M 30 dia PEPPERL & FUCHS NBB15-30GM60-A2 75891
PCS
&EFS/18.3:C
=C001+GE-X0 1 TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96772
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
C C
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
D D
=C001+GE-X0 1 EARTH TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96779
PCS
&EFS/10.1:D
=C001+GE-X0 1 EARTH TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 96779
PCS
&EFS/10.2:D
=C003+GE-X2 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96710
PCS
&EFS/11.1:D
PCS
E &EFS/11.1:D
E
PCS
&EFS/11.1:D
PCS
&EFS/11.1:D
=C003+GE-X2 1 EARTH TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96776
PCS
&EFS/11.1:D
=C003+GE-X2 1 EARTH TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96776
PCS
F &EFS/11.1:D F
=
&EMB/3 2 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=C004+GE-XDC 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96783
PCS
&EFS/12.5:E
=C004+GE-XDC 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96783
PCS
&EFS/12.7:E
=C004+GE-XT01 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ. MM. ISOLATING TERMINAL PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq. mm. 96786
PCS
&EFS/12.1:E
B B
=D477+FM-X1 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96710
PCS
&EFS/18.2:B
PCS
&EFS/18.2:D
PCS
&EFS/18.2:B
PCS
&EFS/18.3:B
C C
PCS
&EFS/18.3:D
PCS
&EFS/18.3:B
PCS
&EFS/19.2:C
PCS
&EFS/19.2:C
D D
PCS
&EFS/19.2:D
PCS
&EFS/19.3:C
PCS
&EFS/19.3:C
=D477+FM-X2 1 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96783
PCS
E &EFS/17.1:C
E
PCS
&EFS/17.2:C
PCS
&EFS/17.4:C
PCS
&EFS/17.5:C
PCS
F &EFS/17.7:C F
=
1 3 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
PCS
&EFS/17.8:C
=D477+FM-X2 1 EARTH TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 96776
PCS
&EFS/17.1:E
PCS
&EFS/17.3:E
B B
PCS
&EFS/17.4:E
PCS
&EFS/17.6:E
PCS
&EFS/17.7:E
PCS
&EFS/17.8:E
C C
PCS
&EFS/16.2:E
PCS
&EFS/16.3:E
PCS
&EFS/16.3:E
PCS
&EFS/16.3:E
D D
=C001+GE-A01 1 CABINET 380X600X210MM AE 1038.500 RITTAL AE 1038.500 48492
PCS
&EDA/8.0:A
=C003+GE-F01 1 Autom.circuit breaker 5SY6202-7 - - SIEMENS 5SY6202-7 54479
PCS
&EFS/11.4:B
=C004+GE-F02 1 6A ,5SL42067RC MCB 2P . SIEMENS 5SL42067RC 96518
PCS
&EFS/12.5:B
=C005+GE-H01 1 24 VDC LED RED SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HC01 96521
PCS
E &EFS/13.1:E
E
=C005+GE-S01 1 E-STOP PUSHBUTTON 3SB5203-0UC01 SIEMENS 3SB5203-0UC01 83127
PCS
&EFS/13.1:B
=C005+GE-S02 1 2 POSITION 24 VDC KEY SELECTOR SWITCH SIEMENS 3SB5000-4AC01 96532
PCS
&EFS/13.2:B
=C005+GE-S02 1 NC 24 VDC AUXILLARY CONTACT 3SB54 00-0C SIEMENS 3SB54 00-0C 96533
PCS
&EFS/13.2:B
=C019+GE-H02 1 24 VDC LED GREEN SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HE01 96522
PCS
F &EFS/14.2:D F
=
2 4 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PARTS LIST
A A
=D477+FM-K01 1 POWER CONTACTOR 3TF3400-0BB0+1NO 24VDC 32A,5.5KW SIEMENS 3TF3400-0BB0 96539

PCS
&EFS/16.5:D
=D477+FM-Q01 1 MPCB(3VU1340-1NL00) WITH 1NO+1NC 8-13A FOR 5.5KW SIEMENS 3VU1340-1NL00 96538
PCS
&EFS/16.2:B
=D477+FM-S02 1 OPAQUE NORMAL BLUE PUSH BUTTON 24VDC SIEMENS 3SB50 00-0AF01 96540
PCS
&EFS/19.6:D
B B
=D477+FM-X2 1 Z-SERIES, ZDK2,5-2 FEED-THROUGH TERMINAL, DOUBLE-TIER TERMINAL WEIDMULLER ZDK2,5-2 60517
PCS
&EFS/17.1:E
PCS
&EFS/17.2:E
PCS
&EFS/17.4:E
PCS
&EFS/17.5:E
C C
PCS
&EFS/17.7:E
PCS
&EFS/17.8:E
=C004+GE-T01 1 POWER SUPPLY , 4A , 24VDC, 96W WERNER ELECTRIC MDR-100-24 96406
PCS
&EFS/12.1:B
D D
E E
F F
=
3 &EPC/1 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
1 78583 PVC JUNCTION BOX 100X100X60MM ENEXCO 100x100x60mm 1

PCS
2 61113 Operator panel EFS100TS - - ESAT EFS100TS 1

PCS
3 61114 Dig.input/outp.mod. DR16 - - ESAT DR16 1

PCS
B 4 75889 PROXIMITY SWITCH NBN8-18GM60-A2 P&F MAKE, M 18 DIA. PEPPERL & FUCHS NBN8-18GM60-A2 1 B
PCS
5 75891 Proximity switch NBB15-30GM60-A2 P&F make, M 30 dia PEPPERL & FUCHS NBB15-30GM60-A2 1
PCS
6 96772 TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 6

PCS
7 96779 EARTH TERMINAL 10 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 10 Sq.mm 2

PCS
8 96710 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 18

PCS
C C
9 96776 EARTH TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 9
PCS
10 96783 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ.MM DOUBLE DECKER PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq.mm 8
PCS
11 96786 TERMINAL 2.5 SQ. MM. ISOLATING TERMINAL PUSH-IN TYPE WAGO 2.5 Sq. mm. 1
PCS
12 48492 CABINET 380X600X210MM AE 1038.500 RITTAL AE 1038.500 1

PCS
D D
13 54479 Autom.circuit breaker 5SY6202-7 - - SIEMENS 5SY6202-7 1
PCS
14 96518 6A ,5SL42067RC MCB 2P . SIEMENS 5SL42067RC 1

PCS
15 96521 24 VDC LED RED SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HC01 1

PCS
16 83127 E-STOP PUSHBUTTON 3SB5203-0UC01 SIEMENS 3SB5203-0UC01 1

PCS
E 17 96532 2 POSITION 24 VDC KEY SELECTOR SWITCH SIEMENS 3SB5000-4AC01 1 E

PCS
18 96533 NC 24 VDC AUXILLARY CONTACT 3SB54 00-0C SIEMENS 3SB54 00-0C 1

PCS
19 96522 24 VDC LED GREEN SIEMENS 3SB52 85-6HE01 1

PCS
20 96539 POWER CONTACTOR 3TF3400-0BB0+1NO 24VDC 32A,5.5KW SIEMENS 3TF3400-0BB0 1

PCS
F F
=
&EPB/4 2 +
NAME SO.AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
21 96538 MPCB(3VU1340-1NL00) WITH 1NO+1NC 8-13A FOR 5.5KW SIEMENS 3VU1340-1NL00 1

PCS
22 96540 OPAQUE NORMAL BLUE PUSH BUTTON 24VDC SIEMENS 3SB50 00-0AF01 1
PCS
23 60517 Z-SERIES, ZDK2,5-2 FEED-THROUGH TERMINAL, DOUBLE-TIER TERMINAL WEIDMULLER ZDK2,5-2 6

PCS
B 24 96406 POWER SUPPLY , 4A , 24VDC, 96W WERNER ELECTRIC MDR-100-24 1 B

PCS
C C
D D
E E
F F
=
1 +
NAME SO.AR
Inductive sensor NBN8-18GM60-A2
Dimensions
M18x1
10
4
60
24
LED
Model Number
NBN8-18GM60-A2
Features
• 8 mm not embeddable
Connection Technical Data

General specifications
Switching element function PNP NO/NC
Rated operating distance sn 8 mm
BN Installation not embeddable
L+ Output polarity DC
BK Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 6.48 mm
Reduction factor rAl 0.45
WH
Reduction factor rCu 0.4
BU Reduction factor r303 0.75
L- Nominal ratings
Operating voltage UB 10 ... 30 V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 700 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5%
Reverse polarity protected reverse polarity protected
Short-circuit protection pulsing
Voltage drop Ud ≤3V
Accessories Operating current IL 0 ... 200 mA
BF 18 Off-state current Ir 0 ... 0.5 mA typ. 0.1 µA at 25 °C
Mounting flange, 18 mm No-load supply current I0 ≤ 20 mA
Indication of the switching state LED, yellow
Functional safety related parameters
MTTFd 1140 a
Mission Time (TM) 20 a
Diagnostic Coverage (DC) 0%
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 °C (-13 ... 158 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material brass, nickel-plated
Sensing face PBT
Protection degree IP67
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
083857_eng.xml
Approvals and certificates

UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose
CCC approval Products with a maximum operating voltage of ≤36 V do not bear a
CCC marking because they do not require approval.
Date of issue: 2011-07-14
Release date: 2011-07-14 10:53
Subject to modifications without notice Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0001
fa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
fa-info@pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
fa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
1
Inductive sensor NBB15-30GM60-A2
Dimensions
M30x1,5
57
60
36
LED
Model Number
NBB15-30GM60-A2
Features
• Increased operating distance

Switching element function PNP NO/NC
BN Installation embeddable
L+
Output polarity DC
BK Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 12.15 mm
Reduction factor rAl 0.3
WH
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
BU Reduction factor r303 0.75
L- Nominal ratings
Operating voltage UB 10 ... 30 V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 200 Hz
Reverse polarity protected reverse polarity protected
Short-circuit protection pulsing
Voltage drop Ud 3 V
Operating current IL 0 ... 200 mA
Accessories Off-state current Ir 0 ... 0.5 mA typ. 0.1 A at 25 °C
BF 30 No-load supply current I0 25 mA
Mounting flange, 30 mm Indication of the switching state all direction LED, yellow
EXG-30 Ambient conditions
Quick mounting bracket with dead stop Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 °C (-13 ... 158 °F)
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Sensing face PBT
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose
CCC approval Products with a maximum operating voltage of 36 V do not bear a
CCC marking because they do not require approval.
085977_eng.xml
Release date: 2011-07-14 10:57

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
1
Inductive sensor NBB15-30GM50-WO
Dimensions
M30 x 1.5
47
50
S
36
LED(s)
Model Number ø 28.2

NBB15-30GM50-WO
Features
• Basic series
• 15 mm embeddable

Switching element function AC Break function
WÖ
BN Installation quasi embedd.
L1 Output polarity AC
I
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 12.15 mm
BU N Reduction factor rAl 0.33
GY Reduction factor rCu 0.28
Reduction factor rV2A 0.81
Nominal ratings
Installation conditions Operating voltage UB 20 ... 253 V
Metal Switching frequency f 0 ... 20 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
A
Voltage drop Ud < 5 V (IL > 50 mA); < 8 V (IL < 50 mA)
Momentary current 0 ... 1600 mA
B
(20 ms, 0.1 Hz)
Operating current IL 5 ... 200 mA
Off-state current Ir 0 ... 1.7 mA
A = 5 mm
Operating voltage display LED, green
B = 15 mm
Indication of the switching state LED, yellow
Standard conformity
Standards IEC / EN 60947-5-2:2004
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 °C (248 ... 343 K)
Connection type 2 m, PVC cable
Cable version PA
801649_ENG.xml

Sensing face PBT
1)
Note In the temperature range below 0 °C, permissible operating
voltage Ub 80...253 V
Safety fuse ≤ 0.3 A (quick-blow) according to IEC 60127-2

Sheet 1
Recommendation: after a short circuit, check that the device is
functioning correctly.
CCC approval Certified by China Compulsory Certification (CCC)
Accessories
Release date: 2009-05-07 10:24
BF 30
Mounting flange
EXG-30
Mounting aid

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
1
WEATHERPROOF
PRESSURE SWITCHES FLAMEPROOF
SERIES 200
GOOD REPEATABILITY TAMPERPROOF SET POINT ADJUSTER WITH
LOCKING DEVICE OVERTRAVEL STOP RUGGED DESIGN
Model 201 in GK Flameproof Enclosure Model 204 in GM Weatherproof Enclosure
Series 200 Pressure Switches is a SWITZER mainstream variety needed to suit the demands of rapidly expanding
product range for switching upto 75 bar and includes models industrial processes. Precise and accurate operation is
for vacuum, compound and millibar ranges and high overload obtained by using time proven seamless hydraulically formed
protection. Precision mechanisms are of stainless steel for bellows or diaphragm. Setpoint is continuously adjustable
arduous atmospheres and high humidity. Enclosures, sensing over the instrument range. A scale is provided for
elements and switching modes can be combined to offer the approximate switch setting.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure
GM Aluminium Pressure die cast weatherproof Max. Working 170°C for SS bellows;
to IP:66. Temperature 110°C for PB bellows &
GA 304 / 316 SS, investment cast weatherproof 316L SS diaphragm. (Note 15)
to IP:66
Ambient Temp. (–) 10°C to (+)60°C (Note 14)
GK Aluminium die cast, weatherproof to IP:66 &
flameproof to Gr.IIA, IIB or IIC (Note 1) Connection
Ranges Several std. ranges,from full vac. to 75 bar. Process 1/4" NPT(F) direct for 201, 203 & 281.
Sensor Phosphor Bronze / 316L SS bellows or 1/4" or 1/2" NPT(F) direct for 204.
316L SS diaphragm.
Other sizes through Adaptor.
Wetted Parts Refer page 2.
Flanged connection for 208 & 209. For
Repeatability ± 0.5% FSR for 201 & 203 details refer ordering matrix.
± 1.0% FSR for 204, 208, 209, 281
(Note 4) Electrical 3/4" ET(F) standard &
Scale Accuracy ± 5% FSR (Note 6) 1/2" NPT(F) optional.
Switching Instrument quality SPCO (SPDT) Microswitch. Dual Entry on request
Element (Notes 10 & 11)
Mounting Back panel / wall / field
Differential Fixed or wideband adjustable. For exact
values ask for Differential Tables. Conformity Generally to BS 6134 : 1991.
ORDERING MATRIX
ENCLOSURE Table–1 : RANGE CODE & AVAILABILITY

Aluminium pressure die cast weatherproof RANGE 204 / 208
RANGE 201 203 281
to IP:66 with Nitrile gasket. –––––––––––––––––– GM CODE / 209
A 1K – 1 to 0 bar 3 3 204 0nly ¯
304 / 316 SS investment cast weatherproof
A 2K – 0.5 to +0.5 bar 3 3 204 0nly ¯
to IP:66 with overall size as style GM – for
COK – 1 to +1.5 bar 3 3 ¯ ¯
aggressive atmospheres. Fit for offshore. –––––– GA
D 4C 5 to 50 mbar 3 ¯ 3 ¯
Aluminium die cast flameproof cum D 5C 7.5 to 75 mbar 3 ¯ ¯ ¯
weatherproof. CIMFR approved to Gr.IIA, D 8D 10 to 100 mbar 3 ¯ 3 ¯
IIB & IIC of IS:2148:2004 for flameproof-
A 3B 5 to 200 mbar 3 ¯ ¯ ¯
ness and IP:66 for weatherproofness. –––––––––– GK
A 3C 5 to 250 mbar 3 ¯ ¯ ¯
MODEL A 3K 0.05 to 0.16 bar 3 3 ¯ ¯
A 4K 0.08 to 0.4 bar 3 3 3 3
This is the basic pressure switch actuated by
A 5K 0.2 to 1 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
a seamless bellows having close fixed non-
C 1K 0.1 to 1.1 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
adjustable switching differential. ––––––––––––––––– 201
C 2K 0.2 to 2 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
Same as 201, but with auxiliary mechanism A 6K 0.4 to 4 bar 3 3 3 3
permitting switching differential adjustment between C 3K 0.6 to 6 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
8–15% min. to 60% max. without disturbing A 7K 1 to 10 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
the set point. –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 203
A 8K 1.6 to 16 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
A variant of series 200, employs twin levers each A 9K 2 to 20 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
operating a SPCO microswitch actuated by a C 4K 8 to 32 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
single sensor through a unique linkage thereby B 1K 10 to 40 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
providing two independent adjustable setpoints, B 2K 10 to 60 bar 3 3 ¯ 3
each with its own setting scale, spring & switch. B 3K 15 to 75 bar 3 3 ¯ ¯
Min. separation between setpoints must be more
B 4K 0.3 to 1.6 bar ¯ ¯ 3 ¯
than sum of on-off differentials; or 10% of FSR
B 7K 0.7 to 7 bar ¯ ¯ 3 ¯
whichever is higher. –––––––––––––––––––––––––– 281
P 8B 1.5 to 15 bar ¯ ¯ 3 ¯
Designed to operate in similar ranges as 201, except D 3B 2.5 to 25 mbar ¯ ¯ 3 ¯
actuation is by a 316L SS diaphragm which X 8K –1000 to 0 mmWc ¯ ¯ 204 only ¯
withstands overpressures upto 100 bar. For X 9K –200 to +200 mmWc ¯ ¯ 204 only ¯
overpressure upto 200 bar consult factory. –––––––– 204
Note : For On-off Differential values
Similar to 204 but with ANSI 1½" #300 RF or 2"
#150 or 300 RF flange. Direct actuation by a 316L ask for respective Differential table
SS diaphragm. More responsive than using a
chemical seal filled system and suitable for
Viscous media. ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 208 Table–2 : SWITCH CODE, RATING & AVAILABILITY (Note 10)
Similar to 208 but having 2" nut and Silicone gasket DC RATING IN AMPS
SWITCH AVAIL ABIL ITY AVAIL ABIL ITY
connection to BS 4825 Part 4 for the food industry, AC
AC
CODE RESISTIVE INDUCTIVE OF SPCO IN OF DPCO IN
free of cavities of crevices for hygiene purposes. ––– 209 RATING
(SPCO) 220V 110V 24V 220V 110V 24V MODEL S MODEL S
MATERIALS OF WETTED PARTS 2 5A 250 / 125V 0.25 0.5 5.0 0.10 0.25 3.0 201 & 281 201
201, 281 201, 204,
Models 201, 203 & 281 D 15A 250 / 125V 0.2 0.4 2.0 0.02 0.03 1.0
204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
Phosphor Bronze Bellows with brass wetted parts. ––––– 01 201, 281 201, 204,
3 15A 250 / 125V N.R. N.R. N.R. N.R. N.R. N.R.
316L SS Bellows with 316 SS wetted parts. –––––––––––– 02 204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
W 15A 250 / 125V 0.3 0.5 6.0 0.05 0.1 4.0 203 203
316L SS Bellows with 316 SS wetted parts to
NACE MR-01-75. ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 0N 201, 281 201, 204,
4 1A 125V N.A. 0.5 0.5 N.A. 0.25 0.25
204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
Monel bellows with Monel Wetted Parts ––––––––––––––– 0M 201, 281 201, 204,
5 5A 250 / 125V 0.2 0.4 4.0 0.2 0.4 3.0
Models 204, 208 & 209 204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
316L SS Diaphragm with 304 SS wetted parts and 201, 281 201, 204,
6 0.1A 125V N.R. N.R. 0.1 N.R. N.R. N.A.
Nitrile ‘O’ Ring. –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 04 204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
201, 281 201, 204,
316L SS Diaphragm with 316 SS wetted parts and 7 N.R. N.R. N.R. 1.0 N.R. N.R. 0.5
204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
Nitrile ‘O’ Ring. –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 02
201, 281 201, 204,
8 5A 250 / 125V N.A. N.A. 5.0 N.A. N.A. 3.0
316L SS Diaphragm with 316 SS wetted parts and 204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
Viton ‘O’ ring to NACE MR-01-75. ––––––––––––––––––– 0N 201, 281 201, 204,
S 5A 250 / 125V 0.25 0.5 3.0 0.1 0.2 2.0
Monel Diaphragm with Monel wetted Parts and 204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
Nitrile ‘O’ ring. ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 0M 201, 281 201, 204,
J 5A 250V N.A. N.A. 5.0 N.A. N.A. 3.0
204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
316LSS Diaphragm with 316 SS wetted parts of 201, 281 201, 204,
welded construction. –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– W2 K 1A 125V N.A. N.A. 1.0 N.A. N.A. 0.5
204, 208 & 209 208 & 209
Model 204 only A N.A. 3.0 10.0 15.0 1.5 6.0 10.0 201 & 203 201
316L SS Diaphragm + 304 SS wetted parts + Teflon ® E 15A 250 / 125V 0.3 0.75 15.0 0.2 0.4 10.0
201, 204,
---
‘O’ Ring and backup Sheathing for special services. –––– T4 208 & 209
201, 204,
316L SS Diaphragm + 316 SS wetted parts + Teflon ® F 15A 250 / 125V 0.3 0.75 15.0 0.2 0.4 10.0 ---
208 & 209
‘O’ Ring and backup Sheathing for special services. –––– T2 Codes 2, 3, D & W – For General purpose usages. Silver alloy contact.
Model 208 only Code 4 – With Gold alloy contact. Code K – Hermetically sealed, inert gas filled with
Code 5 – For General purpose with good DC rating. Gold plated contact.
316L SS Diaphragm + 304 SS wetted parts with Code 6 – With Gold alloy contact (Low Rating) Code A – High DC rated microswitch.
Code 7 – Environmentally sealed switch with Gold Codes E & F – Manual reset switch. Auto change
Teflon® Insert and Sheathing for Chlorine service. –––––– T4 plated contact. over on rising and falling pressure respectively.
Code 8 – Environmentally sealed switch with Silver Resetting is Manual.
RANGE CODE : Refer Table–1 –––––––––––––––––––––––– alloy contact. Code S – IP:67 sealed microswitch with silver –
Code J – Hermetically sealed, inert gas filled with Nickel contact.
SWITCH CODE AND RATING : Refer Table–2 –––––––––––– For DPCO, change switch code to “22”, “33”, etc., while ordering
ELECTRICAL ENTRY : Refer Table–3 ––––––––––––––––––––––– N.A. – Not Available N.R. – Not Recommended
Table 3 : ELECTRICAL ENTRY
Si n g l e En t r y D u al E n t r y
NOTES
Si z e ¹
GM/GA GK
GK GM/GA GK
GK 1. Gr.IIA & IIB of IS:2148 is equivalent to NEC CL.1, Gr.C & D. Gr.IIC of IS:2148 is equivalent to
3/4" ETF A --- M --- NEC CL.1, DIV.1, Gr.A & B.
2. Style GM/GA is weatherproof only if all entries and joint faces are properly sealed. Style GK is
1/2" NPTF B B N N weatherproof only if cover ‘O’ ring is retained in position and flameproof only if proper FLP cable
3/4" NPTF C --- O --- gland is used. It is recommended to procure cable glands along with GK instruments to avoid
neglect of it while installation.
M20 × 1.5 ¹¹
. D D P P
3. Intrinsic Safety (Exi) — Pressure switches are classified as simple apparatus as they neither
M15 × 1.5 E --- Q --- generate nor store energy. Hence pressure switches in weatherproof (GM / GA) enclosures also
T h r o u g h C o n n ec t o r may be used in intrinsically safe systems without certification provided the power source is certified
IS. Because of the low voltages and currents it is recommended to use gold contact and / or
3 pin plug 2 --- --- --- sealed contacts.
4. Accuracy & Repeatability are not different for all blind pressure switches. A shift of ±2% may be
7 pin plug 3 --- --- ---
observed in setpoint when pressure falls from full static pressure. Settings will also shift with
9 pin plug 4 --- --- --- varying temperature.
¹ Cable gland available on request. 5. The instrument is calibrated in the mounting position depicted in the drawing. Mounting in any
other direction will cause a minor range shift, especially in low and compound ranges. Ranges
¹¹ Cable Entry is optional. above 1 bar will not experience this shift.
Available on request. 6. A pressure switch is a switching device and not a measuring instrument — eventhough it has a
scale to assist setting. For this reason, Test Certificates will not contain individual ON-OFF
Table 4 : MAXIMUM WORKING switching values at different scale readings. Maximum differential obtained alone will be declared,
besides other specifications.
PRESSURE RATING (Note 13) 7. Select working range of the instrument such that the set value lies in the mid 35% of the range
MAX. PR. RATING (in B ar ) i.e., between 35% and 70% of range span.
8. For switching differential values please ask for Differential table. Switching differentials furnished
RANGE 201, 203 & 281 204 are nominal values under test conditions at mid-scale and will vary with range settings and
CODE Element Code operating conditions.
01
01 02
02 02 / 04 9. On and off settings should not exceed the upper or lower range value.
10. DPCO action is achieved by two SPCO switches synchronised to practical limits i.e., ±2% of FSR.
A 1K 4 4 100 Deadband for DPCO contacts are higher than that of SPCO as force required to actuate the
A 2K 4 4 100 contacts are more. Please refer respective range table for exact values.
COK 4 4 -- 11. Contact life of microswitches are 5 × 105 switching cycles for nominal load. To quench DC sparks,
use diode in parallel with inductance, ensuring polarity. A ‘R–C’ network is also recommended
D 4C 2 2 100 with ‘R’ value in Ohms equal to coil resistance and ‘C’ value in micro Farads equal to holding
D 5C 2 2 -- current in Amps.
12. In model 201 Pneumatic air switch can be incorporated instead of standard microswitch. In
D 8D 2 2 100 “L” code switch air output turns “ON” on falling pressure and in “M” code switch air output turns
A 3B 2 2 -- “ON” on rising pressure. These switches can be connected to an air source of rating 7 bar
A 3C 2 2 -- maximum. Please consult factory for availability.
13. Higher Maximum Working Pressure is available on request for some ranges; but ON-OFF differentials
A 3K 4 4 -- will be higher.
A 4K 4 4 100 14. Ambient temperature range: All models are suitable for operating within a range of ambient
temperature from (–) 10°C to (+) 60°C provided the process does not freeze within this range.
A 5K 4 4 -- Below 0°C, precautions should be taken in humid atmospheres to prevent frost formation inside
C 1K 4 4 -- the instrument from jamming the mechanism. Occasional excursions beyond this range are
C 2K 4 4 -- possible but accuracy might be impaired. The microswitch is the limiting factor which should
never exceed the limits (–) 50°C to (+) 80°C.
A 6K 8 8 100 15. Fluid Temperature: A pressure switch when connected to the process is not subjected to through
C 3K 9 9 -- flow and therefore is not fully exposed to the fluid temperature. Use of adequate length of impulse
piping will greatly reduce excessive heating of the sensing element. For e.g., connection of
A 7K 15 15 -- 7.5 cm of 12 mm dia impulse piping will reduce water temperature of 100°C to 65°C at an ambient
A 8K 25 25 -- temperature of 50°C. Ask factory for piping nomogram #441184–4 for different temperatures.
A 9K 16. Ensure that impulse pipework applies no stress on sensing element housing and use spanners to
25 25 --
hold pressure port / housing when connections are made.
C 4K 36 36 -- 17. For pressure above 75 bar, Switzer S20/920 series and GB–930 (Bourdon Tube operated version)
B 1K -- 50 -- are available. Complementary instrumentation for differential pressure is available in Series 300.
18. Custom built instruments are available for special service requirements under Special Engineering
B 2K -- 80 -- Category.
B 3K -- 80 -- 19. For models 204 & 208, select proper ‘O’ Ring material compatible with process medium.
B 4K 20. Accuracy figures are exclusive of test equipment tolerance on the claimed values.
-- -- 100
21. All performance data are guaranteed to ±5%.
B 7K -- -- 100
P 8B -- -- 100
OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES
D 3B -- -- 100
X 8K -- -- 100 z Damping coil for minimising process pulsations — increases instrument’s life many times.
X 9K -- -- 100 z Blow out protection for weatherproof and flameproof enclosures.
Notes : z Snubbers, pigtail syphons, over-range protectors.
1) For Model 208 MWP restricted to Flange z Brass / 316 SS double compression cable glands to suit cable OD of 1/2", 15 mm &
rating; for Model 209, MWP is 20 Bar. 17 mm.
2) Model 204 available with MWP of z Degreasing for Oxygen service & special parts for Ammonia service.
200 bar on request. z Provision of line fault monitoring.
DIAPHRAGM CHEMICAL SEALS

Diaphragm chemical seals can be provided as optional extra either and whether reactive to common filling liquids should the diaphragm
direct mounted or remote with capillary and threaded /flanged seal leak into the process.
connection, duly evacuated and filled with suitable filling liquid. This Switching differentials for Instruments with chemical seal — Apply
device permits the use of pressure switches with bellows element with a Multiplication factor of 1.3 for SPCO and 1.5 for DPCO to values
viscous / aggressive fluids and permits higher process temperatures. given in Range Table for GM / GA housings and apply a multiplication
Switching lag will be present, when pressure changes rapidly. factor of 1.2 for SPCO and 1.5 for DPCO to values of Differential
While ordering it is important to specify ambient and process Table for GK housings.
temperatures, setpoint, maximum process pressure, relative elevation Chemical seals are not available in certain models and ranges
between connection and switch head, nature of process medium and also for instruments with PB Bellows.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
BELLOWS VERSION DIAPHRAGM VERSION
MODELS 201, 203 & 281 IN GM ENCLOSURE MODELS 204 IN GM ENCLOSURE
122 94 122 94
12 12
61 7Ø FIXING HOLE 15 61 7Ø FIXING HOLE 15
CABLE ENTRY
31 31 3/4" ET 1/2" NPTF
CABLE ENTRY
3/4" ET 1/2" NPTF 68 68
154 119 154 119

NAME & NAME &
RATING RATING
PLATE PLATE
SENSING ELEMENT SENSING ELEMENT

15.5 8 A (BELLOWS) 15.5 20 B (D IAPHRAGM)
7 1/4" NPT(F) /
8 1/2" NPT(F) ST D. 49
1/4" NPT(F) ST D. OPT . THROUGH
F IXING 75 F IXING 75 CØ
OPT . THROUGH 49
CENTRES CENTRES ADAPTORS
ADAPTORS
DIM ‘B’ VARIES FROM 42 TO 74±2 DEPENDING ON RANGE
DIM ‘A’ VARIES FROM 42 TO 92±2 DEPENDING ON RANGE DIM ‘CØ’ VARIES FROM 66 TO 88 DEPENDING ON RANGE
MODELS 201, 203 & 281 IN GK ENCLOSURE MODELS 204 IN GK ENCLOSURE

OPT . ADDITIONAL OPT . ADDITIONAL
127Ø CABLE ENTRY CABLE ENTRY
3/4" ET / 1/2" NPTF 3/4" ET / 1/2" NPTF
CABLE ENTRY CABLE ENTRY
3/4" ET / 1/2" NPTF 3/4" ET / 1/2" NPTF
4 NOS. 10.5Ø 4 NOS. 10.5Ø
FIXING HOLE FIXING HOLE
FOR ‘U’ BOLT FOR ‘U’ BOLT
180 180
71.5² ‘Z’ 71.5² ‘Z’
VIEW ‘Z’ VIEW ‘Z’

10 E
D SENSING ELEMENT SENSING ELEMENT
(BELLOWS) (D IAPHRAGM)
10
1/4" NPT(F) /
1/4" NPT(F) ST D. 79 1/2" NPT(F) ST D. 79
OPT . THROUGH OPT . THROUGH 149
ADAPTORS
149
ADAPTORS
DIM ‘E’ VARIES FROM 45 TO 74±2 DEPENDING ON RANGE

DIM ‘D’ VARIES FROM 42 TO 92±2 DEPENDING ON RANGE DIM ‘CØ’ VARIES FROM 66 TO 88 DEPENDING ON RANGE
DIAPHRAGM VERSION (FLANGED CONNECTION)

MODELS 208 IN GM / GK ENCLOSURES MODELS 209 IN GM / GK ENCLOSURES
PROCESS CONNECTION STD. – 2" #150 RF PROCESS CONNECTION –

OPTIONAL: 1½" / 2" # 300 / 600 RF/FF 2" NUT & GASKET TYPE SANTRY PIPE FITTING
PROCESS CONNECTION STD. – 2" #150 RF PROCESS CONNECTION –

OPTIONAL: 1½" / 2" # 300 / 600 RF/FF 2" NUT & GASKET TYPE SANTRY PIPE FITTING
NOTES : FIX CERTIFIED WEATHERPROOF CABLE GIAND FOR GM/GA ENCLOSURE All dimensions are in mm
FIX CERTIFIED WEATHERPROOF CUM FLAMEPROOF CABLE GIAND FOR GK ENCLOSURE
UNSPECIFIED GENERAL TOLERANCE : ±1
This is not a contractual document. Prior notification of changes in specifications is impracticable due to continuous improvement
FOR SWITZER'S OFFICES IN INDIA

#1209 PS 200 – Rev.6
CHECK AT:
http://www.switzerinstrument.com/offices.htm
o
h tn Intertek
i t c
Salzer Electronics Limited
Samichettipalayam Sw he Bes
Coimbatore - 641 047, INDIA.
Tel: +91 422 4233600/2692531.

Fax: + 91422 2692170.
t o t Cam Operated
Email: salzer@salzergroup.com, sales@salzergroup.com.
Website: www.salzergroup.com Rotary Switches
Cam Operated Cam Operated
Rotary Switches Rotary Switches
Cam Operated Rotary Switches used to perform Make and Break

operation in a sequential way by rotating the switch to different positions.
Contents
The Cam, which closes and opens the contacts, has rotary movement to
Introduction 02
multiple positions, thereby multiple Circuit functions can be controlled.
Construction 04
Further, the flexibility in the switch type selection covering various current /
voltage ratings and options to select the number of contacts, is added Technical Specifications 05
advantage. This ensures that a right switch is chosen for the desired
application. CAM Switches thus offer complete design flexibility to assemble Isolator Switches 06
complex switching programs, contact ratings and customize all switching
applications. Changeover Switches with OFF 07
Moreover the Cam Switches are suitable for AC as well as DC switching Changeover Switches without OFF 08
applications.
Multistep Switches with OFF 09
The basic operating mechanism of Cam Switch is required to suit intended
application coupled with “Quick-Make”, “Quick-Make-Quick-Break” and Multistep Switches without OFF 10
“Spring Return” operating mechanisms are offered to cover wide range
requirements. Instrumentation Selector Switches 11
The Cam Switches offers versatile mounting options in addition to Standard Motor Control Switches 13
Panel/Flush Mounting and other special features like single hole, door
interlocking, padlock, Lock and Key for various needs. The wide option Gang Switches 15
such as type of Knob, Front plate Color and customized marking on the
Marking Plate gives compatible to the panel design and thus eliminates the Control Switches 16
need of the separate label on the panel.
Mountings 17
The superior quality of engineering materials and “Double Butt” contacts
Knobs and Handles 22
with silver bimetal on copper/brass provide stable electrical performance.
The high-grade engineering plastics with high tracking index like Nylon,
Celcon and glass filled polyamide for the components ensures greater Accessories 23
mechanical strength.
Customised Programme 24
Advanced manufacturing processes for Cam Switch components under Ordering Code 25
stringent quality conditions ensures durability, reliability and enhanced life
and safe operations for a very long time.
Breaker Control Switches 26
Installation Procedure - Standard Switches 28
DC Switches 29
02 03
Cam Operated Rotary Switches used to perform Make and Break

operation in a sequential way by rotating the switch to different positions.
Contents
The Cam, which closes and opens the contacts, has rotary movement to
Introduction 02
multiple positions, thereby multiple Circuit functions can be controlled.
Construction 04
Further, the flexibility in the switch type selection covering various current /
voltage ratings and options to select the number of contacts, is added Technical Specifications 05
advantage. This ensures that a right switch is chosen for the desired
application. CAM Switches thus offer complete design flexibility to assemble Isolator Switches 06
complex switching programs, contact ratings and customize all switching
applications. Changeover Switches with OFF 07
Moreover the Cam Switches are suitable for AC as well as DC switching Changeover Switches without OFF 08
applications.
Multistep Switches with OFF 09
The basic operating mechanism of Cam Switch is required to suit intended
application coupled with “Quick-Make”, “Quick-Make-Quick-Break” and Multistep Switches without OFF 10
“Spring Return” operating mechanisms are offered to cover wide range
requirements. Instrumentation Selector Switches 11
The Cam Switches offers versatile mounting options in addition to Standard Motor Control Switches 13
Panel/Flush Mounting and other special features like single hole, door
interlocking, padlock, Lock and Key for various needs. The wide option Gang Switches 15
such as type of Knob, Front plate Color and customized marking on the
Marking Plate gives compatible to the panel design and thus eliminates the Control Switches 16
need of the separate label on the panel.
Mountings 17
The superior quality of engineering materials and “Double Butt” contacts
Knobs and Handles 22
with silver bimetal on copper/brass provide stable electrical performance.
The high-grade engineering plastics with high tracking index like Nylon,
Celcon and glass filled polyamide for the components ensures greater Accessories 23
mechanical strength.
Customised Programme 24
Advanced manufacturing processes for Cam Switch components under Ordering Code 25
stringent quality conditions ensures durability, reliability and enhanced life
and safe operations for a very long time.
Breaker Control Switches 26
Installation Procedure - Standard Switches 28
DC Switches 29
02 03
Construction Technical Specifications

Intertek
50/60
S200
M10
690
200
225
200
2.5
55
95
45
78
25
10
70
10
50
6
Conformance to standards :
European : IEC-60947-1 : 1988
2XM5
IEC-60947-3 : 1990
50/60
S125
2.5
690
125
150
125
10
50
10
35
45
78
37
64
25
6
IEC-60947-5 : 1992
Canadian : CSA 22.2 No.14-2010
American : UL 508 (2009)
50/60
2XM5
S100
690
100
125
100
2.5
41
71
33
57
25
Switch life under standard operating conditions: Mechanical 100,000 operations @ 300 cycles / hour, Electrical 10,000 operations at 100 % rated duty for 120 cycles/hour
10
35
10
25
6
S200
175
600
15
25
50
50
-
-
Cam Assembly Contact Assembly
2XM5
50/60
S80
690
100
2.5
80
33
57
22
38
25
80
25
16
6
S125
100
600
10
20
40
50
-
-
Series S, TP, RT and SL Cam Switches incorporate two double break silver alloy contacts per stage at 180 degree
disposition. The AC Switches are “Quick Make-Slow Break” with in-built latching device feature in cam design. The Cam
50/60
RT53
18.5
S63
690
2.5
M5
63
80
22
38
32
20
63
16
10
Switches can be offered for DC applications with additional contacts in series according to the DC switching voltage and
S100
100
600
10
20
40
50
-
-
with suitable duration and the DC Switches are "Quick Make - Quick Break".
50/60
RT40
18.5
S40
2.5
2.5
M5
690
10
40
50
32
15
26
20
40
-150C to 550C
2
Contacts : Double break type AgCdO Operating temp :
S80
600
6
80
10
20
40
50
-
-
Insulation : Glass filled polyamide Operating frequency : 50 to 60Hz
with high tracking index Humidity : 95%, Rh 48 hours
Rated Duty: 8 Hours, Installation, Operation and Maintenance Condition: Suitable for Environment A (for Industrial Application).
50/60
RT32
S32
690
S63
2.5
1.5
M4
1.2
32
40
15
26
11
19
10
32
600
7.5
7.5
6
55
15
30
40
3
S Series TP Series RT Series SL Series
Open Version Touch Proof Touch Proof & Touch Proof &
Rear Termination Screwless Termination
50/60
RT25
S40
600
S25
690
7.5
40
10
20
24
25
32
11
19
13
10
25
1.5
2.5
M4
1.2
2
5
5
6
4
1
RT32
S20/TP20/
S32
600
1.5
7.5
30
10
15
3
3
50/60
RT20
M3.5
690
7.5
5.5
1.5
2.5
0.8
20
25
13
10
20
6
4
1
RT25
S25
600
1.5
7.5
20
10
15
3
3
S16/TP16/
50/60
RT16
M3.5
690
7.5
5.5
1.5
2.5
0.8
16
20
13
10
16
RT 20
TP 20
6
4
1
S20
0.33
600
1.5
20
3
3
5
RT16
TP16
0.33
S16
50/60
600
TP10
1.5
Note :- AC4 Rating = AC3 rating / 2, Star Delta Rating = 60% of AC3 Rating
15
S10
440
0.7
1.5
1
0.7
1.5
3
3
5
M3
0.5
10
12
10
--
--
4
3
50/60
0.33
0.75
S10
TP6
460
440
0.7
1.5
0.7
1.5
M3
0.5
2.2
1.5
10
S6
Available from 6 to 400Amp Available from 6 to 20Amp Available from 16 to 63Amp Available from 6 & 10Amp
1
1
2
--
--
l l l l
4
6
8
3
6
-
Open terminals for
l easy Finger Protection (IP20)
l ‘Finger Protected
l convenient Cage clamp (finger protected)
l
accessibility accessibility (IP20)
Metric
Unit
0.25
0.50
0.75
S6
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
460
Nm
KW
KW
KA
Hz
Kv
1
1
V
A
A
-
AC Duty Rating DC Duty Rating
Unit
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
max
max
A
V
min
min
Category Typical AC Application
Rated Operational Current(Ie) AC21/AC1

Category Typical DC Application
Rated impulse withstand Voltage(Uimp)

AC-1 Non-Inductive or slightly DC-1 Non-Inductive or slightly Inductive Loads,
Rated Uninterrupted Current (Ith)
Rated Fuse Short Circuit Current

Inductive Loads, Resistance Furnaces Resistance Furnaces.
Rated Operational Voltage(Ue)

AC-3 Squirrel Cage otors: starting DC-22 Switching of resistive loads,
Terminal Tightening Torque
3 Phase 120V
240V
240V
480V
600V
HP Rating 1 Phase 120V
switching off motors during running including moderate overloads
Rated Operational Power
Fuse Size (Type gG/gM)
Terminal Cross Section
CSA/UL Ratings
Short Circuit Capacity
AC23A "3 Ph , 415 V"
IEC/EN Ratings
AC-15 Control of AC electromagnetic loads DC-13 Control of DC electromagnets
Operational Voltage
AC Rating Code
AC Rating Code
Ampere Rating
Rated frequency
Single / Multiple
AC-21A Switching of resistive loads, DC-23 Switching of motor loads or
"3 Ph , 415 V"

including moderate overloads other highly inductive loads
Fine strand
(frequent switching)
AC-23-A Switching of motor loads or other ------ -----
AC3
highly inductive loads (frequent switching)
04 05
Construction Technical Specifications

Intertek
50/60
S200
M10
690
200
225
200
2.5
55
95
45
78
25
10
70
10
50
6
Conformance to standards :
European : IEC-60947-1 : 1988
2XM5
IEC-60947-3 : 1990
50/60
S125
2.5
690
125
150
125
10
50
10
35
45
78
37
64
25
6
IEC-60947-5 : 1992
Canadian : CSA 22.2 No.14-2010
American : UL 508 (2009)
50/60
2XM5
S100
690
100
125
100
2.5
41
71
33
57
25
Switch life under standard operating conditions: Mechanical 100,000 operations @ 300 cycles / hour, Electrical 10,000 operations at 100 % rated duty for 120 cycles/hour
10
35
10
25
6
S200
175
600
15
25
50
50
-
-
Cam Assembly Contact Assembly
2XM5
50/60
S80
690
100
2.5
80
33
57
22
38
25
80
25
16
6
S125
100
600
10
20
40
50
-
-
Series S, TP, RT and SL Cam Switches incorporate two double break silver alloy contacts per stage at 180 degree
disposition. The AC Switches are “Quick Make-Slow Break” with in-built latching device feature in cam design. The Cam
50/60
RT53
18.5
S63
690
2.5
M5
63
80
22
38
32
20
63
16
10
Switches can be offered for DC applications with additional contacts in series according to the DC switching voltage and
S100
100
600
10
20
40
50
-
-
with suitable duration and the DC Switches are "Quick Make - Quick Break".
50/60
RT40
18.5
S40
2.5
2.5
M5
690
10
40
50
32
15
26
20
40
-150C to 550C
2
Contacts : Double break type AgCdO Operating temp :
S80
600
6
80
10
20
40
50
-
-
Insulation : Glass filled polyamide Operating frequency : 50 to 60Hz
with high tracking index Humidity : 95%, Rh 48 hours
Rated Duty: 8 Hours, Installation, Operation and Maintenance Condition: Suitable for Environment A (for Industrial Application).
50/60
RT32
S32
690
S63
2.5
1.5
M4
1.2
32
40
15
26
11
19
10
32
600
7.5
7.5
6
55
15
30
40
3
S Series TP Series RT Series SL Series
Open Version Touch Proof Touch Proof & Touch Proof &
Rear Termination Screwless Termination
50/60
RT25
S40
600
S25
690
7.5
40
10
20
24
25
32
11
19
13
10
25
1.5
2.5
M4
1.2
2
5
5
6
4
1
RT32
S20/TP20/
S32
600
1.5
7.5
30
10
15
3
3
50/60
RT20
M3.5
690
7.5
5.5
1.5
2.5
0.8
20
25
13
10
20
6
4
1
RT25
S25
600
1.5
7.5
20
10
15
3
3
S16/TP16/
50/60
RT16
M3.5
690
7.5
5.5
1.5
2.5
0.8
16
20
13
10
16
RT 20
TP 20
6
4
1
S20
0.33
600
1.5
20
3
3
5
RT16
TP16
0.33
S16
50/60
600
TP10
1.5
Note :- AC4 Rating = AC3 rating / 2, Star Delta Rating = 60% of AC3 Rating
15
S10
440
0.7
1.5
1
0.7
1.5
3
3
5
M3
0.5
10
12
10
--
--
4
3
50/60
0.33
0.75
S10
TP6
460
440
0.7
1.5
0.7
1.5
M3
0.5
2.2
1.5
10
S6
Available from 6 to 400Amp Available from 6 to 20Amp Available from 16 to 63Amp Available from 6 & 10Amp
1
1
2
--
--
l l l l
4
6
8
3
6
-
Open terminals for
l easy Finger Protection (IP20)
l ‘Finger Protected
l convenient Cage clamp (finger protected)
l
accessibility accessibility (IP20)
Metric
Unit
0.25
0.50
0.75
S6
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
460
Nm
KW
KW
KA
Hz
Kv
1
1
V
A
A
-
AC Duty Rating DC Duty Rating
Unit
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
max
max
A
V
min
min
Category Typical AC Application
Rated Operational Current(Ie) AC21/AC1

Category Typical DC Application
Rated impulse withstand Voltage(Uimp)

AC-1 Non-Inductive or slightly DC-1 Non-Inductive or slightly Inductive Loads,
Rated Uninterrupted Current (Ith)
Rated Fuse Short Circuit Current

Inductive Loads, Resistance Furnaces Resistance Furnaces.
Rated Operational Voltage(Ue)

AC-3 Squirrel Cage otors: starting DC-22 Switching of resistive loads,
Terminal Tightening Torque
3 Phase 120V
240V
240V
480V
600V
HP Rating 1 Phase 120V
switching off motors during running including moderate overloads
Rated Operational Power
Fuse Size (Type gG/gM)
CSA/UL Ratings
Short Circuit Capacity
AC23A "3 Ph , 415 V"
IEC/EN Ratings
AC-15 Control of AC electromagnetic loads DC-13 Control of DC electromagnets
Operational Voltage
AC Rating Code
AC Rating Code
Ampere Rating
Rated frequency
Single / Multiple
AC-21A Switching of resistive loads, DC-23 Switching of motor loads or
"3 Ph , 415 V"

including moderate overloads other highly inductive loads
Fine strand
(frequent switching)
AC-23-A Switching of motor loads or other ------ -----
AC3
highly inductive loads (frequent switching)
04 05
Isolator Switches Changeover Switches with OFF

Isolators are ON-OFF Switches to isolate the power to a particular area of operation. The Isolator Switches are Changeover Switches also called Double Throw Switches are available with OFF and without OFF. These are used
offered in a wide range from 1 Pole to 12 Poles. Isolators with spring return upto 4 Poles are available to energise to operate two different circuits with different number of inputs and outputs. Changeover Switches without Jumpers
circuits. Isolators with pre-close contacts are used for safety circuits and for connecting neutral and earth lines. (potential free contacts) are used to connect two different circuits from two different sources with two different
Isolators are generally rated for AC1/AC21 while for motor applications they need to be rated for AC3/AC23A duty. operating voltages or any other incompatible lines. All contacts by default are “Break Before Make” (BBM) type to
avoid overlapping of different circuits. However, for overlapping changeover contacts. “Make Before Break” (MBB)
Applications: Switching of main/control and instrumentation circuits motor ON-OFF and other special application type are offered against specific requirements.
circuits.
Application: Power Supply to Generator Changeover, Auto/Manual Changeover, Standby/Remote Changeover and
other special application circuits. Mainly used in Distribution Panels, UPS etc.
Connecting Diagram
Changeover with Centre OFF
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Connecting Diagram Without Jumper
A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2 G1 G2 H1 H2 2 4 6 8 10 12
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
1 to 12 pole 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 3 5 7 9 11
1 to 8 Pole 1 to 3 Pole
Stayput Stayput
0 0
OFF ON OFF
1 2
Script Plate ON OFF 1 2
ON ON
Marking
0
OFF
60 Degree No of 90 Degree
Description Description
60 Degree 90 Degree 90 Degree Complete Rotation No of Programme Code Stages Programme Code
Description
Stages 1 Pole 61025 1 1 Pole 61151
Programme Code Programme Code Programme Code
2 Pole 61026 2 2 Pole 61152
1 Pole 61001 61191 61195 1 3 Pole 61027 3 3 Pole 61153
2 Pole 61002 61192 61198 1 4 Pole 61028 4 4 Pole 61154
3 Pole 61003 61199 61197 2 5 Pole 61029 5 - -
4 Pole 61004 61194 61196 2 6 Pole 61030 6 - -
5 Pole 61005 - - 3 7 Pole 61031 7 - -
8 Pole 61032 8 - -
6 Pole 61006 61906 - 3
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400Amps.
7 Pole 61007 - - 4
8 Pole 61008 - - 4 Spring Return
9 Pole 61009 - - 5 0
Spring return to "0"
0
# Spring return from 1 to "0"
1 2 450 900
10 Pole 61010 - - 5 1
2
11 Pole 61011 - - 6
12 Pole 61012 - - 6
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 25, 20, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400Amps. 45 Degree Spring Return to “ 0” No of Spring Return from 1 to “ 0”
Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Code
Isolators with Pre-close Contact Spring Return Isolators 45 Degree 1 Pole 61361 1 1 Pole 61364
2 Pole 61362 2 2 Pole 61365
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7
Spring return to OFF
1 3 5 7 3 Pole 61363 3 3 Pole 61369
0
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps.
90
ON 450
OFF S
T
Stayput without Jumper
OFF
A Spring return to "0"
R 0 0
T 1 2
1 2
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
4 to 5 Pole 61194 1 to 4 Pole
Programme No of Programme No of 60 Degree Stayput without Jumper No of 45 Degree Spring Return without Jumper
Code Stages Code Stages Stages
Description Programme Code Description Programme Code
4 Pole - 1 Pole Preclose 61194 2 1 Pole Spring Return 61351 1 1 Pole 1 Pole
61625 1 61761
4 Pole - 3 Pole Preclose 61904 2 2 Pole Spring Return 61352 1 without Jumper without Jumper
without Jumper 61626 2 without Jumper 61762
3 Pole with Neutral Terminal 61178 2 4 Pole Spring Return 61354 2
3 Pole
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25and 32Amps. without Jumper 61627 3 - -
200 and 400Amps.
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 16, 20, 25, 32Amps.
06 07
Isolator Switches Changeover Switches with OFF

Isolators are ON-OFF Switches to isolate the power to a particular area of operation. The Isolator Switches are Changeover Switches also called Double Throw Switches are available with OFF and without OFF. These are used
offered in a wide range from 1 Pole to 12 Poles. Isolators with spring return upto 4 Poles are available to energise to operate two different circuits with different number of inputs and outputs. Changeover Switches without Jumpers
circuits. Isolators with pre-close contacts are used for safety circuits and for connecting neutral and earth lines. (potential free contacts) are used to connect two different circuits from two different sources with two different
Isolators are generally rated for AC1/AC21 while for motor applications they need to be rated for AC3/AC23A duty. operating voltages or any other incompatible lines. All contacts by default are “Break Before Make” (BBM) type to
avoid overlapping of different circuits. However, for overlapping changeover contacts. “Make Before Break” (MBB)
Applications: Switching of main/control and instrumentation circuits motor ON-OFF and other special application type are offered against specific requirements.
circuits.
Application: Power Supply to Generator Changeover, Auto/Manual Changeover, Standby/Remote Changeover and
other special application circuits. Mainly used in Distribution Panels, UPS etc.
Connecting Diagram
Changeover with Centre OFF
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Connecting Diagram Without Jumper
A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2 G1 G2 H1 H2 2 4 6 8 10 12
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
1 to 12 pole 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 3 5 7 9 11
1 to 8 Pole 1 to 3 Pole
Stayput Stayput
0 0
OFF ON OFF
1 2
Script Plate ON OFF 1 2
ON ON
Marking
0
OFF
60 Degree No of 90 Degree
60 Degree 90 Degree 90 Degree Complete Rotation No of Programme Code Stages Programme Code
Description
Stages 1 Pole 61025 1 1 Pole 61151
Programme Code Programme Code Programme Code
2 Pole 61026 2 2 Pole 61152
1 Pole 61001 61191 61195 1 3 Pole 61027 3 3 Pole 61153
2 Pole 61002 61192 61198 1 4 Pole 61028 4 4 Pole 61154
3 Pole 61003 61199 61197 2 5 Pole 61029 5 - -
4 Pole 61004 61194 61196 2 6 Pole 61030 6 - -
5 Pole 61005 - - 3 7 Pole 61031 7 - -
8 Pole 61032 8 - -
6 Pole 61006 61906 - 3
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400Amps.
7 Pole 61007 - - 4
8 Pole 61008 - - 4 Spring Return
9 Pole 61009 - - 5 0
0
# Spring return from 1 to "0"
1 2 450 900
10 Pole 61010 - - 5 1
2
11 Pole 61011 - - 6
12 Pole 61012 - - 6
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 25, 20, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400Amps. 45 Degree Spring Return to “ 0” No of Spring Return from 1 to “ 0”
Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Code
Isolators with Pre-close Contact Spring Return Isolators 45 Degree 1 Pole 61361 1 1 Pole 61364
2 Pole 61362 2 2 Pole 61365
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7
Spring return to OFF
1 3 5 7 3 Pole 61363 3 3 Pole 61369
0
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps.
90
ON 450
OFF S
T
Stayput without Jumper
OFF
A Spring return to "0"
R 0 0
T 1 2
1 2
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
4 to 5 Pole 61194 1 to 4 Pole
Programme No of Programme No of 60 Degree Stayput without Jumper No of 45 Degree Spring Return without Jumper
Code Stages Code Stages Stages
Description Programme Code Description Programme Code
61625 1 61761
4 Pole - 3 Pole Preclose 61904 2 2 Pole Spring Return 61352 1 without Jumper without Jumper
without Jumper 61626 2 without Jumper 61762
3 Pole with Neutral Terminal 61178 2 4 Pole Spring Return 61354 2
3 Pole
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25and 32Amps. without Jumper 61627 3 - -
200 and 400Amps.
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 16, 20, 25, 32Amps.
06 07
Changeover Switches without OFF Multistep Switches with OFF

Connecting Diagram Without Jumper Multi-Step Switches also called Pole-Way Switches, are available with OFF and without OFF. Multi-Step Switches
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1 L1 M1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
connect different circuits to a common supply or vice-versa. Multi-Step Switches with 1 Pole, 2 Poles and 3 Poles
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2 L2 M2
are popular for 1-Phase, 2-Phase and 3-Phase supply.
Applications: As Tap Changing Switch for Transformer/Stabiliser and other special application circuits.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 to 12 Pole 1 to 4 Pole Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
No Operating Quadrant Stages
61059 1 Pole -2 Way 2 Way 1

Stayput
0
0 60
A1 B1 C1 D1
61079 2 Pole-2 Way 1 2
2 1 A2 2 B2 3 C2 4 D2
1 1 61099 3 Pole-2 Way 3
2 1 2 61130 4 Pole-2 Way 1 to 4 Pole 4
2 2
61060 1 Pole-3 Way 3 Way 0 2

1 OFF 90
A3 1 A1 B3 2 B1 C3 3 C1 D3 4 D1
61080 2 Pole-3 Way 3
3 1
90 Degree Complete Rotation No of 60 Degree No of 60 Degree No of
61100 3 Pole-3 Way 5
Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Code Stages 2 A2 B2 C2 D2
61131 4 Pole-3 Way 1 to 4 Pole 6
1 Pole 61037 1 5 Pole 61041 5 1 Pole 60177 1
61061 1 Pole-4 Way 4 Way 2
2 Pole 61038 2 6 Pole 61042 6 2 Pole 60178 2 0 60
0
A1 B1 C1 D1
1
3 Pole 61039 3 7 Pole 61043 7 3 Pole 60179 3 61081 2 Pole-4 Way 1 2 3 4 4
4 Pole 61040 4 8 Pole 61044 8 4 Pole 60180 4 A4 A2 B4 B2 C4 C2 D4 D2
61101 3 Pole-4 Way 4 2
A3 B3 C3 D3
6
3
- - - 9 Pole 61045 9 - - - 61132 4 Pole-4 Way 1 to 4 Pole 8
- - - 10 Pole 61046 10 - - -
5 Way
- - - 11 Pole 61047 11 - - - 61062 1 Pole-5 Way 0 60
0 A5 A1 B5 B1 C5 C1 3
- - - 12 Pole 61048 12 - - - 5 1
1 2 3
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400 Amps.
61082 2 Pole-5 Way A4 A2 B4 B2 C4 C2 5
4 2
3
61102 3 Pole-5 Way A3 B3 1 to 3 Pole C3 8
Spring Return
6 Way
Spring return to "1" 61063 1 Pole-6 Way 0 45
0 A1 B1 C1 3
1 1
2 A6 1 A2 B6 2 B2 C6 3 C2
61083 2 Pole-6 Way 6 2 6
3 A5 B5 B3 C5
5
4 A3 C3
61103 3 Pole-6 Way A4 B4
1 to 3 Pole C4 9
7 Way
45 Degree Spring Return No of 0
45
0
A7 A1 B7 B1
7
Description Programme Code Stages 61064 1 Pole-7 Way 1
A6 B6 2 B2 4
6 2
1 A2
1 Pole 61371 1 61084 2 Pole-7 Way 5

4
3 A5 A3 B5 B3 7
2 Pole 61372 2 A4 1 to 2 Pole B4
3 Pole 61373 3 8 Way A1

0
0 30
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps. 1 A2
2
61065 1 Pole-8 Way 3 1 A3 4
8 4 A4
A8
Stayput without Jumper 7 6 5
A7 A5
A6
1 1
2
9 Way 0 A1
0 30
1 A2
2 2 2
61066 1 Pole-9 Way 9 3 A9 1 A3
5
8 4
1 A8 A4
7 6 5
A7 A5
A6
90 Degree Stayput without Jumper No of 45 Degree Spring return without Jumper
Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Sode 10 Way A1
0
0 30
1 A10 A2
1 Pole 1 Pole 10 2
61637 1 without Jumper 61771 61067 1 Pole-10 Way A9 1 A3
5
without Jumper 9
4
3
8 A8 A4
7 6 5
2 Pole A7 A5
without Jumper 61638 2 - - A6
3 Pole 11 Way
without Jumper 61639 3 - - 0 30
0 A11 A1
11 1 A10 A2
10 2
4 Pole 61068 1 Pole-11 Way 9 3 A9 1 A3 6
7 6 5 A8 A4
A7 A5
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : A6
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400Amps. 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps.
08 09
Changeover Switches without OFF Multistep Switches with OFF

Connecting Diagram Without Jumper Multi-Step Switches also called Pole-Way Switches, are available with OFF and without OFF. Multi-Step Switches
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1 L1 M1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
connect different circuits to a common supply or vice-versa. Multi-Step Switches with 1 Pole, 2 Poles and 3 Poles
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2 L2 M2
are popular for 1-Phase, 2-Phase and 3-Phase supply.
Applications: As Tap Changing Switch for Transformer/Stabiliser and other special application circuits.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 to 12 Pole 1 to 4 Pole Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
61059 1 Pole -2 Way 2 Way 1

Stayput
0
0 60
A1 B1 C1 D1
61079 2 Pole-2 Way 1 2
2 1 A2 2 B2 3 C2 4 D2
1 1 61099 3 Pole-2 Way 3
2 1 2 61130 4 Pole-2 Way 1 to 4 Pole 4
2 2
61060 1 Pole-3 Way 3 Way 0 2

1 OFF 90
A3 1 A1 B3 2 B1 C3 3 C1 D3 4 D1
61080 2 Pole-3 Way 3
3 1
90 Degree Complete Rotation No of 60 Degree No of 60 Degree No of
61100 3 Pole-3 Way 5
Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Code Stages 2 A2 B2 C2 D2
61131 4 Pole-3 Way 1 to 4 Pole 6
1 Pole 61037 1 5 Pole 61041 5 1 Pole 60177 1
61061 1 Pole-4 Way 4 Way 2
2 Pole 61038 2 6 Pole 61042 6 2 Pole 60178 2 0 60
0
A1 B1 C1 D1
1
3 Pole 61039 3 7 Pole 61043 7 3 Pole 60179 3 61081 2 Pole-4 Way 1 2 3 4 4
4 Pole 61040 4 8 Pole 61044 8 4 Pole 60180 4 A4 A2 B4 B2 C4 C2 D4 D2
61101 3 Pole-4 Way 4 2
A3 B3 C3 D3
6
3
- - - 9 Pole 61045 9 - - - 61132 4 Pole-4 Way 1 to 4 Pole 8
- - - 10 Pole 61046 10 - - -
5 Way
- - - 11 Pole 61047 11 - - - 61062 1 Pole-5 Way 0 60
0 A5 A1 B5 B1 C5 C1 3
- - - 12 Pole 61048 12 - - - 5 1
1 2 3
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400 Amps.
61082 2 Pole-5 Way A4 A2 B4 B2 C4 C2 5
4 2
3
61102 3 Pole-5 Way A3 B3 1 to 3 Pole C3 8
Spring Return
6 Way
Spring return to "1" 61063 1 Pole-6 Way 0 45
0 A1 B1 C1 3
1 1
2 A6 1 A2 B6 2 B2 C6 3 C2
61083 2 Pole-6 Way 6 2 6
3 A5 B5 B3 C5
5
4 A3 C3
61103 3 Pole-6 Way A4 B4
1 to 3 Pole C4 9
7 Way
45 Degree Spring Return No of 0
45
0
A7 A1 B7 B1
7
Description Programme Code Stages 61064 1 Pole-7 Way 1
A6 B6 2 B2 4
6 2
1 A2
1 Pole 61371 1 61084 2 Pole-7 Way 5

4
3 A5 A3 B5 B3 7
2 Pole 61372 2 A4 1 to 2 Pole B4
3 Pole 61373 3 8 Way A1

0
0 30
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps. 1 A2
2
61065 1 Pole-8 Way 3 1 A3 4
8 4 A4
A8
Stayput without Jumper 7 6 5
A7 A5
A6
1 1
2
9 Way 0 A1
0 30
1 A2
2 2 2
61066 1 Pole-9 Way 9 3 A9 1 A3
5
8 4
1 A8 A4
7 6 5
A7 A5
A6
90 Degree Stayput without Jumper No of 45 Degree Spring return without Jumper
Description Programme Code Stages Description Programme Sode 10 Way A1
0
0 30
1 A10 A2
1 Pole 1 Pole 10 2
61637 1 without Jumper 61771 61067 1 Pole-10 Way A9 1 A3
5
without Jumper 9
4
3
8 A8 A4
7 6 5
2 Pole A7 A5
without Jumper 61638 2 - - A6
3 Pole 11 Way
0 A11 A1
11 1 A10 A2
10 2
4 Pole 61068 1 Pole-11 Way 9 3 A9 1 A3 6
7 6 5 A8 A4
A7 A5
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : A6
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125, 200 and 400Amps. 16, 20, 25, and 32Amps.
08 09
Multistep Switches without OFF Instrumentation Selector Switches

Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of The Instrumentation Selector Switches help to:
No Operating Quadrant Stages l Measure currents in different circuits with a current transformer a single analog ammeter and a switch
l Measure voltages between phases and phase and neutral with one voltmeter and a switch
61049 1 Pole - 3 Way 3 Way 2
l Measure voltages and currents of a circuit with one voltmeter one ammeter and a single switch
61069 2 Pole - 3 Way 0 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 3
1 60
61089 3 Pole - 3 Way A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 Voltmeter Selector Switches
61120 4 Pole - 3 Way 3 6
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3
61124 5 Pole - 3 Way 8 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
1 to 6 Pole
61126 6 Pole - 3 Way 9 No Operating Quadrant Stages
61050 1 Pole - 4 Way 4 Way 0 A1 B1 C1 D1 2
1 90
OFF 900
61070 2 Pole - 4 Way 4 R
4 2 A4 1 A2 B4 2 B2 C4 3 C2 D4 4 D2 V V
61312 3 - Phase Line Y V
61090 3 Pole - 4 Way 6 BR RY
B 2
3 to Line
61121 4 Pole - 4 Way A3 B3 1 to 4 Pole C3 D3 8 YB
R Y B
A1 B1 C1 D1
61051 1 Pole - 5 Way 5 Way 1 90
0 3
A2 B2 C2 D2 45
0
61071 2 Pole - 5 Way 2

1 2 3 4 5 61313 3 - Phase Line to RY
OFF
RN
61091 3 Pole - 5 Way 5
4
3 A5 A3 B5 B3 C5 C3 D5 D3 8 Line & Line to YB YN 3
BN R
61122 4 Pole - 5 Way A4 B4 1 to 4 Pole C4 D4 10 Neutral BR
Y
V1 V2
A1 B1 C1 B V
61052 1 Pole - 6 Way 6 Way 600 3 N
1
6 2 A6 A2 B6 B2 C6 C2
61072 2 Pole - 6 Way 1 2 3 6 61314 3 - Phase Line to RY 600
5 3 A5 A3 B5 B3 C5 C3 Line, Line to BN YB R Y B N
61092 3 Pole - 6 Way 4
9 3
A4 B4 1 to 3 Pole C4 Neutral & YN BR
RN
Without OFF
A1 B1 C1
61053 1 Pole - 7 Way 7 Way 1 45
0
A2 B2 C2 4
2 R
61073 2 Pole - 7 Way 7 3 A7 1 A3 B7 2 B3 C7 3 C3 7 OFF 450
Y
RY RN V V
6
5
4
A6 A4 B4 C4
61317 3 - Phase Line to B V
61093 3 Pole - 7 Way B6 C6
11 YB 3
A5 B5 1 to 3 Pole C5 Line & L1 to N N
BR
8 Way A1 B1 C1 R Y B N
61054 1 Pole - 8 Way 8
1 45
0
A8 A2 B8 B2 C8 C2 4
2 R L1
61074 2 Pole - 8 Way 7 3 A7 1 A3 B7 2 B3 C7 3 C3 8 45
0
Source 1 Y L2 Source 2
OFF
6 4 RY L1L2 B L3
5 A6 A4 B6 B4 C6 C4 61318 3 - Phase Line to
61094 3 Pole - 8 Way A5 B5 1 to 3 Pole C5 12 YB L2L3 4
Line 2 Sources BR L3L1 R Y B L1 L2 L3
9 Way A1 A2 V1 V2
1 2 300 V
3 A3
61055 1 Pole - 9 Way 4 1 A4 5 0
R
5 OFF 90
9
A5 Y
8 7 6 A9
A8 A7 A6 61311 3 - Phase Line to B V V
BN RN
N
V 2
Neutral
10 Way 300 A1 A2 YN
1 2 R Y B N
3 A3
61056 1 Pole - 10 Way 10 4
5
A10 1 A4 5
9
A5 RY 60
0
R
8 7 6 A9 61319 3 - Phase Line to YB Y
A8 A7 A6 V V
Line B V 2
11 Way 30
0 A1 A2 Without OFF BR
1 2 R Y B
11 3 A11 A3
61057 1 Pole - 11 Way 10 4 A10 1 A4 6
9 5
A5 Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps.
8 7 6 A9
A8 A7 A6
Voltmeter and Ammeter Selector Switches
12 Way 300 A12 A1 A2
12 1 2 A11 A3 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
11 3
61058 1 Pole - 12 Way 10 4 A10 1 A4 6 No Operating Quadrant Stages
9 5 A5
8 7 6 A9
L1
A8 A7 A6 900 A
OFF L2 A
61336 3 Voltages A
Line - Line & 3 1 L3 5
Multistep Switches without Jumper 3 Currents A V V
2 L2 B Y R V
3 Way 600 2 L1 L3
1
61649 1 Pole - 3 Way 2 L1
without OFF 1 3 4 5 3 1 90
0
L2 A A
without Jumper
3 61337 4 Voltages L3
A
6 & 4 2
N 6
V V
3 Currents 3
V
1 Pole - 4 Way A
4 Way 6 L1L2L3 N B Y R
2 10 2
61650 without OFF 1 900
L1
without Jumper 1 3 4 5 8 7 9 11 12 13 16 15 OFF 900 A A
4 2 61338 3 Voltages L2 A
61670 2 Pole - 4 Way 14
4 Line to Neutral & 3 1
L3
5
3
1 to 2 Pole V N
without OFF 3 Currents V
2 A
without Jumper L1 L2 L3 B Y R
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125 and 200 Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps.
10 11
Multistep Switches without OFF Instrumentation Selector Switches

Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of The Instrumentation Selector Switches help to:
No Operating Quadrant Stages l Measure currents in different circuits with a current transformer a single analog ammeter and a switch
l Measure voltages between phases and phase and neutral with one voltmeter and a switch
61049 1 Pole - 3 Way 3 Way 2
l Measure voltages and currents of a circuit with one voltmeter one ammeter and a single switch
61069 2 Pole - 3 Way 0 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 3
1 60
61089 3 Pole - 3 Way A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 Voltmeter Selector Switches
61120 4 Pole - 3 Way 3 6
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3
61124 5 Pole - 3 Way 8 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
1 to 6 Pole
61126 6 Pole - 3 Way 9 No Operating Quadrant Stages
61050 1 Pole - 4 Way 4 Way 0 A1 B1 C1 D1 2
1 90
OFF 900
61070 2 Pole - 4 Way 4 R
4 2 A4 1 A2 B4 2 B2 C4 3 C2 D4 4 D2 V V
61312 3 - Phase Line Y V
61090 3 Pole - 4 Way 6 BR RY
B 2
3 to Line
61121 4 Pole - 4 Way A3 B3 1 to 4 Pole C3 D3 8 YB
R Y B
A1 B1 C1 D1
61051 1 Pole - 5 Way 5 Way 1 90
0 3
A2 B2 C2 D2 45
0
61071 2 Pole - 5 Way 2

1 2 3 4 5 61313 3 - Phase Line to RY
OFF
RN
61091 3 Pole - 5 Way 5
4
3 A5 A3 B5 B3 C5 C3 D5 D3 8 Line & Line to YB YN 3
BN R
61122 4 Pole - 5 Way A4 B4 1 to 4 Pole C4 D4 10 Neutral BR
Y
V1 V2
A1 B1 C1 B V
61052 1 Pole - 6 Way 6 Way 600 3 N
1
6 2 A6 A2 B6 B2 C6 C2
61072 2 Pole - 6 Way 1 2 3 6 61314 3 - Phase Line to RY 600
5 3 A5 A3 B5 B3 C5 C3 Line, Line to BN YB R Y B N
61092 3 Pole - 6 Way 4
9 3
A4 B4 1 to 3 Pole C4 Neutral & YN BR
RN
Without OFF
A1 B1 C1
61053 1 Pole - 7 Way 7 Way 1 45
0
A2 B2 C2 4
2 R
61073 2 Pole - 7 Way 7 3 A7 1 A3 B7 2 B3 C7 3 C3 7 OFF 450
Y
RY RN V V
6
5
4
A6 A4 B4 C4
61317 3 - Phase Line to B V
61093 3 Pole - 7 Way B6 C6
11 YB 3
A5 B5 1 to 3 Pole C5 Line & L1 to N N
BR
8 Way A1 B1 C1 R Y B N
61054 1 Pole - 8 Way 8
1 45
0
A8 A2 B8 B2 C8 C2 4
2 R L1
61074 2 Pole - 8 Way 7 3 A7 1 A3 B7 2 B3 C7 3 C3 8 45
0
Source 1 Y L2 Source 2
OFF
6 4 RY L1L2 B L3
5 A6 A4 B6 B4 C6 C4 61318 3 - Phase Line to
61094 3 Pole - 8 Way A5 B5 1 to 3 Pole C5 12 YB L2L3 4
Line 2 Sources BR L3L1 R Y B L1 L2 L3
9 Way A1 A2 V1 V2
1 2 300 V
3 A3
61055 1 Pole - 9 Way 4 1 A4 5 0
R
5 OFF 90
9
A5 Y
8 7 6 A9
A8 A7 A6 61311 3 - Phase Line to B V V
BN RN
N
V 2
Neutral
10 Way 300 A1 A2 YN
1 2 R Y B N
3 A3
61056 1 Pole - 10 Way 10 4
5
A10 1 A4 5
9
A5 RY 60
0
R
8 7 6 A9 61319 3 - Phase Line to YB Y
A8 A7 A6 V V
Line B V 2
11 Way 30
0 A1 A2 Without OFF BR
1 2 R Y B
11 3 A11 A3
61057 1 Pole - 11 Way 10 4 A10 1 A4 6
9 5
A5 Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps.
8 7 6 A9
A8 A7 A6
Voltmeter and Ammeter Selector Switches
12 Way 300 A12 A1 A2
12 1 2 A11 A3 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
11 3
61058 1 Pole - 12 Way 10 4 A10 1 A4 6 No Operating Quadrant Stages
9 5 A5
8 7 6 A9
L1
A8 A7 A6 900 A
OFF L2 A
61336 3 Voltages A
Line - Line & 3 1 L3 5
Multistep Switches without Jumper 3 Currents A V V
2 L2 B Y R V
3 Way 600 2 L1 L3
1
61649 1 Pole - 3 Way 2 L1
without OFF 1 3 4 5 3 1 90
0
L2 A A
without Jumper
3 61337 4 Voltages L3
A
6 & 4 2
N 6
V V
3 Currents 3
V
1 Pole - 4 Way A
4 Way 6 L1L2L3 N B Y R
2 10 2
61650 without OFF 1 900
L1
without Jumper 1 3 4 5 8 7 9 11 12 13 16 15 OFF 900 A A
4 2 61338 3 Voltages L2 A
61670 2 Pole - 4 Way 14
4 Line to Neutral & 3 1
L3
5
3
1 to 2 Pole V N
without OFF 3 Currents V
2 A
without Jumper L1 L2 L3 B Y R
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125 and 200 Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps.
10 11
Ammeter Selector Switches Motor Control Switches

Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
No Operating Quadrant Stages Motor Control Switches directly operate the motor with AC3 or AC4 duty rating.
900
R They are typically used for “Forward-Reverse”, “Star-Delta” and “Two Speed Forward-Reverse”. Motor Control Switches are also
OFF
61325 1 Pole - Y designed to operate with a contactor having built-in tripping feature in the event of power failure and overload.
A A
3 Transformer B R
B
A 3
with OFF
Y A
R Y B
900
R Motor Reversing Switches
ON
61321 1 Pole - A A
A 1 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
1 Transformer OFF
A
R
60
0 L1
90
0 R 61210 2 Pole 0
L1
2
OFF
1 2
UV L2 UVW
1 Pole - Y
61331 A A L2 L3
2 Transformer
3 1 A 2 M 2~ M 3~
2
61211 3 Pole L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 3
A
Y R
0
R 45
0
L1
61384 1 Pole - 2 90 61253 3 Pole 1
0
2 L2
Y U VW
3 Transformer 1 3
A
A
A
3 Spring Return L3 3
B M 3~
without OFF L1 L2 L3
A
B Y R
L1 Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32Amps and above.
1 900
61326 1 Pole - L2
L3 A A
4 Transformer 4 2 A 4
with OFF
L4 Motor Switches/Star Delta Switches
3 A L4 L1
L3 L2
900
R
61327 2 Pole - 0 No Operating Quadrant Stages
Y A1 A2
with OFF R1 R2 Y 600
Y1 Y2 61200 OFF -
0
Star - Delta
90
0 L1 4
OFF
61328 3 Pole - L2
3 Transformer B R 5 L3
with OFF R
Y
L1 L2 L3
Y A1 A2
A U1 U2
B M
90
0
450 V1 3~ V2
Y
3 Pole - 0 Y W1 W2
R1 R2 Y1 Y2 B1 B2 61201 Spring Return
61329 3 Transformer R B 5 from Star 4
without OFF
to OFF
R
900
61330 4 Pole - 1 Y
4 Transformer B A1 A2 L1
4 2 A 6
without OFF N L2
3 0
R1 R2 Y1 Y2 B1 B2 N1 N2
61203 Standard Y
0
Y
60
L3
Direct ammeter L1 5
71000 OFF 900
L2
L1 L2 L3
Selector without U1
L3 A1 A2 U2
Current B R A 5 V1 M
3~ V2
Transformer R1 Y1 B1 W1 W2
Y R2 Y2 B2
(16 to 63Amps)
L1 L2 L3
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps.
Power Factor Meter and Wattmeter Switches 61239 Y 600 4 1

Star Delta with C 3 2
L1 3 Sequence 0
73078 One Current 90
0
C
OFF L2
Transformer L3
1 Locking &
ON 7 5 2 LMD Contractor e 3
One Voltage 2 PF
A1 B1 C1 e
Transformer
8 6 M3 ~
Y-
0
6 7 C
OFF 90 L1
73079 Two Current L2 PF A2 B2C2 5 6 7
Transformer ON ON L3 2
1 2 1
L1 L2 L3
OFF
2
61240 For use with Y 900
0 14 Contractors
90 W1 V1 U1
73071 Two Wattmeter OFF L1 0 4
L2
Method 1 2
L3 2 9 5 4
M
U2
3~ V2
13 17 15 1 6 3 8 W2
18
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32. 40 and 63Amps.
12 13
Ammeter Selector Switches Motor Control Switches

No Operating Quadrant Stages Motor Control Switches directly operate the motor with AC3 or AC4 duty rating.
900
R They are typically used for “Forward-Reverse”, “Star-Delta” and “Two Speed Forward-Reverse”. Motor Control Switches are also
OFF
61325 1 Pole - Y designed to operate with a contactor having built-in tripping feature in the event of power failure and overload.
A A
3 Transformer B R
B
A 3
with OFF
Y A
R Y B
900
R Motor Reversing Switches
ON
61321 1 Pole - A A
A 1 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
1 Transformer OFF
A
R
60
0 L1
90
0 R 61210 2 Pole 0
L1
2
OFF
1 2
UV L2 UVW
1 Pole - Y
61331 A A L2 L3
2 Transformer
3 1 A 2 M 2~ M 3~
2
61211 3 Pole L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 3
A
Y R
0
R 45
0
L1
61384 1 Pole - 2 90 61253 3 Pole 1
0
2 L2
Y U VW
3 Transformer 1 3
A
A
A
3 Spring Return L3 3
B M 3~
without OFF L1 L2 L3
A
B Y R
L1 Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32Amps and above.
1 900
61326 1 Pole - L2
L3 A A
with OFF
L4 Motor Switches/Star Delta Switches
3 A L4 L1
L3 L2
900
R
61327 2 Pole - 0 No Operating Quadrant Stages
Y A1 A2
with OFF R1 R2 Y 600
Y1 Y2 61200 OFF -
0
Star - Delta
90
0 L1 4
OFF
61328 3 Pole - L2
3 Transformer B R 5 L3
with OFF R
Y
L1 L2 L3
Y A1 A2
A U1 U2
B M
90
0
450 V1 3~ V2
Y
3 Pole - 0 Y W1 W2
R1 R2 Y1 Y2 B1 B2 61201 Spring Return
61329 3 Transformer R B 5 from Star 4
without OFF
to OFF
R
900
61330 4 Pole - 1 Y
4 Transformer B A1 A2 L1
4 2 A 6
without OFF N L2
3 0
R1 R2 Y1 Y2 B1 B2 N1 N2
61203 Standard Y
0
Y
60
L3
Direct ammeter L1 5
71000 OFF 900
L2
L1 L2 L3
Selector without U1
L3 A1 A2 U2
Current B R A 5 V1 M
3~ V2
Transformer R1 Y1 B1 W1 W2
Y R2 Y2 B2
(16 to 63Amps)
L1 L2 L3
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps.
Power Factor Meter and Wattmeter Switches 61239 Y 600 4 1

Star Delta with C 3 2
L1 3 Sequence 0
73078 One Current 90
0
C
OFF L2
Transformer L3
1 Locking &
ON 7 5 2 LMD Contractor e 3
One Voltage 2 PF
A1 B1 C1 e
Transformer
8 6 M3 ~
Y-
0
6 7 C
OFF 90 L1
73079 Two Current L2 PF A2 B2C2 5 6 7
Transformer ON ON L3 2
1 2 1
L1 L2 L3
OFF
2
61240 For use with Y 900
0 14 Contractors
90 W1 V1 U1
73071 Two Wattmeter OFF L1 0 4
L2
Method 1 2
L3 2 9 5 4
M
U2
3~ V2
13 17 15 1 6 3 8 W2
18
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32. 40 and 63Amps.
12 13
Motor Switches/Multi Speed Switches Gang Switches

Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of The Gang Switches increase capacity of circuits by ganging in serial or parallel operations for different circuit
No Operating Quadrant Stages capacity. Serialing enhances power of battery supply and paralleling the power of resistor.
1 600 L1 U1 U2
M
61212 2 Speed in one 0 2 L2 V1 3~ V2
W2
Applications: In railway coaches for controlling the Alternator and Battery supply. Also in telecom panels and
L3 W1 4
Direction Single special application circuits.
Winding L1 L2 L3
600 L1 U1 U2 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
0 M
L2 V1 3~ V2 No Operating Quadrant Stages
61213 2 Speed with 1 2
W1 W2
L3 4
Centre OFF L1 A1 A2
Single Winding L1 L2 L3
61109 2 Gang with OFF N A B
1
L1 L2 L3 17 1 Pole
1 600 18
61215 2 Speed Single U1 U2 1 Pole
0 2
M 2 GANG L1
Winding for use V1 3~ V2 5
W1 W2 A1 A2
(with Contractor) L1 L2 L3 0 60
0
1 L1
20 61117 2 Gang with OFF
N A B 2
L1 U1 U2 2 Pole 2
0 600 M
61217 2 Speed Single 1 1
L2 V1 3~ V2 L1 N B1 B2 2 Pole
W1 W2
Winding L3 6
2 2 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Forwarding/ L1
L1 L2 L3 L2
Reversing 61111 2 Gang with OFF
L3 3
600 L1 3 Pole
1 A B
61219 2 Speed 0 2
L2 U1 U2
L1 L2 L3
3 Pole
M
2 Separate L3 V1 3~ V2 3
W1 W2 A1 A2 A3
Windings L1
L1 L2 L3
61110 3 Gang with OFF N A B C
2
600 L1 1U1 2U1 1 Pole
OFF M
61226 3 Speed L2 1V1 3~ 2V1 1 Pole
1
1W1 2W1 3 GANG L1
2 Windings L3 6
(O-A-B-A) 2 L1 A1 A2 A3
3 1U21V21W2 OFF 900 L2
L1 L2 L3
61118 3 Gang with OFF L3
3 1
A B C 3
90
0 L1 1U1 2U1 2 Pole
OFF M
61243 3 Speed L2 1V1 3~ 2V1 2 L1 L2 L3 B1 B2 B3
3 Pole
1W1 2W1
2 Windings 3 1 L3 6
(O-A-B-B) L1 A1 A2
2 1U21V21W2
L1 L2 L3 61112 3 Gang with OFF N A B
5
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 63Amps. 3 Pole
1 Pole
L1
A1 A2
Motor Switches - Start and Run Switches 61113 2 Gang, Series L1
with OFF N A B 1
Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of 1 Pole 2 GANG 2 Pole
L1 N B1 B2
OFF 900
L1 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Spring return from Start to "0"
L1 61115 2 Gang, Series
1 L2
3 1
61208 Split - Phase START
N U1 with OFF L3 2
M K1 2
Start 0 U2 2 Pole 2 A B 3 Pole
L1 L2 L3
L1 N
Spring return from Start L1 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
L1 61114 2 Gang, Series L2
0
61209 Split - Phase N U1 Z1 with OFF L3 3
1 2 M 3
Start Reversing U2 Z2 3 Pole A B 3 Pole
START START L1 L2 L3
L1 N
2 Gang Series Parallel
0 1 L1
60 OFF 900 L1 A1 B1 A2
61270 Split - Phase
0
2 L1 2 L2
61116 2 Gang, Series -
1 2 1 L2 N
Start Reversing M 3 Parallel with OFF 3 1 A B 2
3 L1 3 L2
Switching 2 Pole L1 N 3 Pole
2
1 L1 1 L2
Feasible ampere rating: 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps and for Sprint Return Switches and for Stay put 16Amps and above. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 63Amps.
14 15
Motor Switches/Multi Speed Switches Gang Switches

Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of The Gang Switches increase capacity of circuits by ganging in serial or parallel operations for different circuit
No Operating Quadrant Stages capacity. Serialing enhances power of battery supply and paralleling the power of resistor.
1 600 L1 U1 U2
M
61212 2 Speed in one 0 2 L2 V1 3~ V2
W2
Applications: In railway coaches for controlling the Alternator and Battery supply. Also in telecom panels and
L3 W1 4
Direction Single special application circuits.
Winding L1 L2 L3
600 L1 U1 U2 Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of
0 M
L2 V1 3~ V2 No Operating Quadrant Stages
61213 2 Speed with 1 2
W1 W2
L3 4
Centre OFF L1 A1 A2
Single Winding L1 L2 L3
61109 2 Gang with OFF N A B
1
L1 L2 L3 17 1 Pole
1 600 18
61215 2 Speed Single U1 U2 1 Pole
0 2
M 2 GANG L1
Winding for use V1 3~ V2 5
W1 W2 A1 A2
(with Contractor) L1 L2 L3 0 60
0
1 L1
20 61117 2 Gang with OFF
N A B 2
L1 U1 U2 2 Pole 2
0 600 M
61217 2 Speed Single 1 1
L2 V1 3~ V2 L1 N B1 B2 2 Pole
W1 W2
Winding L3 6
2 2 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Forwarding/ L1
L1 L2 L3 L2
Reversing 61111 2 Gang with OFF
L3 3
600 L1 3 Pole
1 A B
61219 2 Speed 0 2
L2 U1 U2
L1 L2 L3
3 Pole
M
2 Separate L3 V1 3~ V2 3
W1 W2 A1 A2 A3
Windings L1
L1 L2 L3
61110 3 Gang with OFF N A B C
2
600 L1 1U1 2U1 1 Pole
OFF M
61226 3 Speed L2 1V1 3~ 2V1 1 Pole
1
1W1 2W1 3 GANG L1
2 Windings L3 6
(O-A-B-A) 2 L1 A1 A2 A3
3 1U21V21W2 OFF 900 L2
L1 L2 L3
61118 3 Gang with OFF L3
3 1
A B C 3
90
0 L1 1U1 2U1 2 Pole
OFF M
61243 3 Speed L2 1V1 3~ 2V1 2 L1 L2 L3 B1 B2 B3
3 Pole
1W1 2W1
2 Windings 3 1 L3 6
(O-A-B-B) L1 A1 A2
2 1U21V21W2
L1 L2 L3 61112 3 Gang with OFF N A B
5
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 63Amps. 3 Pole
1 Pole
L1
A1 A2
Motor Switches - Start and Run Switches 61113 2 Gang, Series L1
with OFF N A B 1
Prog Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. of 1 Pole 2 GANG 2 Pole
L1 N B1 B2
OFF 900
L1 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Spring return from Start to "0"
L1 61115 2 Gang, Series
1 L2
3 1
61208 Split - Phase START
N U1 with OFF L3 2
M K1 2
Start 0 U2 2 Pole 2 A B 3 Pole
L1 L2 L3
L1 N
Spring return from Start L1 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
L1 61114 2 Gang, Series L2
0
61209 Split - Phase N U1 Z1 with OFF L3 3
1 2 M 3
Start Reversing U2 Z2 3 Pole A B 3 Pole
START START L1 L2 L3
L1 N
2 Gang Series Parallel
0 1 L1
60 OFF 900 L1 A1 B1 A2
61270 Split - Phase
0
2 L1 2 L2
61116 2 Gang, Series -
1 2 1 L2 N
Start Reversing M 3 Parallel with OFF 3 1 A B 2
3 L1 3 L2
Switching 2 Pole L1 N 3 Pole
2
1 L1 1 L2
Feasible ampere rating: 16, 20, 25 and 32Amps and for Sprint Return Switches and for Stay put 16Amps and above. Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series : 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 63Amps.
14 15
Control Switches Mountings Feasibility

Control Switches are used to energise contactors for controlling motor operations. Most of the Switches are “Spring Feasibility
Mounting Description
Return” type for latching of the circuit with NO contact and facilitate tripping by the tripping device. Code 6/10A 16/20A 25/32A 40/63A 80/100/ 200/
125A 400A
Applications: Control Switches offer unique alternative to multiple “Push Button Stations”, when one Switch B03 Front Mounting, Standard Mounting plate 33333
controls instead of many Push Buttons. Control Switch with many positions are offered for a suitable combination. B13 Front Mounting with next size plate 3
33333
B00 Front Mounting 48X48 plate for 25/32A and 64x64 plate for 40/63A 33
Prog No. Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. Of B19 Single Hole Mounting 32x32 plate for 6/10A only 48x48 Plate for 16-32Amps 3
33
Operating Quadrant Stages B14 Single Hole Mounting 48x48 plate for 6/10A 3
L1
B33 Front Mounting with Round padlock for 2 Position (for Isolators) 33333
1 Pole STOP -
61300 START with Spring return
N
A2 1
B30 Front Mounting with Rectangular Padlock 2 Position (for Isolators) 33333
0
Spring Return STOP
START A1 B63 Key Lockable type (Handle/Knob) 333
4
STOP START
L1
2 B90 Centre Key Lock (Pistol grip Handle in black colour only) 33
2 Pole STOP - N B02 Rear/(Back/Base) Mounting 3
33333
61388 START with 0,1
START
1 3 2 B21 Din Rail Mounting on 35mm Rail 6-32Amps 3
33
Spring Return 2 4 B32 Rear/Base Mounting, Door Interlock + Rectangular Padlock (B30+B42) 33333
1 Pole STOP - Spring return from START to "1"
B34 Rear/Base Mounting, Door Interlock + Round Padlock (B33+B42) 33333
61301
START with 1 L1 B41 Rear Mounting with Clutch Mechanism on Door 33333
Spring Return START N (Door Open in all position without Interlock)
0,1 3 1
from Start to Run
0
START
1
B42 Rear Mounting with Interlock Mechanism on Door 33333
2 4
F47 Door Clutch, Mounting Plate at front 33333
61701 Without Jumper
B17 ABS Enclosure Max stages upto 4 upto 3 upto 5 upto 5
STOP - START Spring return from START B31 ABS Enclosure with Round Padlock (B33+B17) Max stages upto 3 upto 2 upto 2
L1
SWITCH with
61307
Spring Return to
0 N
0 3
M17 Metal Enclosure Max stages upto 4 upto 4 upto 3 3
1 2
Run for a2 Units 1 2 START 1 5
2 A17 Aluminium Enclosure Max stages upto 4 upto 3 upto 2
START 6
START START 4 2 B40 Single Hole Mounting with Padlock 48 x 48 Plate For 16-32A 33
61707 Without Jumper B43 Single Hole Mounting with Centre Key 48 x 48 Plate for 16-32A 33
Contactor Control
L1
N1
L2
B45 Single Hole Mounting with Round Ring with Knob 16A-32A 33
Spring return to "0" N2
61366 with Spring 15
1 2 7 3 2
Return to OFF
1
0
2
START 2 6 8 4
Mountings
+
Front Mountings
61271
Motor Voltage
P
N
_
4
6
L S
M
SERIES
SPLIT
B03
Control Switch 2 FIELD S 3 to 5 ØB3 Drilling plan
1 5
L S 2 Panel gap
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 63Amps. ØB2
SQF
D
L A SQ B1
Length L = No of Stages of Prog x S + W
6/10 Amps by default B13 mounting 48x48mm only
IP55 protection from front Quote B13 for next bigger size front plate
Features: Type A B1 B2 B3 D F S W Max
Standard
n 4 Hole front panel
mounting S6/S10/TP6/TP10/SL6/SL10 28 36 12 4.5 38 48 9.5 18.5 12
Knob/Handle operatable
n (48x48mm)-B13
Suitable for all switching angles and
n S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 28 36 12 4.5 58 48 12 26 21
Spring Return Switches
Front assembly in 4 different colors,
n S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 12 5.5 64 64 15 27 18
Yellow/Red, Grey/Black, S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 68 15 5.5 95 88 21 33 12
Black/Black and aluminum finish
S80/S100/S125 44 68 15 5.5 118 88 26 40 10
S200 44 68 15 5.5 99 88 32 40 10
S400 44 68 15 5.5 99 88 64 40 4
16 17
Control Switches Mountings Feasibility

Control Switches are used to energise contactors for controlling motor operations. Most of the Switches are “Spring Feasibility
Mounting Description
Return” type for latching of the circuit with NO contact and facilitate tripping by the tripping device. Code 6/10A 16/20A 25/32A 40/63A 80/100/ 200/
125A 400A
Applications: Control Switches offer unique alternative to multiple “Push Button Stations”, when one Switch B03 Front Mounting, Standard Mounting plate 33333
controls instead of many Push Buttons. Control Switch with many positions are offered for a suitable combination. B13 Front Mounting with next size plate 3
33333
B00 Front Mounting 48X48 plate for 25/32A and 64x64 plate for 40/63A 33
Prog No. Description Script Plate Marking/ Connecting Diagram/Terminal Marking No. Of B19 Single Hole Mounting 32x32 plate for 6/10A only 48x48 Plate for 16-32Amps 3
33
Operating Quadrant Stages B14 Single Hole Mounting 48x48 plate for 6/10A 3
L1
B33 Front Mounting with Round padlock for 2 Position (for Isolators) 33333
1 Pole STOP -
61300 START with Spring return
N
A2 1
B30 Front Mounting with Rectangular Padlock 2 Position (for Isolators) 33333
0
Spring Return STOP
START A1 B63 Key Lockable type (Handle/Knob) 333
4
STOP START
L1
2 B90 Centre Key Lock (Pistol grip Handle in black colour only) 33
2 Pole STOP - N B02 Rear/(Back/Base) Mounting 3
33333
61388 START with 0,1
START
1 3 2 B21 Din Rail Mounting on 35mm Rail 6-32Amps 3
33
Spring Return 2 4 B32 Rear/Base Mounting, Door Interlock + Rectangular Padlock (B30+B42) 33333
1 Pole STOP - Spring return from START to "1"
B34 Rear/Base Mounting, Door Interlock + Round Padlock (B33+B42) 33333
61301
START with 1 L1 B41 Rear Mounting with Clutch Mechanism on Door 33333
Spring Return START N (Door Open in all position without Interlock)
0,1 3 1
from Start to Run
0
START
1
B42 Rear Mounting with Interlock Mechanism on Door 33333
2 4
F47 Door Clutch, Mounting Plate at front 33333
61701 Without Jumper
B17 ABS Enclosure Max stages upto 4 upto 3 upto 5 upto 5
STOP - START Spring return from START B31 ABS Enclosure with Round Padlock (B33+B17) Max stages upto 3 upto 2 upto 2
L1
SWITCH with
61307
Spring Return to
0 N
0 3
M17 Metal Enclosure Max stages upto 4 upto 4 upto 3 3
1 2
Run for a2 Units 1 2 START 1 5
2 A17 Aluminium Enclosure Max stages upto 4 upto 3 upto 2
START 6
START START 4 2 B40 Single Hole Mounting with Padlock 48 x 48 Plate For 16-32A 33
61707 Without Jumper B43 Single Hole Mounting with Centre Key 48 x 48 Plate for 16-32A 33
Contactor Control
L1
N1
L2
B45 Single Hole Mounting with Round Ring with Knob 16A-32A 33
Spring return to "0" N2
61366 with Spring 15
1 2 7 3 2
Return to OFF
1
0
2
START 2 6 8 4
Mountings
+
Front Mountings
61271
Motor Voltage
P
N
_
4
6
L S
M
SERIES
SPLIT
B03
Control Switch 2 FIELD S 3 to 5 ØB3 Drilling plan
1 5
L S 2 Panel gap
Feasible ampere rating for S, TP and RT Series: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 63Amps. ØB2
SQF
D
L A SQ B1
Length L = No of Stages of Prog x S + W
6/10 Amps by default B13 mounting 48x48mm only
IP55 protection from front Quote B13 for next bigger size front plate
Features: Type A B1 B2 B3 D F S W Max
Standard
n 4 Hole front panel
mounting S6/S10/TP6/TP10/SL6/SL10 28 36 12 4.5 38 48 9.5 18.5 12
Knob/Handle operatable
n (48x48mm)-B13
Suitable for all switching angles and
n S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 28 36 12 4.5 58 48 12 26 21
Spring Return Switches
Front assembly in 4 different colors,
n S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 12 5.5 64 64 15 27 18
Yellow/Red, Grey/Black, S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 68 15 5.5 95 88 21 33 12
Black/Black and aluminum finish
S80/S100/S125 44 68 15 5.5 118 88 26 40 10
S200 44 68 15 5.5 99 88 32 40 10
S400 44 68 15 5.5 99 88 64 40 4
16 17
Single Hole Mounting (22.5mm cutout) Key Lockabale

B19/B14
Locking lever
B63 Drilling plan
S 3 Max. 3 Ø5.5
3 to 5 A 48
Panel gap S Panel
gap
B2
13
D
F
48
B5
L H A 23
Length L = No of Stages x S + W Drilling plan
IP65 protection from front L

Quote B14 for next bigger size front plate (available for 6/10Amps. only)
Features: IP40 protection from front B4
n Single hole mounting with std dia Type Code A D F S H W Max Length L = No of Stages x S + W
Features:
22.5 mm S6/S10/TP6/TP10 B19 25 38 32 9.5 13.5 28.5 10 Knob/Handle
n operatable Switch
n Eliminates the need for screws/hardware With key lockable assembly prevents Type A B2 B4 B5 D F S W Max
B14 27 38 48 9.5 13.5 28.5 10
for Quick-Fit Single Hole panel fixing switching by unauthorised personnel
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 B19 32 58 48 12 13 36 8 S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 35 13 23 43.5 58 64 12 45 21
n Easy termination Key lock/Key removable only in OFF
n
n Available upto 32Amp S25/S32/RT25/RT32 B19 32 64 48 15 13 37 6 position by default, key lockable and S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 13 23 43.5 64 64 15 45 15
removable in any other position to be S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 13 23 43.5 95 64 21 47 10
specified
Pad Lockable Mountings Lock assembly can also be provided on
B33 Drilling plan
n
any side
S 3 to 5
Panel gap
ØB3
ØB2 Common key for all Switches
n
ON
Features :
B17 Enclosure
D
LR/HR Model B
Ø5
.5
.5
.5
Ø5
Ø5
SQ B1
L A F
Length L = No of Stages x S + W
G
J
L
H
F-48mm with B1-36mm also available on request for 16,25,32Amps
IP55 protection from front
Type A B1 B2 B3 D F S W Max
Features:
Four
n hole round padlockable mounting S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 44 36 12 4.5 58 65 12 26 6 E D A
DrillingI plan
n Secure with max. 3 padlocks in OFF S25/S32/RT25/RT32 44 36 12 4.5 64 65 15 27 6
position prevents switching ON by
unauthorised personnel S40/S63/RT40/RT63 48 68 15 5.5 95 95 21 33 6 SM, M B
n Suitable for switches only with 900 switching S80/S100/S125 48 68 15 5.5 118 95 26 40 6 Ø4.5
angle IP55
S200 48 68 15 5.5 99 95 32 40 6
S400 48 68 15 5.5 99 95 64 40 3 Features:
Switch mounted in ABS Enclosure
SQ F
n
L
Provides protection from dust and
B30 S
3 to 5
Panel
H
F1 Drilling plan
n
hazardous material with regular
gap Ø5.5 B2 Front Plate and Knob
0
n Suitable for all switching angles
E D A
n Knob/Handle operatable Drilling plan
1 n IP65 can be given on request
D
F2
Quote B31 (B17 Enclosure and B33 Round

Padlock) only for Isolater ON/OFF Switches Type Box Type A L B D E G Stages
B1
L S6/S10/TP6/TP10 SM 28 125 100 72 80 115 4
A S16/TP16/RT16 SM 28 125 100 72 80 115 3
S16/TP16/RT16 M 28 175 125 90 105 155 4
F3
IP55 protection from front Length L = No of Stages x S + W

S25/S32/RT25/RT32 SM 35 125 100 72 80 115 2
Features: Type A B1 B2 D F1 F2 F3 H S W Max
Four
n hole rectangular padlockable S25/S32/RT25/RT32 M 35 175 125 90 105 155 4
mounting S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 35 48 12 58 76 104 12 23 12 26 6 S40/S63/RT40/RT63 M 44 175 125 90 105 155 2
n Secure with max four padlocks in OFF S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 12 64 76 104 12 23 15 27 6
position S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 68 15 95 99 128 15 25 21 33 6
n Prevents switching only Type Code A L B D E G H I J Stages
S80/S100/S125 44 68 15 118 99 128 15 25 26 40 6
n Unauthorised personnel S25/S32/RT25/RT32 LR 38 130 115 161 87 102 100 - - 5
n Suitable for switches with 90switching S200 44 68 15 99 99 128 15 25 32 40 6
S40/S63/RT40/RT63 HR 46 180 155 220 120 100 - 122 147 5
angle S400 44 68 15 99 99 128 15 25 64 40 3
Available
n in Yellow/Red only
18 19
Single Hole Mounting (22.5mm cutout) Key Lockabale

B19/B14
Locking lever
B63 Drilling plan
S 3 Max. 3 Ø5.5
3 to 5 A 48
Panel gap S Panel
gap
B2
13
D
F
48
B5
L H A 23
Length L = No of Stages x S + W Drilling plan
IP65 protection from front L

Quote B14 for next bigger size front plate (available for 6/10Amps. only)
Features: IP40 protection from front B4
n Single hole mounting with std dia Type Code A D F S H W Max Length L = No of Stages x S + W
Features:
22.5 mm S6/S10/TP6/TP10 B19 25 38 32 9.5 13.5 28.5 10 Knob/Handle
n operatable Switch
n Eliminates the need for screws/hardware With key lockable assembly prevents Type A B2 B4 B5 D F S W Max
B14 27 38 48 9.5 13.5 28.5 10
for Quick-Fit Single Hole panel fixing switching by unauthorised personnel
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 B19 32 58 48 12 13 36 8 S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 35 13 23 43.5 58 64 12 45 21
n Easy termination Key lock/Key removable only in OFF
n
n Available upto 32Amp S25/S32/RT25/RT32 B19 32 64 48 15 13 37 6 position by default, key lockable and S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 13 23 43.5 64 64 15 45 15
removable in any other position to be S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 13 23 43.5 95 64 21 47 10
specified
Pad Lockable Mountings Lock assembly can also be provided on
B33 Drilling plan
n
any side
S 3 to 5
Panel gap
ØB3
ØB2 Common key for all Switches
n
ON
Features :
B17 Enclosure
D
LR/HR Model B
Ø5
.5
.5
.5
Ø5
Ø5
SQ B1
L A F
Length L = No of Stages x S + W
G
J
L
H
F-48mm with B1-36mm also available on request for 16,25,32Amps
IP55 protection from front
Type A B1 B2 B3 D F S W Max
Features:
Four
n hole round padlockable mounting S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 44 36 12 4.5 58 65 12 26 6 E D A
DrillingI plan
n Secure with max. 3 padlocks in OFF S25/S32/RT25/RT32 44 36 12 4.5 64 65 15 27 6
position prevents switching ON by
unauthorised personnel S40/S63/RT40/RT63 48 68 15 5.5 95 95 21 33 6 SM, M B
n Suitable for switches only with 900 switching S80/S100/S125 48 68 15 5.5 118 95 26 40 6 Ø4.5
angle IP55
S200 48 68 15 5.5 99 95 32 40 6
S400 48 68 15 5.5 99 95 64 40 3 Features:
Switch mounted in ABS Enclosure
SQ F
n
L
Provides protection from dust and
B30 S
3 to 5
Panel
H
F1 Drilling plan
n
hazardous material with regular
gap Ø5.5 B2 Front Plate and Knob
0
n Suitable for all switching angles
E D A
n Knob/Handle operatable Drilling plan
1 n IP65 can be given on request
D
F2
Quote B31 (B17 Enclosure and B33 Round

Padlock) only for Isolater ON/OFF Switches Type Box Type A L B D E G Stages
B1
L S6/S10/TP6/TP10 SM 28 125 100 72 80 115 4
A S16/TP16/RT16 SM 28 125 100 72 80 115 3
S16/TP16/RT16 M 28 175 125 90 105 155 4
F3

S25/S32/RT25/RT32 SM 35 125 100 72 80 115 2
Features: Type A B1 B2 D F1 F2 F3 H S W Max
Four
n hole rectangular padlockable S25/S32/RT25/RT32 M 35 175 125 90 105 155 4
mounting S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 35 48 12 58 76 104 12 23 12 26 6 S40/S63/RT40/RT63 M 44 175 125 90 105 155 2
n Secure with max four padlocks in OFF S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 12 64 76 104 12 23 15 27 6
position S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 68 15 95 99 128 15 25 21 33 6
n Prevents switching only Type Code A L B D E G H I J Stages
S80/S100/S125 44 68 15 118 99 128 15 25 26 40 6
n Unauthorised personnel S25/S32/RT25/RT32 LR 38 130 115 161 87 102 100 - - 5
n Suitable for switches with 90switching S200 44 68 15 99 99 128 15 25 32 40 6
S40/S63/RT40/RT63 HR 46 180 155 220 120 100 - 122 147 5
angle S400 44 68 15 99 99 128 15 25 64 40 3
Available
n in Yellow/Red only
18 19
M17 Metal Enclosure B42 Door Interlock

D1
Drilling Plan
Front Back
3 to 5mm panel gap
A2 A3 B2
2Holes
L
0
1 2
ØD
A2
ØA3
D2
SQ F1
Rubber grommet
SQ D
SQ F
A1
R 120
D3
S
G
L1 C SQ-A1
A SQ-B1
Isolators by default with knob only
Features:
Type A1 A2 A3 D1 D2 D3 Max L = L1 + C
n Switches mounted in sheet metal Features:
Enclosures provides protection from S6/S10/TP6/TP10 70 60 6 85 89 98 4 Mounted
n on rear side of the panel and Quote B41 for door openable in both positions without door interlock
hazardous environment S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 70 60 6 85 89 98 4 operated from the front door
n Knob/Handle operatable Door interlockable mechanism and panel
n Type A A1 A2 A3 B1 F B G C N S W Max
n Suitable for Switches upto 32Amp S25/S32/RT25/RT32 70 60 6 85 89 98 4
door openable only in OFF position S16/TP16/RT16 35 48 4.5 15 48 64 64 3.5 25 22 12 54 8
16A Forward/OFF/Reverse Only 70 60 5 75 75 110 -- Provides safety feature
n TP20/RT20
Knob/Handle oparatable
n S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 4.5 15 48 64 64 3.5 25 22 15 57 8
S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 68 5.5 18 83 88 104 5 27 26 21 66 6
B02 Rear Mounting Back Front S80/S100/S125 44 68 5.5 18 100 88 124 5 27 26 26 72 6
Drilling plan plate Drilling plan plate S200 44 68 5.5 18 83 88 104 5 27 26 32 72 6
S 3 to 5 B3 B2 A2
Panel gap
S400 44 68 5.5 18 83 88 104 8 27 26 64 72 3
B03 Standard Mounting-Spring Return

B
(Square Latching Mechanism) 3 to 5mm Panel gap
S Ø4.5
B1 A1 Drilling plan
G
L
Features:
Ø12
n Four hole base mounted on rear side Length L = No of Stages x S + W
of the panel
ØD
n Knob/Handle operatable Type A A1 B1 B2 B3 F B G S W Max
n Can also be used for panel/door S6/S10/TP6/TP10 28 36 36 9 4.5 48 48 4.5 9.5 26 12
mounting
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 28 36 48 12 4.5 48 64 3.5 12 30 12
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 48 12 4.5 64 64 3.5 15 31 8 SQ 48
L
S40/S63/RT40/RT63 43 68 68 15 5.5 88 88 5 21 41 6 69
S80/S100/S125 43 68 100 15 5.5 88 124 5 26 48 6
S200 43 68 83 15 5.5 88 104 5 32 48 6
SQ. 64 SQ. 64
S400 43 68 83 15 5.5 88 104 8 64 48 3
0 B90 for 25A/32A 0

IP55 protection from front B13 for 16A
1 2
B21 DIN Rail Mounting Features: B03 for 25A/32A
1 2
(with center key)
(without key)
Ø4 Drilling plan Standard
n 4 hole front panel mounting
10
S
3 to 5 ØB2 Ø4.5 pistol grip handle operatable
Panel gap Suitable for 450/600 only
n
Advanced special star/spring design on
n
latching provides guaranted spring
Available in
return operation black plate/black
56
PG handle
L A B1 For B03 without key & for B90 with center kKey
Features: Length L = No of Stages x S + W Type L (No. of Stages)

n Snap mounting base on DIN EN50022
(Omega) Rail 35mm and 1.2mm thick or Type A B1 B2 D F S W Max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
two hole rear mounting S6/S10/TP6/TP10 28 36 9 38 48 9.5 28.5 10 S16 / TP16 / RT16 (B13) 52.5 64.5 76.5 88.5 100.5 112.5 124.5
n Provides easy termination S25 / S32 / RT25 / RT32 55.5 70.5 85.5 100.5 115.5 130.5 145.5
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 28 36 12 58 48 12 37 12
n Can also be used for panel/door
mounting S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 12 64 64 15 38 8
20 21
M17 Metal Enclosure B42 Door Interlock

D1
Drilling Plan
Front Back
3 to 5mm panel gap
A2 A3 B2
2Holes
L
0
1 2
ØD
A2
ØA3
D2
SQ F1
Rubber grommet
SQ D
SQ F
A1
R 120
D3
S
G
L1 C SQ-A1
A SQ-B1
Isolators by default with knob only
Features:
Type A1 A2 A3 D1 D2 D3 Max L = L1 + C
n Switches mounted in sheet metal Features:
Enclosures provides protection from S6/S10/TP6/TP10 70 60 6 85 89 98 4 Mounted
n on rear side of the panel and Quote B41 for door openable in both positions without door interlock
hazardous environment S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 70 60 6 85 89 98 4 operated from the front door
n Knob/Handle operatable Door interlockable mechanism and panel
n Type A A1 A2 A3 B1 F B G C N S W Max
n Suitable for Switches upto 32Amp S25/S32/RT25/RT32 70 60 6 85 89 98 4
door openable only in OFF position S16/TP16/RT16 35 48 4.5 15 48 64 64 3.5 25 22 12 54 8
16A Forward/OFF/Reverse Only 70 60 5 75 75 110 -- Provides safety feature
n TP20/RT20
Knob/Handle oparatable
n S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 4.5 15 48 64 64 3.5 25 22 15 57 8
S40/S63/RT40/RT63 44 68 5.5 18 83 88 104 5 27 26 21 66 6
B02 Rear Mounting Back Front S80/S100/S125 44 68 5.5 18 100 88 124 5 27 26 26 72 6
Drilling plan plate Drilling plan plate S200 44 68 5.5 18 83 88 104 5 27 26 32 72 6
S 3 to 5 B3 B2 A2
Panel gap
S400 44 68 5.5 18 83 88 104 8 27 26 64 72 3
B03 Standard Mounting-Spring Return

B
(Square Latching Mechanism) 3 to 5mm Panel gap
S Ø4.5
B1 A1 Drilling plan
G
L
Features:
Ø12
n Four hole base mounted on rear side Length L = No of Stages x S + W
of the panel
ØD
n Knob/Handle operatable Type A A1 B1 B2 B3 F B G S W Max
n Can also be used for panel/door S6/S10/TP6/TP10 28 36 36 9 4.5 48 48 4.5 9.5 26 12
mounting
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 28 36 48 12 4.5 48 64 3.5 12 30 12
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 48 12 4.5 64 64 3.5 15 31 8 SQ 48
L
S40/S63/RT40/RT63 43 68 68 15 5.5 88 88 5 21 41 6 69
S80/S100/S125 43 68 100 15 5.5 88 124 5 26 48 6
S200 43 68 83 15 5.5 88 104 5 32 48 6
SQ. 64 SQ. 64
S400 43 68 83 15 5.5 88 104 8 64 48 3
0 B90 for 25A/32A 0

IP55 protection from front B13 for 16A
1 2
B21 DIN Rail Mounting Features: B03 for 25A/32A
1 2
(with center key)
(without key)
Ø4 Drilling plan Standard
n 4 hole front panel mounting
10
S
3 to 5 ØB2 Ø4.5 pistol grip handle operatable
Panel gap Suitable for 450/600 only
n
Advanced special star/spring design on
n
latching provides guaranted spring
Available in
return operation black plate/black
56
PG handle
L A B1 For B03 without key & for B90 with center kKey
Features: Length L = No of Stages x S + W Type L (No. of Stages)

n Snap mounting base on DIN EN50022
(Omega) Rail 35mm and 1.2mm thick or Type A B1 B2 D F S W Max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
two hole rear mounting S6/S10/TP6/TP10 28 36 9 38 48 9.5 28.5 10 S16 / TP16 / RT16 (B13) 52.5 64.5 76.5 88.5 100.5 112.5 124.5
n Provides easy termination S25 / S32 / RT25 / RT32 55.5 70.5 85.5 100.5 115.5 130.5 145.5
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 28 36 12 58 48 12 37 12
n Can also be used for panel/door
mounting S25/S32/RT25/RT32 35 48 12 64 64 15 38 8
20 21
Knobs and Handles Knobs / Handle Colours RED BLACK Accessories Standard Style Frame Size Bigger Style
Front Plate Current Ratings Current Ratings

TD - TEAR DROP
SQ20
FL - FLAG KNOB ---
6/10Amps
A A
B SQ32
B
C
SQ36
16/20Amps 6/10Amps
D D
SQ48
CODE - TD A B C D CODE - FL A B C D
S6/S10/TP6/TP10 27 41 25 21 S6/S10/TP6/TP10 17 23 13.75 19
SQ48
25/32Amps 16/20Amps
S16/TP16/RT16 27 41 25 21 S16/TP16/RT16 27 38 24 23
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 36 51 31 25 S25/S32/RT25/RT32 27 38 24 23 SQ64
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 50 70 42 33 S25/S32/RT25/RT32 50 68 42.5 32
SQ68
PG - Pistol Grip Handle BG - Ball Grip Handle LV - Lever Handle S40Amps & above 25/32Amps
A A
A
SQ88
B
C
Sq81
B
--- S40Amps & above
C
C
D
D
SQ104
D
Special Front Plates

CODE - PG A B C D CODE - BG A B C D CODE - LV A B C D 48 x 60 ---
48
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 36 102 82 56 S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 36 100 67 45 S80/S100/S125 50 115 90 45
10Amps
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 36 102 82 56 S25/S32/RT25/RT32 36 100 67 45 S200/S400 50 115 90 45 16Amps
SQ 36
60
20Amps
S40/S63 36 102 82 56 S40/S63 36 100 67 45
Accessories Extended Terminals

64 x 80
64
7.5 S25/S32/SG25 2
S16 1.5 8.5 S63 R8 25/32Amps 16/20Amps
Ø 8.5
80
SQ48
Ø 3.8
8
M4
3.2
13.8
27
13.5
Protection Covers (Shrouds)

7.5
9.5
S-Series
12.5 8.5 15 16
H
Supplied as optional for S40 and S63 on request
Type øD 2 Stage 3 Stage
H
Extended Terminals - Always mounted on Switch Push On Terminals S6/S10 43±0.2 25 34.5
S80/S100/S125 S16/S25/S32 69±0.2 35 50
S200 2-64020-00-001-401-14 S6/S10/S16/TP16
15
2 Ø
8. 5
3 53 D S40/S63 95±0.2 54 75
Ø 10.5 Rectangular L
6.3
6.3
8
Type L D H No. of Stages

43
44
210 200 73 2
32
4
30.5
S63
210 200 94 3
H
D
45 0
45 0
175 110 115 2

0.8
0.8
1.5 22 22 61 S80 to S200

210 200 100 2
Always mounted on Switch Mating terminal socket Code No : 1653
22 23
Knobs and Handles Knobs / Handle Colours RED BLACK Accessories Standard Style Frame Size Bigger Style
Front Plate Current Ratings Current Ratings

TD - TEAR DROP
SQ20
FL - FLAG KNOB ---
6/10Amps
A A
B SQ32
B
C
SQ36
16/20Amps 6/10Amps
D D
SQ48
CODE - TD A B C D CODE - FL A B C D
S6/S10/TP6/TP10 27 41 25 21 S6/S10/TP6/TP10 17 23 13.75 19
SQ48
25/32Amps 16/20Amps
S16/TP16/RT16 27 41 25 21 S16/TP16/RT16 27 38 24 23
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 36 51 31 25 S25/S32/RT25/RT32 27 38 24 23 SQ64
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 50 70 42 33 S25/S32/RT25/RT32 50 68 42.5 32
SQ68
PG - Pistol Grip Handle BG - Ball Grip Handle LV - Lever Handle S40Amps & above 25/32Amps
A A
A
SQ88
B
C
Sq81
B
--- S40Amps & above
C
C
D
D
SQ104
D
Special Front Plates

CODE - PG A B C D CODE - BG A B C D CODE - LV A B C D 48 x 60 ---
48
S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 36 102 82 56 S16/TP16/RT16/TP20/RT20 36 100 67 45 S80/S100/S125 50 115 90 45
10Amps
S25/S32/RT25/RT32 36 102 82 56 S25/S32/RT25/RT32 36 100 67 45 S200/S400 50 115 90 45 16Amps
SQ 36
60
20Amps
S40/S63 36 102 82 56 S40/S63 36 100 67 45
Accessories Extended Terminals

64 x 80
64
7.5 S25/S32/SG25 2
S16 1.5 8.5 S63 R8 25/32Amps 16/20Amps
Ø 8.5
80
SQ48
Ø 3.8
8
M4
3.2
13.8
27
13.5
Protection Covers (Shrouds)

7.5
9.5
S-Series
12.5 8.5 15 16
H
Supplied as optional for S40 and S63 on request
Type øD 2 Stage 3 Stage
H
Extended Terminals - Always mounted on Switch Push On Terminals S6/S10 43±0.2 25 34.5
S80/S100/S125 S16/S25/S32 69±0.2 35 50
S200 2-64020-00-001-401-14 S6/S10/S16/TP16
15
2 Ø
8. 5
3 53 D S40/S63 95±0.2 54 75
Ø 10.5 Rectangular L
Other special size mounting plates at Front or Rear can be supplied against requirement.
6.3
6.3
8
Type L D H No. of Stages

43
44
210 200 73 2
32
4
30.5
S63
210 200 94 3
H
D
45 0
45 0
175 110 115 2

0.8
0.8
1.5 22 22 61 S80 to S200

210 200 100 2
Always mounted on Switch Mating terminal socket Code No : 1653 In case of fixing at site use supplied hardware only.
22 23
Customised Programme Front plate
P
Programme Number 73037
Customised Programme Formation
The Switch design and construction gives flexibility for making customised programmes
Front plate Programme Number OFF 1
1
3
3
5
5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 within a very short period. Basically an engineer trying to specify the customised
programme should concentrate on the following points.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 (a) Number of operating positions of Switch Handle
2 4 6
Switching angle 60
0 (b) Total number of contacts required
Switch positions (c) Contact closing sequence of all the contacts required in various positions of handle.
OFF 1
2 Please note :
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 3
TUBE
4
5
1) Each position should be identified and script plate marking required in those
6
7
positions should be mentioned.
2) The standard latching angle (angle between positions)/switching angles are 600,
8
TUBE & FAN 9
10
11 900, 450 and 30. Spring Return are also possible for 450 and 900 switching angle.
12
FAN 13
14 (d) Total number of contacts can be decided based on the actual need. You may arrange
15
16 the contacts to your convenience and number them as ½,3/4, 5/6...etc. While making
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 FAN & LAMP 17
the Switch, we may rearrange the contacts to use solid Jumpers so as to avoid loose
18
19
20 wire Jumpers.
NIGHT LAMP 21
22
23
(e) Fill up the Programme sheet by marking ‘X’ at places where contacts have to Close
24
(NC).
Switching angle X
Locked positions X Contact Closed
Contact Closed without
interruption
Spring return
1 2 Mounting 3 With Without

Also specify the ampere rating, mounting style, switching angle, script plate
Switch Type S 16 B03 Stop
4
Front plate
Type Colour 7
Form X
markings, terminal marking and lockable position (If any).
Optional extras
Switching positions 5
50 Yellow
For example refer the sample customised programme sheet of a Bedroom Switch
Marking
6
Handle
Type
Tear drop
Colour
Red
Customer Date having 3 contacts controlling a tube, fan and night lamp.
1 CUSTOMER CODE No. Note: The above construction carries a five digit number starting with (7xxxx) allotted by
2 us. This number alone is sufficient for future correspondence and further ordering.
3 Ordering Code
4
Programme Code Type Ampere Mounting Knob Color
5
6
7
8 Example : 6 1 1 9 7 S 2 0 0 B 0 3 T D Y R
9 Programme Selection Type Selection
10 Programmes Prog Type Code Possible Amps Ampere Code Ampere Code
11 Code S-Series S 6 to 400Amps 6 A 100 K
12 Isolators Pg 06 Touch Proof T 6 to 20Amps 10 B 125 L
Changeovers with OFF Pg 07 Rear Access Termination R 16 to 63Amps 16 C 200 N
13
Changeovers without OFF Pg 08 DC Switches D 16 to 500Amps 20 D 250 O
14
Multistep with OFF Pg 09 Phase Selector only for P 25 to 63Amps 25 E 300 P
15 1 Pole 3 Way with OFF
Multistep without OFF Pg 10 32 F 400 Q
16 Ammeter (CT Operated) P 6 and 10Amps
Instrumentation Switches Pg 11 40 G 500 R
Voltmeter (Phase to Phase (available only with
17 Motor Control Switches Pg 13 63 I
with OFF) four hole mounting)
18 Gang Switches Pg 15 80 J
L - Series L 6 to 10 Amps
19 Control Switches Pg 16 (Spring clamp screwless)
20
Color Combination Selection
21
CODE - YR CODE - GB CODE - BB CODE - AB
22
23
24
Locked position Contact closed Contact closed without Spring return

X X
interruption
1 2 3 With Without
Mounting
Switch Type Form Position Yellow Front Plate Grey Front Plate Black Front Plate Alluminium (silver) Foil Front Plate
Red Handle Black Handle Black Handle with Black Handle
4 Size Colour 7
Front plate Optional extras Knobs and Handles Selection
CODE- TD CODE- FH CODE - BG CODE- PG CODE- LV
5
Marking
6 Type Colour Customer Date
Handle
Customer Code No.
Tear Drop Handle Flag Handle Ball Grip Handle Pistal Grip Lever Handle
Handle
24 25
Customised Programme Front plate
P
Programme Number 73037
Customised Programme Formation
The Switch design and construction gives flexibility for making customised programmes
Front plate Programme Number OFF 1
1
3
3
5
5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 within a very short period. Basically an engineer trying to specify the customised
programme should concentrate on the following points.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 (a) Number of operating positions of Switch Handle
2 4 6
Switching angle 60
0 (b) Total number of contacts required
Switch positions (c) Contact closing sequence of all the contacts required in various positions of handle.
OFF 1
2 Please note :
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 3
TUBE
4
5
1) Each position should be identified and script plate marking required in those
6
7
positions should be mentioned.
2) The standard latching angle (angle between positions)/switching angles are 600,
8
TUBE & FAN 9
10
11 900, 450 and 30. Spring Return are also possible for 450 and 900 switching angle.
12
FAN 13
14 (d) Total number of contacts can be decided based on the actual need. You may arrange
15
16 the contacts to your convenience and number them as ½,3/4, 5/6...etc. While making
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 FAN & LAMP 17
the Switch, we may rearrange the contacts to use solid Jumpers so as to avoid loose
18
19
20 wire Jumpers.
NIGHT LAMP 21
22
23
(e) Fill up the Programme sheet by marking ‘X’ at places where contacts have to Close
24
(NC).
Switching angle X
Locked positions X Contact Closed
Contact Closed without
interruption
Spring return
1 2 Mounting 3 With Without

Also specify the ampere rating, mounting style, switching angle, script plate
Switch Type S 16 B03 Stop
4
Front plate
Type Colour 7
Form X
markings, terminal marking and lockable position (If any).
Optional extras
Switching positions 5
50 Yellow
For example refer the sample customised programme sheet of a Bedroom Switch
Marking
6
Handle
Type
Tear drop
Colour
Red
Customer Date having 3 contacts controlling a tube, fan and night lamp.
1 CUSTOMER CODE No. Note: The above construction carries a five digit number starting with (7xxxx) allotted by
2 us. This number alone is sufficient for future correspondence and further ordering.
3 Ordering Code
4
Programme Code Type Ampere Mounting Knob Color
5
6
7
8 Example : 6 1 1 9 7 S 2 0 0 B 0 3 T D Y R
9 Programme Selection Type Selection
10 Programmes Prog Type Code Possible Amps Ampere Code Ampere Code
11 Code S-Series S 6 to 400Amps 6 A 100 K
12 Isolators Pg 06 Touch Proof T 6 to 20Amps 10 B 125 L
Changeovers with OFF Pg 07 Rear Access Termination R 16 to 63Amps 16 C 200 N
13
Changeovers without OFF Pg 08 DC Switches D 16 to 500Amps 20 D 250 O
14
Multistep with OFF Pg 09 Phase Selector only for P 25 to 63Amps 25 E 300 P
15 1 Pole 3 Way with OFF
Multistep without OFF Pg 10 32 F 400 Q
16 Ammeter (CT Operated) P 6 and 10Amps
Instrumentation Switches Pg 11 40 G 500 R
Voltmeter (Phase to Phase (available only with
17 Motor Control Switches Pg 13 63 I
with OFF) four hole mounting)
18 Gang Switches Pg 15 80 J
L - Series L 6 to 10 Amps
19 Control Switches Pg 16 (Spring clamp screwless)
20
Color Combination Selection
21
CODE - YR CODE - GB CODE - BB CODE - AB
22
23
24
Locked position Contact closed Contact closed without Spring return

X X
interruption
1 2 3 With Without
Mounting
Switch Type Form Position Yellow Front Plate Grey Front Plate Black Front Plate Alluminium (silver) Foil Front Plate
Red Handle Black Handle Black Handle with Black Handle
4 Size Colour 7
Front plate Optional extras Knobs and Handles Selection
CODE- TD CODE- FH CODE - BG CODE- PG CODE- LV
5
Marking
6 Type Colour Customer Date
Handle
Customer Code No.
Tear Drop Handle Flag Handle Ball Grip Handle Pistal Grip Lever Handle
Handle
24 25
Breaker Control Switches Mounting Styles

Under this 3 types are widely used
a) Spring return 3 to 5mm Panel gap
NEUTRAL S
b) Lost Motion contact (LMD) Drilling plan
c) Sequence Locking (Two consecutive movement in one direction arrested) T C
Ø 4.5 Ø 12
R L
All the above can also be with external KEY and LOCK arrangement. I O
P S
E
In SPRING RETURN type the handle is always return to NEUTRAL position and does not stay in
Ø58
other TWO positions, when the handle returned to Neutral the Main/TRIP contact will be in open
condition.
In LMD, the contact block is divided into two, as main contacts and LMD contacts. LMD Contacts will
be closed with the handle is moved to CLOSE side/TRIP side and the contact closing will be retained
even though the handle is returned to the NEUTRAL by virtue of Spring Return nature. When the 82
handle is rotated on the opposite direction then only the LMD contact will open. ! Spring Return to Neutral
Position from both the L
Thus the LMD mechanism enables the Switch to have a memory feature of the previous operation, sides 78
which is considered to be a very essential for Circuit Breaker applications. SQ 48
Memory feature of the
In case of sequence lock, it acts like a mechanical interlock in the switch not permitting two
!
previous Operation(LMD) B03 B90
consecutive “CLOSE” operations. When you Turn the handle to CLOSE Position and handle will be ! Permits only one Close SQ. 64 SQ. 64
back to NEUTRAL due to Spring Return action. Again the handle movement on the CLOSE Shorter length handle also available on request
Operation(Sequential
side will be locked. When the handle is moved to TRIP position then only rotation to CLOSE Lock)
Type L (No.of Stages) X* LMD Y* Sequential Lock
position permitted.
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
As indicated all the above feature models can also be supported with external lock and key S25/S32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
arrangement with key lockable and removable only at NEUTRAL position and the handle shall not be C C 53 68 83 98 113 128 143 15 27.5
T T
turned when the key is in locked condition. R L R L
O I O
I
S S *LMD Dimension ‘X’ to be added
P P
E E *Sequential Lock Dimension ‘Y’ to be added
Technical Specifications General

Endurance : B90 is available only black front plate &
Description Unit S25 S32 Mechanical black PG handle type
100,000 operations at
V AC 690 690
Rated Operational Voltage Ue 300 cycles/hour
V DC 250 250
Resistance to Surge Voltage Uimp kV 6 6 Electrical
Rated Uninterrupted Current Ith A 32 40 10,000 operations at Installation Procedure for Barrel Lock (Center Key Lock)
Rated Operational Current Ie 120 cycles/hour
Operational Temperature
Pilot Duty Ac15 Ensure Mating Panel Fixing Screw
250C to 550C, frequency
220-240V AC A 8 14 upto 5 kHz Orientation with Knob
380-440V AC A 5 6
Short circuit protection 25 32
A
HRC fuse size
Rated short circuit kA 10 10
Terminal cross section
Rigid wire min mm2 1.5 2.5
max 4 6
Flexible wire min mm2 1 1.5
max 2.5 4
Terminal Screw M4 M4 Switch
Terminal Tightening Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm
No of S25/SG 25 S32/SG32
Voltage Contacts Inductive L/R Amps Inductive L/R Amps Mounting Plate
Resistive Resistive
in series Amps 10 20 40 Amps 10 20 40
msec msec msec msec msec msec
50V 1 20 20 15 6 25 25 18 8
2 - - 20 14 - - 25 18 Panel
3 - - - 20 - - - 25 c Thickness
3 To 5mm
125V 1 3 2.5 1.5 1.0 5 3 2 1.2
2 20 15 10 5 25 18 12 6
3 - 20 20 10 - 25 25 12
250V 1 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.2 1.2 0.6 0.4 0.3 Barrel Lock
2 5 2 1.0 0.5 6 2.5 1.2 0.6 Assembly
3 20 10 4 1 25 12 5 1.2
26 27
Breaker Control Switches Mounting Styles

Under this 3 types are widely used
a) Spring return 3 to 5mm Panel gap
NEUTRAL S
b) Lost Motion contact (LMD) Drilling plan
c) Sequence Locking (Two consecutive movement in one direction arrested) T C
Ø 4.5 Ø 12
R L
All the above can also be with external KEY and LOCK arrangement. I O
P S
E
In SPRING RETURN type the handle is always return to NEUTRAL position and does not stay in
Ø58
other TWO positions, when the handle returned to Neutral the Main/TRIP contact will be in open
condition.
In LMD, the contact block is divided into two, as main contacts and LMD contacts. LMD Contacts will
be closed with the handle is moved to CLOSE side/TRIP side and the contact closing will be retained
even though the handle is returned to the NEUTRAL by virtue of Spring Return nature. When the 82
handle is rotated on the opposite direction then only the LMD contact will open. ! Spring Return to Neutral
Position from both the L
Thus the LMD mechanism enables the Switch to have a memory feature of the previous operation, sides 78
which is considered to be a very essential for Circuit Breaker applications. SQ 48
Memory feature of the
In case of sequence lock, it acts like a mechanical interlock in the switch not permitting two
!
previous Operation(LMD) B03 B90
consecutive “CLOSE” operations. When you Turn the handle to CLOSE Position and handle will be ! Permits only one Close SQ. 64 SQ. 64
back to NEUTRAL due to Spring Return action. Again the handle movement on the CLOSE Shorter length handle also available on request
Operation(Sequential
side will be locked. When the handle is moved to TRIP position then only rotation to CLOSE Lock)
Type L (No.of Stages) X* LMD Y* Sequential Lock
position permitted.
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
As indicated all the above feature models can also be supported with external lock and key S25/S32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
arrangement with key lockable and removable only at NEUTRAL position and the handle shall not be C C 53 68 83 98 113 128 143 15 27.5
T T
turned when the key is in locked condition. R L R L
O I O
I
S S *LMD Dimension ‘X’ to be added
P P
E E *Sequential Lock Dimension ‘Y’ to be added
Technical Specifications General

Endurance : B90 is available only black front plate &
Description Unit S25 S32 Mechanical black PG handle type
100,000 operations at
V AC 690 690
Rated Operational Voltage Ue 300 cycles/hour
V DC 250 250
Resistance to Surge Voltage Uimp kV 6 6 Electrical
Rated Uninterrupted Current Ith A 32 40 10,000 operations at Installation Procedure for Barrel Lock (Center Key Lock)
Rated Operational Current Ie 120 cycles/hour
Operational Temperature
Pilot Duty Ac15 Ensure Mating Panel Fixing Screw
250C to 550C, frequency
220-240V AC A 8 14 upto 5 kHz Orientation with Knob
380-440V AC A 5 6
Short circuit protection 25 32
A
HRC fuse size
Rated short circuit kA 10 10
Terminal cross section
Rigid wire min mm2 1.5 2.5
max 4 6
Flexible wire min mm2 1 1.5
max 2.5 4
Terminal Screw M4 M4 Switch
Terminal Tightening Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm
No of S25/SG 25 S32/SG32
Voltage Contacts Inductive L/R Amps Inductive L/R Amps Mounting Plate
Resistive Resistive
in series Amps 10 20 40 Amps 10 20 40
msec msec msec msec msec msec
50V 1 20 20 15 6 25 25 18 8
2 - - 20 14 - - 25 18 Panel
3 - - - 20 - - - 25 c Thickness
3 To 5mm
125V 1 3 2.5 1.5 1.0 5 3 2 1.2
2 20 15 10 5 25 18 12 6
3 - 20 20 10 - 25 25 12
250V 1 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.2 1.2 0.6 0.4 0.3 Barrel Lock
2 5 2 1.0 0.5 6 2.5 1.2 0.6 Assembly
3 20 10 4 1 25 12 5 1.2
26 27
Installation Procedure-Standard Switch DC Switches (CPRI Tested & RDSO Approved)

Construction and Features
D16 - D63
D Series Switches are designed for DC Switching applications. These Switches are Constructed using snap action mechanism which
Panel Fixing provides "Quick Make Quick Break" of the contacts which is essential for DC switching. The contacts are of AgCdO, double break and
Nut butt type housed in a glass filled polyamide contact stage and are operated through cams for higher electrical endurance and smooth
operation.
Suitable for 90 and 60 degree switching programmes and applicable for bothAC and DC Switching. Suitable switching programmes for
Isolator, Changeover, Multi-step and Gang Switches etc. are offered.
*Ensure Mating Orientation with Knob
Switch DC Switches D100A-D500A

Features:
n Housing made up of SMC material for rigidity and
higher mechanical strength.
n “Wiping contacts” operations helps in dust free &
Mounting Plate self cleaning concepts
n Extended terminals for Bus bar / Aluminium cable
connections
n Capston Handle Operation for better leverage.
Applications:
n D40R – Railway coaches lighting & fan circuits
switching
n ‘All DC power circuits – Railways,
Telecommunications & Power plants
Panel n Battery charging equipments
Thickness
3 To 5mm
Technical Specifications
Front
Plate & Panel
Screw Fixing Rated Operational Current le
DC
Description Unit Switch Type
Ratings
D 16 D 25 D 32 D 40 D 63
Rated on Interrupted Current (l th) A 20 32 40 50 80
Front Plate
DC 22A L/R 2m sec
Rated Operational 110 V 250 V
Script Plate Voltage
A 16 25 32 40 63
No of Series Contacts 1 2
Raster Plate
AC AC3 Rating 3 Phase 380-440V HP 7 10 14 20 25
Ring
Ratings AC21 Rating A 16 25 32 40 63
Fuse Protection A 16 25 32 40 63
Short Circuit through fault current kA 5 10 10 20 20
Knob
Terminal [Rigid] min mm2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
General Cross Section [Flex] max mm2 4 4 6 10 16
Tightening Torque Nm 0.8 1.2 1.2 2 2
Maximum Contact Stages 16 10 10 6 6
Knob Screw
Description UNIT D 100 D 200 D 300 D 400 D 500
Duty Rating - DC 22 A L/R 2m sec
Operational Voltage V DC 250 250 250 250 250
Voltage for AC Rating V AC 460 460 460 460 460
Operational Current A 100 200 300 400 500
Thermal Current (l th) A 125 250 375 500 625
Switching Angle Deg 90 90 90 90 90
28 29
Installation Procedure-Standard Switch DC Switches (CPRI Tested & RDSO Approved)

Construction and Features
D16 - D63
D Series Switches are designed for DC Switching applications. These Switches are Constructed using snap action mechanism which
Panel Fixing provides "Quick Make Quick Break" of the contacts which is essential for DC switching. The contacts are of AgCdO, double break and
Nut butt type housed in a glass filled polyamide contact stage and are operated through cams for higher electrical endurance and smooth
operation.
Suitable for 90 and 60 degree switching programmes and applicable for bothAC and DC Switching. Suitable switching programmes for
Isolator, Changeover, Multi-step and Gang Switches etc. are offered.
*Ensure Mating Orientation with Knob
Switch DC Switches D100A-D500A

Features:
n Housing made up of SMC material for rigidity and
higher mechanical strength.
n “Wiping contacts” operations helps in dust free &
Mounting Plate self cleaning concepts
n Extended terminals for Bus bar / Aluminium cable
connections
n Capston Handle Operation for better leverage.
Applications:
n D40R – Railway coaches lighting & fan circuits
switching
n ‘All DC power circuits – Railways,
Telecommunications & Power plants
Panel n Battery charging equipments
Thickness
3 To 5mm
Technical Specifications
Front
Plate & Panel
Screw Fixing Rated Operational Current le
DC
Description Unit Switch Type
Ratings
D 16 D 25 D 32 D 40 D 63
Rated on Interrupted Current (l th) A 20 32 40 50 80
Front Plate
DC 22A L/R 2m sec
Rated Operational 110 V 250 V
Script Plate Voltage
A 16 25 32 40 63
No of Series Contacts 1 2
Raster Plate
AC AC3 Rating 3 Phase 380-440V HP 7 10 14 20 25
Ring
Ratings AC21 Rating A 16 25 32 40 63
Fuse Protection A 16 25 32 40 63
Short Circuit through fault current kA 5 10 10 20 20
Knob
Terminal [Rigid] min mm2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
General Cross Section [Flex] max mm2 4 4 6 10 16
Tightening Torque Nm 0.8 1.2 1.2 2 2
Knob Screw
Description UNIT D 100 D 200 D 300 D 400 D 500
Duty Rating - DC 22 A L/R 2m sec
Operational Voltage V DC 250 250 250 250 250
Voltage for AC Rating V AC 460 460 460 460 460
Operational Current A 100 200 300 400 500
Thermal Current (l th) A 125 250 375 500 625
Switching Angle Deg 90 90 90 90 90
28 29
D16 D63 D200-D500

105
Ø10.5
0.8
3 to 5 170 PCD
øB3
Ø10.5
S Panel Gap Drilling Plan
øB2
236
Ø10.5
Ø32
SQ F
øD
5.0
Ø3.1
3 S
24.5 24.5 33.5 35
L 138
L
35.5 SQ B1 Length L
Type S
3 4 5 6 7
Type B1 B2 B3 D F S D200-D500 22 117 139 161 183 205
D 16 48 12 5.5 50 64 12
D 25 / D 32 48 12 5.5 50 64 15
D 40 / D 63 68 15 5.5 70 88 21 D100 with Door Interlock
120
Stages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 170 PCD
0.8
D 16 62 74 86 98 110 122 134 146 158 170 182 194 3.1
Length D 25/32 65 80 95 110 125 140 155 170 185 200 215 230
L in mm
D 40/63 69 90 111 132 153 174 195 216 237 258 279 300
PCD 44
Ø34.5
236
M5
D40 R M6
R200
S2 S S1
24.5 24.5
90
PO
SI
105
L 80
59
90
Ø19
41.5
26 Length L
L Type S S1 S2
133 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D100 32 35 15 210 242 274 306 338 370 402 434
Length L
Type S S1 S2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D40 10 30.5 15 55.5 65.5 75.5 85.5 95.5 105.5 115.5 125.5 D200-D500 with Door Interlock
120
L = No. of Stages x S + (S+S)
Ø10.5
170 PCD
0.8
Rectangle Slot 33X20

D100 105 Ø4.3 (2Nos.)
Ø10.5
170 PCD
Ø10.5
0.8
Ø10.5
PCD 44
Ø34.5
236
Ø10.5
236
R200 3
Ø32
Ø3.1
S2 S S1 24.5 S 24.5
3
5.0 L 80
Ø3.1
24.5
33.5 35
L 138
Length L Length L
Type S S1 S2 Type S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 7
D100 32 32 15 112 144 176 208 240 272 304 D200-D500 22 197 219 241 263 285
30 31
D16 D63 D200-D500

105
Ø10.5
0.8
3 to 5 170 PCD
øB3
Ø10.5
S Panel Gap Drilling Plan
øB2
236
Ø10.5
Ø32
SQ F
øD
5.0
Ø3.1
3 S
24.5 24.5 33.5 35
L 138
L
35.5 SQ B1 Length L
Type S
3 4 5 6 7
Type B1 B2 B3 D F S D200-D500 22 117 139 161 183 205
D 16 48 12 5.5 50 64 12
D 25 / D 32 48 12 5.5 50 64 15
D 40 / D 63 68 15 5.5 70 88 21 D100 with Door Interlock
120
Stages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 170 PCD
0.8
D 16 62 74 86 98 110 122 134 146 158 170 182 194 3.1
Length D 25/32 65 80 95 110 125 140 155 170 185 200 215 230
L in mm
D 40/63 69 90 111 132 153 174 195 216 237 258 279 300
PCD 44
Ø34.5
236
M5
D40 R M6
R200
S2 S S1
24.5 24.5
90
PO
SI
105
L 80
59
90
Ø19
41.5
26 Length L
L Type S S1 S2
133 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D100 32 35 15 210 242 274 306 338 370 402 434
Length L
Type S S1 S2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D40 10 30.5 15 55.5 65.5 75.5 85.5 95.5 105.5 115.5 125.5 D200-D500 with Door Interlock
120
L = No. of Stages x S + (S+S)
Ø10.5
170 PCD
0.8
Rectangle Slot 33X20

D100 105 Ø4.3 (2Nos.)
Ø10.5
170 PCD
Ø10.5
0.8
Ø10.5
PCD 44
Ø34.5
236
Ø10.5
236
R200 3
Ø32
Ø3.1
S2 S S1 24.5 S 24.5
3
5.0 L 80
Ø3.1
24.5
33.5 35
L 138
Length L Length L
Type S S1 S2 Type S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 7
D100 32 32 15 112 144 176 208 240 272 304 D200-D500 22 197 219 241 263 285
30 31
o
h tn Intertek
i t c
Salzer Electronics Limited
Samichettipalayam Sw he Bes
Coimbatore - 641 047, INDIA.
Tel: +91 422 4233600/2692531.

Fax: + 91422 2692170.
t o t Cam Operated
Email: salzer@salzergroup.com, sales@salzergroup.com.
Website: www.salzergroup.com Rotary Switches
Bharat Bijlee Limited
Installation & Maintenance of 3 Phase Induction Motors CIM1
1. Installation & Maintenance of Motors about one third of the space within bearing covers is filled with grease.
Over filling of grease is not recommended.
Receiving and storing of motors : While regreasing motors provided with regreasing arrangement,
keep the grease outlet open and fill grease when the motor is running
Make sure that the right type of motor as ordered by you has arrived so that old grease/excess grease will flow out.
and it is not damaged in transit. In case of any such problem report
Balmer Lawrie LL3 and Shell-MP 3 are recommended for use in
immediately to our office.
motors. Mixing of grease should be avoided.
Store the motor in a clean dry place if it is not to be installed immediately.
When the motor is opened, protect bearings from foreign particles
Installation and mounting of motors : and dirt by wrapping them with clean paper or polythene sheet.
Before installation and mounting observe the following. During reassembly of motor ensure that wavy washer and brass
See that the motor rotates freely by turning the shaft by hand. washers are kept in their position and bearing covers are secured
Replace the grease charge of bearings if the motor has been stored properly. These washers are specially designed to provide adequate
for longer than 18 months. preloading on the bearings.
Check the insulation resistance by applying a D. C, voltage of 500 Clean the entire path of the cooling air on the motor at regular
V. If it is low due to moisture, dry out the stator winding till the intervals.
insulation resistance increases above one megaohm by any of the The temperature of the motor, judged by hand feeling, could be
accepted methods. (Ref. IS 900- 1992) misleading. In the case of suspected overheating the actual temperature
Remove anticorrosion coating on the shaft with petrol, white spirit should be measured with thermometer and should be compared with
or kerosene. Do not scrape the coating. the permissible temperature rise according to the temperature class of
the motor.
See that the machined surface of motor feet (or flange face) and
also the surface on which the motor is mounted is clean and perfectly Overheating of the motor may be due to over loading of motor, too low
in level. or too high supply voltages, frequency fluctuations, over greasing of
bearings, foreign material in the air gap between stator and rotor.
The coupling parts to be fitted on the motor shaft are to be properly
Necessary corrective action is to be taken accordingly.
balanced. The bore and key way are to be machined accurately.
When ordering spare parts state the motor type, machine number,
The recommended tolerance for the bore diameter is H7.
type of construction as shown in the rating plate, part description
The coupling parts or pulley must be carefully fitted by means of special given in the part list and number of units required.
tackle for which a tapped hole is provided at shaft end. Hammering Special installation instructions for IP55/IP56
must be avoided since it might damage bearings. The tackle can
also be used for removal of coupling (See Fig.1) construction motors :
While using Non-flexible coupling it should be noted the shafts of Conduit entries are fitted with threaded plugs and are sealed. Open the
the motor and the driven machine must be in perfect alignment and plug and clean threads before fitting cable gland. Use double
axes should coincide. Inaccurate alignment results in stresses on compression gland and seal the threads of glands with sealing cement.
bearings and noisy running. This will ensure IP55/IP56 Protection of the cable entry.
See that screws for fixing the motor (or flange) to the foundation,
After the cable connection fix the T. Box properly. Ensure that the
are secured properly.
rubber gasket provided is not dislocated or distorted and fixing screws
Install the motor such that the cooling air has free access and can are fully tightened.
pass unobstructed over the motor.
Wherever possible it is recommended to cover the motor from direct
Electrical Connections : heating by the sun. Provide a canopy over the motor.
The motor shaft is provided with oil seals/ ‘’v’ rings on both ends.
While doing electrical connection ensure following points: Drain plugs are provided on front and back sides.(ref. fig 2.) During
Use appropriate size of cable for connecting the motor. periodic inspection say once in 3 months open the drain plugs
The supply voltage should be same as given in the rating plate. Unless and drain out condensed water if any.
otherwise specified the tolerances is 10% of the rated voltage.
While replacing oil seals make sure that oil seals are not distorted, the
Connect the motor in accordance with the connection (Star or Delta) springs are in their position and the lip of the oil seal is free. Apply
given in the rated plate and connection diagram given inside the Ter- small amount of grease to the lip. ‘V’ rings can be replaced by first
minal box cover.
removing the M.S. cap. the new ‘v’ ring is to be fitted such that the lip
Connect earth terminal effectively for protection. This is very
just rests against the end shield face. (Excessive pressure will lead to
important to ensure safety. Local electrical code must be followed.
premature failure of the ‘v’ ring). Replace the M.S.cap.
Normally 3 phase motors upto 2 HP have their winding connected
Whenever, the motor is opened and reassembled ensure that all
in Star (Y). These motors have three terminals and are meant for
direct on line starting only. joints faces are properly cleaned and gasket cement is applied
properly at all joints.(ref. fig 2.)
Motors above 2 HP have windings suitable for delta (D) connection.
These motors can be started with a Y-D starter or Direct on Line Recommended gasket cements : Anabond 681 of Anabond Ltd.
starter using connecting links as shown in the connection diagram.
While connecting the cables to motor terminals please ensure that
the cable in properly secured and clamped and it does not exert any
tension on terminal . A heavy load or tension by the cable can
break the terminals.
Motors must be installed as per the local electrical code/regulation
by an authorised person. Motors must be protected against
overload and short circuit conditions.
Maintenance :
During maintenance please note the following points :
The bearings are prelubricated and maintenance free. Operating
conditions permitting, unsealed bearings should be cleaned at intervals
of about 10000 operating hours, with trichloroethylene or clean petrol.
While lubricating please see that the bearings are well lubricated and
1
1/11
2: SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION AND Press out the back endshield in the case of MJ80 to MJ130 after
MAINTENANCE OF FLAME-PROOF MOTORS : removing the circlip on the inside of enshield bearing housing.. In
other frame sizes back endshield can be removed from rotor after
A sealing end box is mandatory for all motors for use for Gas Gr. I and removing back outer B.B.cover.
Oil Mines. v Dismantling of the motor should be done carefully without damaging any
of the joint faces components rotor, stator and windings. If any damage is
A DGMS identification mark must be fitted on the motor for use for Gas noticed after dismantling, such component should be replaced by the new
Gr. I or Oil Mines. In case the DGMS mark is not provided please obtain component. Rectification of damage by metal filling or adhesive filling is
the same from BBL. not permitted.
Flame-proof motor is designed and manufactured in accordance with v Assembly of the motor is to be done in reverse order of dismantling .
the requirements of IS 2148-1981. The construction is approved by v During rewinding take precautions given below.
C.M. R.I. No modification or alteration to be approved construction v Burning of old winding to remove coils from slot should not be done.
of the motor is permitted. For replacement of parts, please consult
Bharat Bijlee. v Cut overhang portion of winding with chisel.
Each motor must be protected by a motor protections circuit breaker v Heat the body at 130o-140o C in the oven for 2 hrs.
or any other protective device approved by the concerned authorities. v With the help of copper rod and hammer, force out copper wire from the
slots and clean slots by filing.
The cable entry can be made from any one of four directions by turning
the terminal box in steps of 900 C. Do not turn the bottom piece. Lead v Stator body should be handled carefully to avoid damage on machined
wires will be damaged if bottom piece is turned. portion of the body. Any damage, burr will result in change of flame path
gap.
Conduits and type of cable (e.g. PVC, PILCDWA, ect.) should strictly
v Reassembled motor carefully as explained above.
correspond to the conduit tapping or cable entry provided on the teminal
box. N.B.:
1) Burning of winding with flame will distort the body. After reassembly
For PVC cables when sealing box is not provided, use FLP cable glands.
flame path gap may increase.
Statutory approval is a must for FLP glands.
2) Carefull handling and correct reassembly shall ensure
For PVC cables, when sealing box is provided use of SIBG glands is
flame-proofness of the enclosure.
pemitted.
3) It is advisable to give rewinding work to an authorised rewinder of BBL.
For PILCDWA cables (used in mines), the cable entry consists of sealing
box, adaptor plate, cable gland with lead bush and a cable clamp.
When assembled make sure that the cable is held firmly in the gland.
Before supply cable connection, Sealing box (where ever used) should
be properly filled with solid setting bituminous compound specified for
electrical purpose. Compound Retaining Barrier is provided in between
the Terminal Box and Sealing Box. Drill required size of holes on it and
replace/fix carfully such that supply cables can pass through for making
terminal connections before compound filling.
Strip off the insulation properly from the cable ends. The position where
the cable insulation is cut should be carefully taped before making
the connections.
Connections of supply leads to the motor terminals should be made
as shown in the connection diagram. The clearances and creepage
distance inside the terminal box must be maintained to the maximum.
During assembly of terminal box parts and subsequent routine
maintenance, please observe the following points.
The machined joint faces shall not be refinished, tampered, damaged
or coated with varnish or paint.
On all motor a thin coat of Grease should be applied on all motors
joints. (Grease Balmer Lawrie LL3 should be used)
Replace defective/broken screws by new screws of the original material
and tensile strength as per grade 8.8.
All screws, bolts, nuts etc. used for fixing the parts of flame-proof
enclosure are to be provided with spring washers to prevent them from
getting loose due to shocks and vibrations, during operation.
All gaps between mating parts of joints forming flame-proof enclosure
are to be thoroughly checked with feeler gauge to ensure that gap
clearances are within 0.1mm.
Dismantling and reassembling.

Follow the sequence given below :
Remove the fan cowl and fan, unscrew fixing screws of back endshield
and pull out the back endshield with the rotor in the case of MJ80
to MJ130. In other motors unscrew the front B.B.C.(where ever
provided) fixing screws also before pulling out the back endshield
with the rotor. Pull out front endshield after unscrewing the fixing
screws.
2
2/11
3: SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION AND 4: SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
MAINTENANCE OF BRAKE MOTORS : AND MAINTENANCE OF SLIP RING MOTORS.
IMPORTANT : TERMINAL BOX:
Before giving supply to the motor ensure that the brake is releasing. Apply The terminal box is arranged on top of the frame. It contains 6 terminals
the specified voltage at the brake terminals, and check that the motor (3 for stator, 3 for rotor). The terminal box conforms to degree of protec-
rotates freely by turning the shaft by hand. tion IP55.
In case the brake is not releasing, adjust the air-gap between the magnet The terminal box is provided with two twin-cable entries. One twin entry is
assembly and the armature disk assembly to 0.3 mm as described on Righthand side and the other on the Left-hand side as viewed from the
below. driving shaft end.
ADJUSTMENT OF AIRGAP/ COMPENSATION FOR LINER Two earthing terminals are provided in the terminal box and one on the
WEAR : mounting foot.
The wear of the brake liner depends on the frequency of operation or Cable entry size is 3/4” B.S. conduit entry. Maximum cable OD suitable for
number of starts/stops of the motor and the load GD2 or inertia of the these entries is 19mm Dia.
load . SLIP RINGS, BRUSH-BLOCK ASSEMBLY:
It is recommended that the airgap (ref. fig.5 & 6) should generally be The Slip-rings are arranged at the drive end. These are easily accessible
done when the liner is worn out through 1 mm. thickness (i.e. total air by removing the top T.Box cover.
gap is 1.3 mm) The brush holders are assembled as a complete unit called brush-block
assembly. It can be easily replaced as a whole without dismantling the
METHOD :
motor.
Remove the fan cowl.
BEARING:
In case of motors in frame size 71 & 80 remove the split pin (400) from
Pre-publicated Sealed for Life Deep-Groove ball bearings are used on
the castlenut(ref.fig. 5).
the motors.
In case of motors in frame size 90 to 132, remove the screws (402)
Remove
from the the rubber
locknut cover
(401) (ref.075).
fig. 2). STARTING:
Now rotate the castlenut/lockknut till the air gap is 0.3 mm. Use filler- The starting torque is increased by introducing external resistance in the
gauge to ensure proper air gap. rotor circuit. The maximum starting torque that can be achieved is equal to
the Break-down(Pull-out) torque.
Insert the split pin or fix the screws in the castlenut/locknut as the case
may be. The starting resistance (including rotor resistance) R + r(In ohms) is calcu-
lated from the equation-
Replace the rubber cover in its place and fix the fan cowl.
The brake is now adjusted and ready for operaation.
U Mn
It is recommended that the entire armature disk assembly R+r= X
In x 3 Ma
is replaced when the liner has worn by 3 to 4 mm. (i.e. after 3 or 4
adjustments).
Where, R = external resistance per phase
Adjusting the braking torque :
r = rotor resistance per phase
The braking torque is proportional to the number of compression springs. In = rotor rated current
The standard torque values for different frame sizes are given below :
U = rotor Voltage
Frame sizes Std.Braking torque (Kgm) Mn = rated torque, ‘kg-m’
Ma = required starting torque, ‘kg-m’
71 0.5
80 1.0 In most cases,the rotor resistance is neglected and R+r is assumed equal to
90S, 90L 2.0 the external starting resistance. Should it be necessary to allow rotor
resistance, it can be determined with sufficient accuracy from the following
100L 4.0
equation-
112M 5.0
132S, 132M 5.0 Ns - n
U
r = X
In x 3 Ns
It can be increased by upto 40% (max). by inserting washers under all
the compression springs, after removing the castle nut/lock nut and fan.
Where Ns = Synchronous speed
It can also be reduced by upto 50% (max). by removing some of the n = Rated speed
compression springs. Not more than half of them should be removed. the
As the speed picks up, the starter cuts-out the external resistance
remaining springs must be distributed uniformly around the circumference
in steps.The various values for R+r are calculated by assigning
of the magnet yoke.
different values to Ma while using the equation.
The brake should be then reassembled.
SPARES :
SPARES :
The list of spares which can be provided is given in fig, 5and 6. The following items are available as spares (in addition to items shown
A manual release kit is available for incorporating manual release in fig. 3.)
arrangement for motors in 90S onwards. 1. Brush holder
2. Slip Ring
N.B:
3. Carbon Brushes
1.0 Brake unit with Manual Release arrangement cannot
be replaced in old design for 132S/132M Frame Brake
motors.
2.0 Brake unit with manual release arrangement can be replaced in
old design of 90S/90L, 100L & 112M Frame.
3
3/11
5 : Fault Analysis
TROUBLE CAUSE REMEDY TROUBLE CAUSE REMEDY
1) Abnormal noise 6) Hot bearings, ball i) Insufficient grease i) Maintain proper

(a) Continuous i) Fan rubbing against i) Rectify the defect or roller grease quantity.
end shield
ii) Deterioration or ii) Remove old grease,
ii) Fan rubbing against ii) Replace cowl/rectify contamination of wash bearing
cowl, dented grease thoroughly in petrol to
iii) Bearing failure iii) Replace bearing which a few drops of
iv) oil seal rubbing iv) Apply few drops of oil have been added
oil to lip & replace with new
grease.
v) Rotor-Stator rubbing v) Rectify the defect
iii) Excess grease iii) Reduce grease
vi) Excess preloading vi) Reduce preloading
quantity
of bearing
iv) Overloaded bearings iv) Take corrective
(b) Intermittent i) Dirt in bearing i) Clean & regrease action
greases bearings (ref: 6-II) v) Broken ball/rough v) Replace bearing &
races clean housing.
2) Magnetic noise i) air gap not uniform i) check & correct 7) Shaft temp. is i) Defective bearing i) Replace bearing
endshield fit/bearing high
ii) Oil sealing rubbing ii) 450C-500C rise above
ii) Rotor unbalance ii) Re-balance rotor against shaft (in motors ambient is OK.If more
with oil seal) replace oil seal or put drop
of oil on the lip.
3) No Load current i) Wrong external connections i) Verify & correct
8) Motor body temp is i) Rotor - stator rubbing i) Rectify
is high ii) Voltage high ii) - high
ii) Wrong motor selection ii) Select correct motor
iii) Frquency low iii) - (Check at eyebolt
iv) Faulty installation iv) Correct hole with iii) Overloading iii) Reduce load/change motor
thermometer design.
v) Inherent design feature v) *
iv) Ambient temp. is high iv) Select right motor
vi) Stator - rotor misalignment vi) Vertify & correct
v) Inherent design v) No action required if temp.
feature (B/F class) rise is within limits
vi) Fan cooling is affected vi) Rectify
* Note : a) In case of small hp, special motors, Crane duty motors, the no
Load current could be as high as Full Load current. vii) High no. of start/stops vii) Verify the motor selection
b) No Load current specified in Test Certificate is at rated voltage viii) Motor dirty viii) Clean periodically
i.e. generally 415 V 50 Hz. ix) Single phasing xi) Check lead connections
If No load current is high check for Voltage & Freq. variation. x) Voltage unbalanced x) Check for faulty leads
connections and
4) Full Load current i) Voltage high/low i) Regulate supply transformers
is high 9) Speed is low i) Frequency low i) -
ii) Motor selection ii) Select correct motor
is wrong ii) Defective rotor ii) Replace motor
iii) Overloading iii) Take coorective iii) Overloading iii) Take corrective action
action
iv) Blowers/pumps operating iv) Operate in specified 10)Wrong direction i) Wrong sequence of i) Interchange any 2
out of specified range range rotation. phases phases
5) No laod Current i) Wrong external i) Verify & Correct

11)Motor runs and i) Power failure/Single i) Check for loose
unbalance Correction
then stops phasing connections
ii) Voltage unbalance ii) Check for faulty leads
iii) Overload iii) Examine over load
connections and
relay trip setting
transformer
iii) Stator winding resistance iii) Rewind 12)Motor connected i) No supply voltage, i) Check voltage on each
unbalance but does not one phase open or phase.
start voltage too low
ii) Starting torque of ii) Reduce load or study

load too high requirement. If sq. cage
motor with auto-
Note : There could be current unbalance of 5% (15% for 2 pole) on No load transformer starting,
running even with balanced volatge supply. The unbalance in current change to a higher tap. If
reduces when the motor is loaded. slipring, lower starting
resistances.
1% unbalance in voltage can cause 6 to 10% u.balance in current
iii)Control great defective iii) Rectify (Check contacts)
4
4/11
TROUBLE CAUSE REMEDY TROUBLE CAUSE REMEDY
13) Motors do not i) Defective motor i) Replace motor 19) Axial Play i) Bearing preloading washer i) Replace preloading
take load misplaced washer
ii) Wrong motor selection ii) Change the motor
ii) Wrong application of motor ii) Select the correct motor
iii) Voltage low iii) -
iii) NDE End Shield bearing iii) Replace End Shield
14) (a) Water/oil/ i) Oil seal defective i) Replace oil seal housing damaged.
Dirt entry 20) Overload relay i) Overloading i) Take corrective action
ii) Improper mounting ii) Replace oil seal
of oil seal tripping due to
excess current
ii) Starting time is high ii) Take corrective action
iii) Poor joint sealing iii) Rectify iii) Defective rotor iii) Replace motor
( b) Oil leakage i) Flange fixing holes i) Rectify iv) Wrong selection of motor iv) Change the motor
from gear box are not tightened/
sealed. v) High voltage variation v) Contact the manufacturer
vi) Low Frequency vi) Reduce loading if possible
15) Vibration i) Defective bearings i) Replace bearings
ii) Rotor-rubbing ii) Rectify vii) Wrong relay setting (Due to vii) Set relay at 1.15 times
variation in voltage & fre- full load current
iii) Motor misalignment iii) Re-alignment quency the current drawn will
iv) Loose fixing bolt iv) Rectify be higher. If relay setting is
on full load current as per
v) Poor balancing of v) Rebalance name plate relay may trip.)
drive equipment
vi) Coupling out of vi) Balance coupling 21) Thermal relay i) Design of motor not i) Contact manufacturer
balance matching application
vii) B a l a n c i n g vii) Rebalance rotor ii) Wrong selection of ii) Replace with correct
weights detached thermistor for the thermistor
viii) Wound rotor coils application/motor
viii) Rebalance rotor
replaced
ix) Weak foundation ix) Strengthen base
22) Seizing of shaft i) Excessive belt load i) Reduce belt load
x) Single phasing x) Check for single on FLP motor
phasing ii) Bearing failure ii) Re-assemble after
xi) Replace bearing or rectifying damage
xi) Excessive end play
add washer add washer under
D. E. bearing iii) Inner BBC loosely iii) Fixing screws of Bearlng
fitted covers should be tightened
16) Motor fails or i) Defective bearings i) Replace bearing properly during reassembly
burns
ii) Voltage unbalance ii) -
overheating
iii) Rewind-provide space
iii) Loss of insulation of heater if humidty is high. 23) Low Insulation i) Motor subject to i) Dismantle and clean parts.
stators wdgs. water, rains, floods. Then bake windings In oven
at 90o C for 24hours or until
iv) Overloading iv) Take corrective action
resistance to ground is
v) Ambient temp. is high v) Rewind with higher sufficient (>1 megaohm)
insulation class
vi) Winding failure (inter- vi) Rewind.
tum short, failure of
lead wire, insulation
paper, etc)
17) Bearing failure i) Defective bearings i) Replace bearing

ii) Overloading (in the case ii) Take corrective
of belt drive, use roller action
bearing) Note: 1) Also refer IS 900 - 1992.
2) In case of difficulty In locating the cause for a problem please
iii) Poor alignment iii) Correct misalignment contact nearest branch office of Bharat Bijlee Ltd.
iv) Poor/No lubrication iv) Lubricate
v) Dried out greases v) Regrease
18) Rusting of shaft/ i) Poor application of i) Clean shaft/flange

flange rust preventive
ii) Long/wrong storage ii) Clean shaft/flange
of Motor
5
5/11
6. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE : Note : 1) Where regreasing provision is given, regreasing should be done while
the motor is running. Keep the grease outlet open.
Daily Maintenance :
Examine visually earth connections and motor leads. 2) The grease used by Bharat Bijlee is Balmer Lawrie LL3. Mixing of
Check motor windings for overheating. grease of other make/type should be avoided.
Examine control equipments.
Weekly Maintenance :
Annual Maintenance :
Check belt tension. In cases where this is excessive, it should immediately
be reduced . Check all high speed bearings and renew, if necessary.
Blow out the motor surface of protected type motors situated in dusty Blow out all motor surface thoroughly with clean dry air. Make sure that the pressure is not
locations. so high as to damage the insulation.
Examine starting equipment for burnt contacts where motor is started and Clean and varnish dirty and oily windings.
stopped frequently. Overhaul motors which have been subjected to severe operating conditions.
Renew switch and fuse contacts, if damaged.
Monthly Maintenance
Renew oil in starters subjected to damp/corrosive elements.
Overhaul controllers. Check insulation resistance to earth and between phases of motor windings, control gear
Inspect and clean oil circuit breakers. and wiring.
Wipe brush holders and check bedding of brushes of
Check resistance of earth connections.
slip- ring motors.
Test the motor overload relays and breakers.
Half Yearly Maintenance : Records :
Maintain a register giving one or more pages for each motor and record therein all
Clean windings of motors subjected to corrosive or other elements; also
important inspection and maintenance works carried out from time to time. These
varnish and bake, if necessary.
records should show past performance, normal insulation level, air gap
In case of slip-ring motors, check slip-ring for grooving or unusual wear. measurements, nature of repairs and time between previous repairs and other
Check grease in ball and roller bearings and make it up where necessary, important information which would be of help for good performance and
taking care to avoid over-filling. maintenance.
6
6/11
(FIG. 2)
1) Stud (High Tensile Stud)

2) Disc (M.S.)
3) Nut (M.S.)
(FIG. 1)
7
7/11
STANDARD MOTOR SPARE PARTS INDENTIFICATION
(FIG. 3)
8
Installation & Maintenance of 3 Phase Induction Motors
Note :
In Aluminium Pr. die cast body tie rods are
In place of Hexhead Bolt for endshiels fixiing.
CIM1
8/11
FLAME PROOF MOTORS SPARE PARTS INDENTIFICATION
(FIG. 4)
Sealing Box Adopter Plate
T Box Cover
Flange ( B5 Construction) FLP Cable Gland

T Box
Conduit Flange
Bottom Plate
assemblyy
Terminal Bushing Eye Bolt
T Box Bottom
Piece
Inner bearing
cover (AS) Fan Cowl
9
Endshield Key for Circlip (bearing
shaft locking)
Bearing Circlip
Bearing Non Driving End (B.S.)

Inner Bearing Endshield ( BS)
cover
Rotor
Installation & Maintenance of 3 Phase Induction Motors
Stator
Note:
All Flame proof Motors are with IP55 protection
Flame Proof motors inFrame size 16FP/16LFP/MJ180/20LFP/60FP/MJ280
are with Oil seaal on both sides ( AS & BS ) for IP55 protection.
Driving End (A.S.) Flame proof motors MJ80,MJ90,MJ130,MJ160,MJ200,MJ225,aqnd

MJ250are provided with Rubber seal ‘ V ring’ and M.S.Cap on both sides ( AS
& BS) for IP55 protection.
Flame proof motors with B5 construction are provided with Oil seal on
CIM1
9/11
Driving side ( AS ) for O.T.S.
10
10/11

: Registered Office :
Electric Mansion, 6th Floor, Appasaheb Marathe Marg, Prabhadevi, Mumbai 400 025.
Tel.: 2430 6237, 2430 6375 Fax: 022-2437 0624
: Central Marketing Office & Works :
Post Box No. 100, Thane Belapur Road, Thane 400 601.
Tel : 2760 0401 / 2760 0411 Fax : 91-22-2760 0430
Offices
REGION CITY ADDRESS PHONE FAX
NORTH NEW DELHI Milap Niketan, 4th floor 2371 14 34 011-2331 9413
8A, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002. 2331 96 94 /95/96
LUDHIANA 7, Gian Market, Opp. Ramgarhia Gurudwara, 2531 663 0161-2533826
G. T. Road, Miller Ganj, Ludhiana - 141 003. 2542 131
INDORE C/o. Tirupati Engineering, 128, 3rd Floor, 2704 474 0731-2704390
Dawa Bazar, RNT Marg, Indore 452 001. 2704 486
EAST KO L K ATA Flat No.8, 'Mansarowar', 2nd Floor, 3B Camac Street, 2217 23 82 033-2217 2467
Kolkata 700 016. 2217 23 83/ 84
WEST MUMBAI Post Box No.100, 2760 58 34 022-2760 0430

Thane-Belapur Road, Thane 400 601. 2760 58 35 / 36
PUNE 9, Ketki Building, 2nd Floor, Next to Alka Theatre, 433 48 31 020-433 9210
Sadashiv Peth, Pune 411 630. 432 12 67
AHMEDABAD 202, Arth, 8-Rashmi Society, Behind A. K.Patel House, 2642 76 67 079-2656 3581
Mithakhali, Cross Road, Ahmedabad - 380 009. 2643 08 98
SOUTH BANGALORE 204-207, Ramanashree Chambers, 2nd Floor, 559 26 81 080-559 2823
No.37, Lady Curzon Road, Bangalore 560 001. 559 21 37
559 62 74
CHENNAI C/o. Arpan Corporation, AVM Studios Compound, 2372 85 79 044-2372 8579
38, Arcol Road, Vadapalani, Chennai 600 026. 2472 67 34
SECUNDERABAD Krishna Mansion, 2nd Floor, Adjacent to Bible House, 2753 45 12 040-2753 1791
134, Rashtrapati Road, Secunderabad 500 003.
11
11/11
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
HELICAL INLINE GEARED
MOTORS/REDUCERS
FOOT MOUNTED
B3 GEARED MOTOR B3 INLINE REDUCER B3 MOTOR MOUNT REDUCER

FLANGE MOUNTED
B5 GEARED MOTOR B5 INLINE REDUCER B5 MOTOR MOUNT REDUCER
AGITATOR TYPE
GEARED MOTOR MOTOR MOUNT REDUCER
POWER BUILD LIMITED

POST BOX NO. 28, VITTHAL UDYOGNAGAR – 388 121, GUJARAT, INDIA.
TEL. : +91-2692-231070, 231120, 231170, 232118, 236488 FAX : +91-2692-236559
E-MAIL : infopbl@elecon.com Website : www.pbl.co.in
Instruction manual No.: GM/IM/07/7000

NOTES TO USERS
We are pleased to enter your name in our customers list and greatly appreciate your
decision in selecting PBL Geared Motors/Gear Speed Reducers.
This instruction manual covers some essential procedures for installation, operation and
maintenance. Before operating the unit, you should first thoroughly read this manual.
During the warranty period, the geared motors/reducers must not be opened without our
consent, lest warranty will be forfeited. We do not honour any claims raised during the
warranty period, which would arise from alterations or repairs carried out without our
consent.
1. To start with, check the following points to see
1.1 the items indicated on the nameplate are in conformance with your requirements.
1.2 there is no damage to the unit due to humidity or dirt accumulated in transit.
1.3 operating conditions of driven machine (load, frequency of start and degree of
shock) do not differ from the ones indicated at the time of order. Please contact PBL
if there is any deviation.
2. STORAGE
If geared motors/reducers have to be stored or the operation has to be stopped for

more than 3 months, please follow the procedures given bellow.
2.1 In case geared motors/reducers are to be stored duly packed, for a long period of
time:
(a) Geared motors/reducers have to be stored Indoor or the clean and dry place,
where there is no vibration and major changes in temperature.
(b) Rotate shaft by hand every 3 months to prevent bearing from rusting; confirm
that shaft rotates smoothly and there is no abnormal noise.
(c) Check the insulation resistance with insulation resistance tester of 500V
every 3 months and make sure that the value is more than 1M
(d) Before operating geared motors/reducers, please check the insulation

resistance and carry out the inspection of bearing to see there is no
abnormality.
2.2 In case geared motors/reducer are stored after installation with machine for along
period of time (over 6 months in general condition, over 3 months in hot and humid
place) :
1
(a) If geared motors/reducers are exposed to high humidity or if there is
possibility water or foreign particle to enter in the units, cover geared
motors/reducers with polyethylene sheet.
(b) Run geared motors/reducers for about 5 minutes every 3 months to prevent
bearing from rusting.
(c) Before operation, check the insulation resistance, inspect bearing and the
connection to power supply source, etc. to see that there is no abnormality.
3. Tips on Installation
3.1 When installing the Geared Motors/Reducers, make sure that the foundations
or the base frames do not notably tend to vibrate. The load-bearing surfaces, base
plates or flanges, should bear the weight uniformly, and be properly tightened.
3.2 Belt pulleys, couplings or gears, which are to be fitted to the output shaft, must have
a bore of ISA fit H7. Remove machining burrs if at all on the bore. Apply thin film of oil
on shaft and fit transmission part by means of a pull-on device which may be
screwed into the tapped hole in the shaft stub. It is advisable to heat the part prior
to fitting. Avoid hammer blows.
3.3 Cautions for installation of foot mounted type:
(a) Ensure that installation is always performed on a reliable machined

foundation.
(b) Avoid uneven clamping when you lock the unit on the bed.
3.4 Cautions for installation of flange mount type:
(a) Care must be exercised to ensure that installation is always performed on a

machined face.
(b) After the geared motor/reducer has been positioned by means of the spigot
joint of the bracket, tight it firmly.
(c) Connect the output shaft (low-speed shaft) and the driven shaft by means of
a “flexible coupling”.
(d) When radial load and thrust load are applied to geared motor/reducer, install
driven shaft block on the machine in which bearing are fixed to absorb the load
adequately.
4. Connection with the Driven Machine
Since output shaft (low-speed shaft) and input shaft (high-speed shaft) are
protected with rust preventive coating, remove it with thinner or a similar
Solvent.
2
4.1 Direct Connection
(a) When the input shaft of the driven machine and the output shaft (low-speed
shaft) of the geared motor/reducer are coupled directly, use a “flexible
coupling” and make sure that both ends are in alignment. (Refer to Fig. 1.)
Allowance of
0.05 mm
Dimension A
Allowance of
0.04 mm
Dimension B
Specified by
Dimension X
coupling maker
4.2 When the machine is driven by V-belt, chain or gearing
Make arrangement to ensure that the shaft of driven machine and that of geared
motor/reducer is positioned parallel. When the machine is driven by V-belt or chain,
ensure that the center distance is not too long by setting the proper distance and belt and
chain are stretched at right angle. When the machine is driven by gearing,
geared motor/reducer should be installed setting up the accurate center distance and
avoiding partial bearing of gears, and the output shaft is pushed downward.
(a) Point of load application on the output shaft:
When load (overhung load) is applied on the tip of the shaft, it may cause
damage to the shaft. The gearing or chain sprocket wheel must be mounted
such that the point of load application is as near as possible to the face of the
unit to minimize overhung load.
(b) Tension of chain:
When using chain, it is necessary to give suitable slack to chain. If the tension
of chain is too loose, excessive shock will be generated at starting or load
fluctuations, which may damage both the geared motor/reducer and the driven
machine. Generally, the recommended amount of slack is 2% of span distance.
(Refer to Fig. 2.)
3
L
Fig. 2
(c) Layout of chain driving:
When using chain horizontally for connection with the drive and the driven
machine, arrange shafts so as to give tension to the upper side of chain. Shaft
arrangement of vertical transmission is not recommended, however, if
necessary, the large wheel should be positioned at lower end.
(d) When load (overhung load) is applied on the output shaft, please make sure
that it is within the limit of allowable value. Allowable value of overhung load is
shown in graph of catalogue.
4.3 Dimension of keyway
Dimension of the shaft end keyway is in accordance with DIN 6885.
5. Connection to Power System
All geared motors are factory-adjusted for maximum voltage if not stipulated
otherwise. Make sure that the voltage on the installation site coincides with that
indicated on the rating plate of the motor. The direction of rotation may be changed
by interchanging two phases of the mains.
The geared motors are connected to the power supply system like any other
three-phase A.C. motors. There are no special instructions for Geared Motors
beyond applicable for standard electric motors. The feed lines should be of sufficient
diameter to avoid any notable drop of voltage upon starting the geared motors.
It is advisable to fit a protective motor switch with adjustable overload relays. This
switch, which is adjusted to the motor rating, cuts out all three phases in case of
overload or failure of one phase. The normal fuses can not give sufficient overload
protection.
4
phase A.C. squirrel cage motors.
Three - phase A.C. Three - phase A.C. Three - phase A.C.

Squirrel cage Squirrel cage Squirrel cage
motor star - connected motor delta - connected motor connected
for direct starting for direct starting for star - delta starting
Operating voltage = Operating voltage = Operating voltage =
high voltage rating low voltage rating low voltage rating
given on the name plate. given on the name plate. given on the name plate.
terminal box of each motor.
6. Lubrication and Lubricants
be made after approximately 300 to 500 operating hours.
ensure that it is properly tightened.
keep off dirt and to reduce wear of sealing lip.
5
Viscosity : 30°E at 50°C (abt. 250 cS)
Flash point : +230°C
Pour point : 20°C
the following characteristic:
Worked penetration : ° C NLGI

abt. 350 ASTM (measured with 50 g cone at 25
Grade O)
Drop point serviceable : Over 150°C down to abt. -30°C
Different types of grease should not be mixed.
Lubricating Table
are given in the table.
OIL CAPACITY OF GEARED MOTORS/REDUCERS
Type Design Design Design Design Design Design

of B3 & B5 B6 & B7 B8 V1 &V5 V3 & V5 Agitator Type
Gear Liters Liters Liters Liters Liters Liters
32 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1 1.7
33 0.75 1.25 1.3 2.25 2 2.7
42 0.75 1.25 1.3 2.25 2 2.7
43 1.25 2.25 2.3 3.25 3 3.7
52 1.25 2.25 2.3 4.5 4 5.8
53 1.75 3 3.25 5 4.5 6.3
62 1.75 3 3.25 6.75 5.25 8
63 2.5 4.25 4.5 7.25 7.75 8.5
72 2.5 4.5 4.75 9.5 9 13.5
73 3.75 7 7.5 11.5 10.5 15.5
82 4.5 7.5 8 17.5 17.5 24.5
83 7.5 14 14.5 22 20 27
93 10 20 21 30 28 38
103 16 30 32 45 42 61
113/123 37 63 52 120 135 148
6
LUBRICATION OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
BRAND GRADE OF OIL GREASE FOR BEARINGS
INTERNATIONAL BRAND
BRITISH PETROLEUM ENERGOL GR-XP 320 OR GR-XP 460 ENERGREASE LS 2
CASTROL ALPHA SP 320 OR ALPHA SP 460 EPL 2
CALTEX MEROPA 320 OR MEROPA 460 STARFAX PREMIUM 2
ESSO PETROLEUM SPARTAN EP 320 OR SPARTAN EP 460 BEACON 2
FUCHS RENOLIN CLP 320 OR RENOLIN CLP 460 FWA 160
MOBIL OIL CO. MOBILGEAR 632 OR MOBILGEAR 634 MOBILUX 2
SHELL CO. OMALA 320 OR OMALA 460 SHELL ALVANIA 2
INDIAN BRANDS
INDIAN OIL SERVOMESH – SP 460 OR SP 320 SERVO GEM – 2
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM PARTHAN – EP 460 OR EP 320 BEACON 2
CASTROL ALPHA SP 320 OR ALPHA SP 460 EPL 2
GULF EP LUBRICANT 460 OR 320 HD M.P. GREASE 2
BHARAT PETROLEUM AMOCAM 460 OR 320 M.P. GREASE 2
7. PERIODICAL INSPECTION / REPAIR
The frequency of inspection and repair should be different according to the operating
condition, however, please conduct inspection and repair with reference to the following
table. (It is based on the operation of 10 hrs/day.)
Inspection / Repair Frequency How to determine the item

item necessity of parts replacement
Restretch of chain 6 months If the tension of chain is loose,
restretch it.
Improper tightening 6 months If tightening of bolts is loose, tighten
additionally.
Replacement of oil 1-2 years At every overhaul, or when oil
seal. leak seal age is found outside,
replace oil seal.
Replacement of 5 years If abnormal noise occurs, replace
bearing bearing.
7
8. TROUBLE SHOOTING
Trouble Cause How to correct

Unit does not rotate in Interruption of Check motor terminal voltage or source
no load condition service voltage.
Breakage of wiring Inspect circuits and repair defect.
Open circuit exists Replace fuse, reset overload relay, check
closing breaker.
Breakage of stator Measure resistance of winding and
winding insulation, distinguish defect of winding.
Defect of gear Replace gear
Defect of key of Replace key with a new one.
shaft, sprocket or
pulley
One of three phase Check motor terminal voltage or current,
circuits is open and breakage of fuse or wiring, repair defect.
works as single
phase circuit
Load is too heavy Lower load to rated capacity or raise
capacity.
Bad contact of switch Check motor terminal voltage or current,
repair bad contact of circuit.
Motor Noisy Invasion of foreign Remove foreign particle.
rotates on continuous particle
no load load Wear or damage of Replace bearing
but trouble bearing
occurs on Wear or damage of Replace gear.
load gear
Overload Bad setting or Revise setting value, or replace with
relay acts improper selection of regular one.
overload relay
Load is too heavy Lower load to rated capacity.
8
TROUBLE SHOOTING OF GEARED MOTOR WITH BRAKE
Trouble Cause How to correct

· Brake does not Breakage of circuit Check circuit.
operate Faulty connection Check connection
Defect of D.C. source Replace
Voltage drop Check length of connection
Brake gap is too big Adjust or replace
Distortion of inner disc Replace.
· Insufficient operation 2
GD is too big Lower GD2 or raise capacity of
of brake brake geared motor.
· Braking time is too Adhesion of oil or dust to Disassemble and clean.
long inner disc
· Abnormal Torque and GD2 are too Check load condition and lower load
temperature rise big to rated capacity.
· Smoke and smell Frequency of operation is Lower frequency of operation, or
too high change specification.
Invasion of foreign Disassemble and clean.
particle in brake gap
· Motor beats Brake gap is too big Adjust brake gap
2
· Motor speed does not Torque or GD is too big Lower load to rated or raise
increase capacity.
· Thermal relay works Refer to “Brake does not operate”
9
MOTOR MOUNTED TYPE GEAR SPEED REDUCER
INTRODUCTION
Here are some essential procedures for maintenance, inspection and installation.
1. Point of Motor Mounting
Please note the following points at inspection or on overhaul.
The motor mount section of this speed reducer is confirmed to the motors of flange
type, three-phase, squirrel cage induction motor for general purpose. Therefore,
please confirm the dimension of motor flange before you fit It, as follows:
1.1 Before mounting the motor, please make sure that the combination of motor
frame number and speed reducer frame number is appropriate.
1.2 Make sure that there is no adhesion of dust on the motor shafts, then set the key
accurately. Please use the key attached to the motor shaft.
1.3 Wipe out the rust-proof paint on the mounting face of motor flange by solvent.
· Special Lubricant “Shaft Lub”
In order to prevent the fretting corrosion or cold seizure at the fitting part of input
hollow shaft of reducer, a special lubricant is already applied on the bore. Do not
clean this lubricant while inserting motor shaft. The bore is covered with suitable plug
to prevent entry of the dust. This plug has to be removed before inserting the motor
shaft.
1.4 Hang the motor horizontally (vertically for type V1), fit the motor shaft in the hollow
shaft. If fitting is not easy, do not force to fit and confirm that the motor is accurately
horizontal. (vertical) Before coupling, please make sure that “Shaft Lub“ is applied to
hollow shaft.
1.5 Tighten up bolts uniformly.
For ordering spares give following details:

1) H.P., R.P.M. and Type of Geared Motor/Gear Reducer
2) Serial Number of Geared Motor/Gear Reducer
3) Required Part No.
10
2 -STAGE FOOT MOUNTED HELICALGEARED MOTOR
98
11
3 -STAGE FOOT MOUNTED HELICALGEARED MOTOR
98
12
2 -ST GEARED REDUCER
13
3 -ST GEARED REDUCER
14
2 -STAGE AGITATOR HELICAL GEARED MOTOR
98
15
3 -STAGE AGITATOR HELICAL GEARED MOTOR
98
16
2 - STAGE FOOT MOUNTED MOTOR MOUNT HELICAL GEARED REDUCER
99
17
3 - STAGE FOOT MOUNTED MOT OR MOUNT HELICAL GEAR REDUCER
99
18
SPARE PART LIST FOR HELICAL GEARED MOTOR/REDUCER
SR.NO. DESCRIPTION SR. NO. DESCRIPTION
1 OUTPUT SHAFT 49 SPRING WASHER

2 RECTANGULAR PARALLEL KEY 50 HEXAGONAL SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
3 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS 51 ELECTRIC MOTOR
4 OIL SEAL (MI TYPE) 52 GASKET FOR ELECTRIC MOTOR
5 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING/TAPER ROLLER BEARING 53 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING/TAPER
ROLLER BEARING
6 THRUST COVER WITH OIL SEAL (EXTERNAL) 54 CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING
7 GASKET FOR THRUST COVER 55 INTERMEDIATE RING
8 HEXAGONAL SCREW 57 HEXAGONAL SCREW (LONG)
9 SPRING WASHER 58 HEXAGONAL SCREW (SHORT)
10 GEAR CASE COVER/AGITATOR FLANGE 59 SPRING WASHER
11 GEAR CASE 60 HEXAGONAL SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
12 GEAR CASE COVER GASKET (FRONT & REAR) 61 HEXAGONAL SOCKET HEAD CSK SCREW
13 HEXAGONAL SCREW 62 HEXAGONAL SCREW
14 SPRING WASHER 63 SPRING WASHER
15 THRUST COVER WITH & WITHOUT OIL SEAL 64 DISTANCE PIECE
16 RECTANGULAR PARALLEL KEY 65 RECTANGULAR PARALLEL KEY
17 SPACER 66 LOCK WASHER
18 CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING 67 SPRING WASHER
19 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS 68 HEXAGONAL SCREW
20 INTERNAL CIRCLIPS 69 HEXAGONAL SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
21 INTERNAL CIRCLIPS 70 HEXAGONAL SOCKET HEAD CSK SCREW
22 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS 71 INPUT HOLLOW SHAFT
23 DOUBLE ROW ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING 72 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS FOR 1ST PINION
24 RECTANGULAR PARALLEL KEY 73 OIL SEAL (MI TYPE)
25 SPACER 74 INPUT COVER FOR HOLLOW INPUT
26 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING 75 EXTERNAL CIRCLIP FOR BEARING
27 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS 76 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING
28 INTERNAL CIRCLIPS 77 GREASE NIPPLE
29 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS 78 EXTERNAL CIRCLIP FOR BEARING
30 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING 79 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING
31 DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING 80 OIL SEAL (MI TYPE)
32 SPACER 81 GASKET BETWEEN INPUT COVER & FLANGE
33 RECTANGULAR PARALLEL KEY 82 FLANGE
34 EXTERNAL CIRCLIPS 83 SPRING WASHER
35 DRAIN PLUG 84 HEXAGONAL BOLT
36 OIL LEVEL INDICATOR 85 HEXAGONAL SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
37 BREATHER PLUG 86 SOLID INPUT SHAFT
38 EYE BOLT 87 INPUT COVER FOR SOLID INPUT SHAFT
39 CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING FOR 113/123 88 INSIDE THRUST COVER FOR INPUT SIDE
40 SPACER FOR 113/123 89 HEXAGONAL BOLT FOR INSIDE THRUST
COVER
41 1ST PINION 90 SPRING WASHER
42 1ST WHEEL 91 GASKET FOR INPUT COVER & INSIDE THRUST
COVER
43 2ND HELICAL PINION SHAFT (FOR 2 STAGE ONLY) 92 OUTSIDE THRUST COVER FOR INPUT SIDE
44 2ND HELICAL PINION SHAFT (FOR 3 STAGE ONLY) 93 HEXAGONAL BOLT FOR OUTSIDE THRUST
COVER
45 2ND HELICAL WHEEL 94 SPRING WASHER
46 3RD HELICAL PINION SHAFT 96 INTERNAL CIRCLIPS
47 2ND/3RD HELICAL WHEEL 97 RECTANGULAR PARALLEL KEY
48 INTERNAL CIRCLIP 98 BAFFLE PLATE
99 BREATHER PLUG
19
OUR MANUFACTURING RANGE
Automatic Weighing and Bag Filling Machines
Microprocessor based Electronic Belt Weighers
Microprocessor based Electronic Weigh Feeders
.
Cement, Chemicals, Fertilizers and Steel Industry.
Electronic Metal Detectors

For detection of metallic contamination in bulk products.
Industrial Magnets
Automatic Truck and Wagon Loaders

For automatic loading of filled bags of cement, urea, etc.
direct into trucks and wagons.
from 0.16 HP to 125 HP
Heliworm Geared Motors/Gear Boxes/Gear Reducer

Helibevel Geared Motors/Gear Boxes/Gear Reducer

: SELLING AGENT :
EMTICI ENGINEERING LIMITED
REGISTERED OFFICE :
: BRANCHES : Akaaish Printing & Stationery - V. V. Nagar

AHMEDABAD : ASANSOL : BANGLORE :
Phone : (079) 26406685, 26406686 Fax : 26401363 Phone : (0341) 2205901, 2211726 Fax : 2202038 Phone : (080) 22260219, 22250082 Fax : 22281834
E-mail : sales@ahdemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesasn@asnemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesbgl@bglsemtici.elecon.com
BILASPUR : CHENNAI : DHANBAD :

Phone : (07752) 228922, 224122 Fax :223188 Phone : (044) 24349497, 24349237 Fax : 24349643 Phone : (0326) 2306283, 2302320 Fax : 2302320
E-mail : salesbil@bilemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesmad@mademtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesdhn@dhnemtici.elecon.com
JAMSHEDPUR : KOLKATA : MUMBAI-1 (Churchgate) :

Phone : (0657) 2428138, 2435382 Fax : 2428015 Phone : (033) 24761861, 24760876 Fax : 24761831 Phone : (022) 22821315, 22820725 Fax : 22870791
E-mail : sales_jns@jmpemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salescal@calemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesbom@bomemtici.elecon.com
MUMBAI-2 (Goregaon) : NAGPUR : NEW DELHI :

Phone : (022) 26999132, 33, 34 Fax : (022) 28751133 Phone : (0712) 2540771, 2531601 Fax : 2554982 Phone : (011) 23414339, 40, 41 Fax : 23709046
E-mail : salesgorg@bomemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesnag@nagemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesdel@delemtici.elecon.com
PUNE : SECUNDERABAD : VADODARA :

Phone : (020) 24329147 Fax : 24329055 Phone : (040) 27844748, 27845250 Fax : 27848317 Phone / Fax : (0265) 2750739, 40
E-mail : salespune@puneemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salessec@seceemtici.elecon.com E-mail : salesbrd@brdemtici.elecon.com
ELECON AUSTRALIA : ELECON SINGAPUR PTE. LTD. : ELECON SOUTH AFRICA :

Phone : 61-2-9521 3511 Fax : 61-2-9521-3522 Phone : +65 2278258, 2278425 Fax : +6502278942 Phone / Fax : +27 (0) 11-4771776 Mobile : +27 (0) 829006829
E-mail : thall@aus.elecon.com Gen. E-mail : elecon_sing@eleconsingapore.elecon.com E-mail : gdramsay@mweb.co.za
EFS100TS
AUTOMATIC GAIN-IN-WEIGHT
BATCHING SYSTEM
USER MANUAL
Handbook Code E12906

for software release v5.9 and later
Manual_EFS100TS_Eng01-v6.1.doc page1 of 57 saved 24.07.2015

CONTENTS
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 4
DISPLAY AND CONTROL .................................................................................................. 5
OPERATION.......................................................................................................................... 9
USER MESSAGES .............................................................................................................. 10
FILLING CYCLE ................................................................................................................. 12
ALARMS.............................................................................................................................. 16
WEIGHT ALARMS ............................................................................................................. 16
FILLING CYCLE ALARMS ................................................................................................ 17
EJECTION CYCLE START FROM KEYBOARD ............................................................. 18
FILLING CYCLE START FROM KEYBOARD................................................................. 18
CLEANING SPOUT ............................................................................................................ 18
FORCED OUTPUT AND INPUT CONTROL .................................................................... 19
INPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1 ........................................................................................... 19
OUTPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1 ....................................................................................... 19
RECIPES ................................................................................................................................. 20
EDITING NOMINAL WEIGHT BATCH VALUE ............................................................. 20
CHANGING CURRENT RECIPE .................................................................................... 20
EDITING RECIPE VALUES ............................................................................................ 21
RELATION BETWEEN NOMINAL WEIGHT, SETPOINT, PRESETPOINT AND
DEPRESSURIZATION POINT......................................................................................... 26
COPY OF RECIPES ......................................................................................................... 28
MINI STATISTICS ............................................................................................................ 28
SYSTEM BATCHING PARAMETERS .............................................................................. 29
ROTARY TURBINE SYSTEM BATCHING PARAMETERS............................................. 30
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM BATCH PARAMETERS .................................................... 31
FLASH UTILITY ................................................................................................................. 33
DIAGNOSTICS PAGE ........................................................................................................ 34
Modbus Diagnostics ......................................................................................................... 35
Power Supply and Load Cells Converter Diagnostics .................................................... 36
Interrupt Diagnostics........................................................................................................ 36
TEST UTILITY .................................................................................................................... 37
ZEROING DEVICE WITH TARE FUNCTION .................................................................. 37
CALIBRATION MENU ........................................................................................................ 38
INITIAL ZEROING ........................................................................................................... 39
CONVERTER MONITOR ................................................................................................. 40
REFERENCE CONVERTER VOLTAGE MONITOR ....................................................... 41
GENERAL SCALE PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 42
SCALE CALIBRATION .................................................................................................... 43
LOADING DEFAULT RECIPES DATA AND PARAMETERS ........................................ 45
VERIFICATION STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 46
VERIFICATION................................................................................................................ 46
DR16 MODULE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTACTS................................................................ 47
INPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1 ........................................................................................... 47
OUTPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1 ....................................................................................... 47
RS422 SERIAL LINE CONNECTION (MODBUS JBUS PROTOCOL) .................................... 48

LOAD CELL CONNECTION .............................................................................................. 49
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................... 50
ANALOGUE DATA .......................................................................................................... 50
DISPLAY SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 51
COMMUNICATION ......................................................................................................... 51
POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................................. 51
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................. 51
ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS AND COMPONENTS ......................................................... 52
PLATE 1 – EXPLODED VIEW OF DISPLAY AND CONVERTER CARD ........................ 52
PLATE 2 – EQUIPMENT INTERNAL CARD WIRING....................................................... 53
PLATE 3 - EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL WIRING .................................................................. 54
PANEL CUTOUT................................................................................................................... 55
PANEL FIXING ..................................................................................................................... 56
PASSWORDS ......................................................................................................................... 57

OVERVIEW
The EFS100TS automatic gain-in-weight batching system is controlled by a
microprocessor device that includes a load cell converter-display.
The microprocessor device consists of a electronic device with color 4.3” graphic
display, touch screen functionality and input/output module can-bus driver.
The display normally shows the actual weight, tare condition, exact zero, no motion
weight, actual recipe and batching functional status and settings.
Batching cycles are fully automatic. the microprocessor controls and manages the
various phases of the batching process, such as automatic zeroing before starting
the cycle, high velocity filling and fine finishing, and lastly removal of bags.
All process parameters are programmable through the graphic keyboard.
The front panel of the device contains the graphic display, as soon as the power on
execution has finished the display shows the version of the software page:
Software version figures/pushbutton

DISPLAY AND CONTROL
After few seconds from power on shows the main page with the followings icons and
figures:
Gross/Net weight icon/pushbutton

Tare icon/pushbutton
No Motion icon
Exact zero icon/pushbutton
Actual Recipe indicator/pushbutton
Actual Batch nominal value/pushbutton
Filling cycle bar graph
Filling cycle status display/pushbutton

User message display/pushbutton
Weight indicator/pushbutton
Reset pushbutton

1. Gross/Net weight icon:
1.1. G means Gross weight on the weight indicator,
1.2. N means Net weight on the weight indicator, pressing the symbol N the tare
value is zeroed and the Gross weight is achieved
2. Tare icon:
2.1. pressing the symbol T the tare value is entered and the indicator shows the
Net weight, pushbutton permits manual subtraction of the gross weight from
the load. The command is only enabled in no motion conditions, and zeroes
the weight display. Subtraction of the tare is operated over the entire scale,
and is determined to the precision of the internal count, greater than 10 per
visible divisions
3. No Motion icon:
3.1. the symbol appears when the weight is in no motion condition
4. Exact zero icon:
4.1. the symbol appears orange to indicate exact zero, or if the zero deviation is
no greater than 0.25 of a division
4.2. pressing the symbol, when displaying gross weight, or in the absence of a
tare value, zeroes the system (instrumental zero). The command is only
accepted in no motion condition when the gross weight is close to the
calibrated zero, within a band between -1% and +3% of the end scale. In
presence of tare value pressing the symbol act as the Gross pushbutton
5. Actual Recipe indicator:
5.1. the figures indicate the actual recipe selected
5.2. pressing the symbol, it is possible to change the recipe selection, see
CHANGING CURRENT RECIPE
6. Actual batch nominal value:
6.1. the figures indicate the actual batch nominal weight value
6.2. pressing the symbol, it is possible to change value, see EDITING NOMINAL
WEIGHT BATCH VALUE.
7. Filling cycle bar graph:
7.1. shows the filling value in bar graph mode
8. Filling cycle status display:
8.1. shows the filling status, see FILLING CYCLE
8.2. pressing the pushbutton to change the content of the display, see USER
MESSAGES
9. User message display:
9.1. shows user messages, see USER MESSAGES
9.2. pressing the pushbutton to change the content of the display, see USER
MESSAGES
10. Weight indicator:
10.1. the figures indicates the actual net or gross weight
10.2. pressing the pushbutton to give access to the MAIN MENU
11. Reset pushbutton :
11.1. pressing the pushbutton to Reset alarms and the filling cycle

MAIN MENU
Press on Weight Indicator soft pushbutton to enter, the display shows the main
menu:
The items EJECT, FILL, CLEAN are direct commands for the packer machine,
MAINTENANCE permits the output forcing (see later).
Access to items is gained by pressing a dedicated soft key. A message referring to
the relevant function will be shown on the display, a soft keyboard appears and the
operator is prompted to enter data or to make selections; in both cases the operator
must type some digits on the soft keyboard.
Example:
During any data entry, it should be remembered that:
1 - The “” and “” keys move the cursor forward and backward, respectively, of
one character; used to modify or correct data.
2 - The “” key confirms displayed data.
3 - Some functions feature control limits (upper and lower) for the entered values. In
this case after confirmation the following messages are displayed: "Too High" if the
entered value exceeds the upper limit or "Too Low" if it is below the lower limit. The
operator must press the “” key and repeat data entry.
4 - Usually the keyboard make digits, for insert alphabetical text it must hit the
“ALPHA” (“.”) key, followed by the desired character key as many time as showed by
the table below. It’s possible to move the cursor in the text row by “” and “” keys.

At the end of insert it must hit the “” key.
Table of alphabetic keys, after pressing “ALPHA”
Key characters in sequence

1 ABC1
2 DEF2
3 GHI3
4 JKL4
5 MNO5
6 PQR6
7 STU7
8 VWX8
9 YZ/9
0 _%-0
ALPHA . .,+
5- Some functions feature the following menus:

"1:Print 2:Edit 3:Clear_"
To choose the desired function press the corresponding key (1,2 ...) followed
by the “” key; to cancel the function the operator shall merely press the “” key.
Press the menu EXIT pushbutton to return to the main page.

OPERATION
After switching on, the software version appears on the display for about 2 seconds.
During this time the instrument runs a complete test on the card, and if errors are
found, it displays and error message.
The test (also carried out during normal function) includes a check on the power
supply, program memory, RAM memory, the A/D converter and the FLASH memory
containing all parameters (function and calibration) that must be saved when the
instrument is not powered up.
If no errors are detected, after the switch on message, the instrument checks the
displays, after about few seconds, shows the main page, the scale displays the gross
weight and is ready for use.
If the gross weight is negative by over 50 divisions, the display shows the error
message "Underrange".
If the weight exceeds the end scale by more than the maximum admissible value of
+9 divisions, the display shows the error message "Overrange".
The program of the instrument uses variable integration over several measurements
to display the weight. If the scale is moving the display shows the instantaneous
value of the most recent measurement, whereas when still, the displayed value is the
result of the last 8 measurements. With scale in no motion state the " " icon
lights on.

USER MESSAGES
After switching on sequence, the standard visualization on user and filling status
displays show :
Progressive batch counter

Nominal batch weight
Actual selected recipe
Tp 1 25.00kg N 0
Waiting start
Actual filling cycle status
Pressing User or Filling cycle pushbuttons the displays show in sequence:

Actual real set point value
Tp 1 25.00kg Sp 24.90
Waiting start
Actual correction value

Actual tare value entered
Tare: 1.35kg Cor 0.46

Waiting start
Filling time in seconds

Average filling flow in kg/s
Actual filling flow at 1 s
F 0.20 1.92ks 13.0

OPC 350-1
Denomination of the recipe material
Actual status of digital inputs
in 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
ou 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Actual status of digital outputs

Address of the unit into network
Module Address : 1
EFS100TS Sw.Ver 6.0
Software version
Device type
Weight of Last Bag
Last Bag (Kg) : 25.2

Total: 8.1 Fine:3.2
Fine Filling Time

Total Filling Time
Max Flux during Fine Filling
Fine (Kg/s): 1.5

Coarse (kg/s): 10.2
Max Flux during Coarse Filling
Total cycle time used to compute the new switching point

from coarse to fine
New preset point from coarse

to fine computed in relation
to coarse flow
Pr:21.52 Kg T: 9.58 s
TL: 5.41 s TH: 6.2 s
Cycle time of switching from coarse

to preset low point (fine flow)
Cycle time of switching from coarse

to preset high point (fine flow)

FILLING CYCLE
The filling cycle involves several states that can are displayed on the status line of
the display.
Action state n.
------------------------------------ -------------
Main 0
Waiting Start 1
Wait Lock Bag 2
Wait Tare 3
Turbine Delay 4
Begin of Load 5
Set Flow 6
Depressurizing 7
Preset Flow 8
End of Load 9
Nozzle Cleaning 10
Wait Weight Stabil 11
Wait Eject Command 12
Record Weight Value 13
Unlock Bag 14
Ejection 15
Wait Unload 16
Emptying Delay 23
Emptying 24
Unblocking 25
Refilling 28
There are 6 alarm states and 1 test state:
Stop for Weight Alarm (BLOCKED-FAULTS) 17

Stop for Timeout (BLOCKED-TIMEOUT) 18
Stop for Out of Tolerance (BLOCKED-OUT TOLER) 19
Stop for Breaker Off (BLOCKED-BREAKER OFF) 20
Stop for Loss Weight (BLOCKED-LOSS WEIGHT) 26
Stop for Bad Init Weight (BLOCKED BAG WEIGHT 27
Input Output Test 21

After switching on, the scale reaches state 1 and stands-by for the START signal.
This signal is only given after the bag has been inserted on the filler spout.
With START enabled, the scale activates the BAG LOCK and secures the bag to the
spout, and moves on the state 2.
After the programmable BAG PRESENT CHECK DELAY time, the system checks for
the BAG PRESENT signal, and the cycle moves on to state 3, for tare setting, which
cancels the weight of the bag.
If the Gross Weight is out of minimum-maximum limit (programmable value) the

system goes in alarm state ( 27-BLOCKED BAG WEIGHT ), and the user must reset
the cycle.
In the BAG present signal is not present, the system returns to state 1. Note that this
signal is monitored throughout the batching cycle, until the bag is released. If the
signal is lost during any phase of the cycle, the system immediately returns to state
1. Also note that the tare is set only if the weight on the spout does NOT exceed the
programmed “Minimum Weight”, otherwise it is considered as resuming (with manual
filling command) a batching cycle previously interrupted due to a power-out, and the
system immediately moves on to filling state.
After setting tare, the system moves on to state 4 with activation of the inflatable
sleeve (SLEEVE output), which clamps the bag, and the spout feeder shutter is fully
opened (FAST FILL and FINE FILL outputs activated).
On reaching the “TURBINE START DELAY” time the system moves on to state 5,
activating the material feed turbine (TURBINE output). The bag filling starts at this
point. Before moving on to state 4 the system checks the “SPOUT CLEAN AT
START CYCLE” parameter, if this is 1 as programmed the system shifts to state 10
(spout cleaning), after which time (see later), the system moves to state 4.
If the bag does not exceed the set “Minimum Weight” within the programmed
“FILLING START CHECK” time, the system executes the last part of the tipping
phase (state 13) and returns to state 1.
If the minimum weight is exceeded, the system moves on to state 6, rapid filling, and
the outputs of the previous state remain active until reaching the slow-down value, at
which the system shifts to state 8. In state 6 the system also checks whether the
“TURBINE STOP TIME” has a value other than zero, then on reaching the
“TURBINE STOP” value it moves on to state 7 for the set time. In this state the
turbine stops to permit depressurization of the bag. After this time the system returns
to state 6 or state 8, according to the effective batch value.
In state 8 the FAST FILL output is disabled and the FINE FILL output enabled, so the
material feeder shutter is partially closed causing a reduction in material flow-rate.
If the system does not shift to state 8 within the programmed “FILLING CYCLE
CHECK” time, a fast fill TIMEOUT alarm activates and the system shifts immediately
to state 18. The only way to exit state 18 is by pressing the RESET key.
Likewise, if the final weight is not reached in state 8 within the same “FILLING
CYCLE CHECK” time, the system shifts immediately to state 18.

If the weight is reached before the end of the above time, the TURBINE, SLEEVE
and FINE FILL outputs are disabled and the system shifts to state 9, or batching end.
From this state the system moves to state 10, spout cleaning, if the “SOUT
CLEANING AT END CYCLE” parameter is enabled. If not it shifts directly to state 11.
In state 10, the SPOUT CLEANING output is enabled for the programmed “SPOUT
CLEANING TIME”, after which the system moves on to state 11. In this state it
awaits activation of the DISCHARGING input. After this it moves to state 12, to check
whether the weight is within the set tolerance range. If the weight (for three
consecutive time) is out of tolerance the system see for the “WRONG BAG FLAG":
if it is programmed to 0 (default value) the system shifts to state 14: UNLOCK BAG
and displays a message alarm: "BAG OUT OF LIMIT".
If the flag is at 1, the system shifts to state 19, from which exit is only possible by
pressing the RESET key.
Else if the weight is within the range, the system moves to state 13, and deactivates
the BAG LOCK output. In both cases the weight is recorded and made available to
any supervision systems.
After the “DISCHARGING DELAY” time, the system moves on to state 14 activating
the DISCHARGING output. In this state it waits for activation of the SADDLE UP
input, upon which it shifts to state 15 activating the DISCHARGING and SADDLE
outputs for the programmed “DISCHARGING TIME”.
The system then moves to state 16 (the last state of the batching cycle), and waits
for the weight to return below the set minimum, or the bag is effectively emptied,
before returning to state 1.
If WEIGHT ALARMS triggers during the cycle, all outputs are disabled and the
system shifts immediately to state 17, from which exit is only possible by pressing the
RESET key.
In weight tolerance check state 12, the system reads the weight obtained after
automatically correcting for the quantity of material still dropping. The correction is
applied, or not applied, according to the value of the automatic correction parameter.
REFILLING CYCLE:
When the weight is checked, if it is less then the lower tolerance, and if the refilling is
enabled, it starts the refilling cycle that is formed of N (programmable) cycles. Before
starting of refilling cicle, the correction is stored in recipe parameters.
At every cycle, FAST FILL and FINE FILL output are activated, after the Turbine
delay the Turbine out is activated for N (programmable) pulses. On and Off pulse
time are programmable. At the end of every cycle, and after the weight stabilization
time, if the weight has exceeded the lower tolerance, the refilling stops, else a new
cycle is generated until the ending of programmed cycles. In any case the system
moves to state 12.

AUTOMATIC COARSE ► FINE SWITCHING ADJUSTEMENT
Regulation depends by four programmable recipe parameters:
1. 02.PreSet: This is the upper threshold value ( WH = Set - PreSet) beyond which
in any case the system switch in Fine Feed
2. 16.PreSetSp: This is the lower threshold value ( WL = Set - PreSetSp) below
which still works in Coarse Feed
3. 62.TIM to PreSetSp: (T1) represents the minimum estimated time required for the
achievement of the lower threshold (WL) under conditions of fast flow rate
(Coarse Feed)
4. 63.TIM to PreSet: (T2) represents the maximum time expected for the
achievement of the lower threshold (WL) under conditions of slow flow rate
(Coarse Feed)
The system begins to work in Coarse Flow: when it reaches the lower threshold
(WL), the time from the start is stored -->TS: there are several possibilities:
1) The time (TS) is lower than T1 → immediately we switch in Fine Feed rate
2) The time (TS) is greater than T2 → We switch when the threshold (WH) is
exceeded
3) The time (TS) is between T1 and T2 → the switch level is calculated by the
following formula:
threshold switch level= WL +( (WH – WL) * (TS – T1)/(T2-T1))
In this way linearly adjust the trigger threshold as a function of the flow velocity.

ALARMS
The system generates two classes of alarms: WEIGHT ALARMS and FILLING
CYCLE ALARMS and are displayed with a messages on the weight area or filling
status areas of the display.
WEIGHT ALARMS
This class includes errors generated by malfunctions in electronic cards and/or load
cells, if the scale is in a filling cycle when an alarm occurs, the system shifts
immediately to state 17.
The alarms in this class are:
"CONVERTER ERROR":
A/D converter error, or load cell cable broken or disconnected.
"POWER SUPPLY":
power alarm, check power supplies on EF10TS card.
"RAM MEMORY":
RAM memory error (data memory), replace card.
"DATA LOST": parameter loss with back-up battery error. This error can occur only
on switching on in 2 cases:
1 – on first-time starting, in this case simply program the scale or load the
defaults data.
2 – after first-time switch on, it is necessary to replace the RAM memory
battery and reset scale parameters.
"FLASH MEMORY":
FLASH memory error (program memory), try to reload graphics and
application programs, if doesn’t succeed replace the card
"CAN BUS ERR.AD: 1":
I/O error, check DR16 input/output card and can bus cable
"UNDERRANGE":
underweight, the gross weight value is less than 50 divisions with respect to
instrumental zero.
"OVERRANGE" :
overweight, the gross weight value is greater than 9 divisions with respect to
end scale.
"ERRPR2" :
LASH memory content incorrect (may also be due to a programming error),
recalibrate the scale.
"ERR Po" :
test number error, the test number is more than 1 division over the number
saved during calibration. Recalibrate the scale.
"ERR P-" :
test number error, the test number is less than 1 division under the number
saved during calibration. Recalibrate the scale.
The last two alarms can only appear after the test number test, for about three
seconds, after which they generate a “CONVERTER ERROR” type alarm.
If the batch is already started and the machine is in cycle state 17, press RESET,
pushbutton once the cause is remedied, and manually reset the bag.

FILLING CYCLE ALARMS
Filling cycle alarms can only occur during filling and are:
- alarms for expiry of a set time, or TIMEOUT ALARMS. These occur when in any
state of the cycle the set maximum time for that state is exceeded. In general due to
product feed failure.
- out-of-tolerance alarms, when the real weight obtained after filling exceeds the set
tolerance limits.
Both types of alarm cause immediate interruption of the filling cycle and shift to an
alarm state, as previously described. The weight display continues to show the real
weight while the monitor shows:
 " BLOCKED-TIMEOUT ": Filling timeout.

 " BLOCKED-OUT TOLER ": Tolerance error
 " BLOCKED-LOSS WEIGHT": Loss of bag weight
 " BLOCKED-BREAKER OFF ": Breaker of turbine is off
 " BLOCKED-BAG WEIGHT ": Start Gross weight out of limit
To silence these types of alarm, press the RESET pushbutton.

If timeout alarm " BLOCKED-TIMEOUT " is active, it means that the batch has not
been completed but has exceeded minimum weight, so, once the cause of the fault
is found and remedied, filling may resume without removing the bag. Indeed, if the
weight on the spout is greater than the set minimum, the tare is not calculated and
the system shifts immediately to fast filling.
If out-of-tolerance alarm " BLOCKED-OUT TOLER " is active, the batch is outside
the allowed tolerance, so it is necessary to remove the bag by hand, before pressing
RESET. It is also necessary to check function of the material shutter, since low
speed feed failure could be the probable cause of the error.
The " BLOCKED-LOSS WEIGHT" alarm usually happen when the bag become
broken.

EJECTION CYCLE START FROM KEYBOARD
From MAIN MENU press EJECT, immediately the ejection cycle starts, display return
to the main page. The cycle will stop after bag ejection.
FILLING CYCLE START FROM KEYBOARD
From MAIN MENU press FILL, immediately the filling cycle starts, display return to
the main page. The cycle will stop at the end of filling.
CLEANING SPOUT
To unblocking the spout it must open completely the feeding valve and the nozzles
and, after a delay of 1.5 seconds, start the turbine
From MAIN MENU press CLEAN, immediately the cleaning (unblocking) spout cycle
starts, display return to the main page.
The cycle will stop only when pressing the RESET pushbutton (or with external
digital input).

FORCED OUTPUT AND INPUT CONTROL
From MAIN MENU press MAINTENANCE, the display shows the soft keyboard:
Insert the User Password and confirm with “◄┘", then the display shows
Actual status of digital inputs
in 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
ou 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Actual status of digital outputs

If the corresponding digital input is closed (ON, 24Vdc) or open (OFF, 0Vdc) values 1
or 0, respectively will be displayed on the top line. Press the corresponding key to
enable and disable the output as follows: [1] key for output 1, [2] key for output 2,
etc. up to the 8th output.. 1 indicates the enabled output (ON, 24Vdc) while 0
indicates the disabled one (0Vdc). See the DR16 CARD for the input output lists.
Pressing ▲ (up arrow) you can switch between the address CAN1 and CAN2.
INPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1

1 (i0.0) Start proxy switch (bag hold)
2 (i0.1) Bag Discharge
3 (i0.2) Blocked Bag Sensor
4 (i0.3) Motor Over Load (breaker)
5 (i0.4) Sort1
6 (i0.5) Sort2
7 (i0.6) Feedback Enable
8 (i0.7) Reset
OUTPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1

1 (q0.0) Motor On (Turbine)
2 (q0.1 Bag Discharge
3 (q0.2) Spout Ready
4 (q0.3) Bag Hold
5 (q0.4) Coarse Feed
6 (q0.5) Fine Feed & Impeller Aeration
7 (q0.6) Nozzle Aeration
8 (q0.7) Timed Fluidification

RECIPES
The batching program has 32 programmable recipes, containing parameters that can
be modified by the user for dosing the recipe. The recipes are numbered from 1 to
32 and may be enabled and/or modified through the instrument soft pushbutton
Recipe, as described in DISPLAY AND CONTROL.
EDITING NOMINAL WEIGHT BATCH VALUE
Press the Actual Batch pushbutton, the display shows the soft keyboard :
Enter the new batch value and confirm it with the "◄┘" key., the display shows the
Progressive batch counter, enter new progressive counter value (i.e. 0) and/or
confirm with "◄┘".
CHANGING CURRENT RECIPE
Press the Actual Recipe pushbutton, the display shows the soft keyboard :
enter the new current recipe number, and confirm with “◄┘" to activate the recipe.
Attention ! The recipe number is forced by digital inputs Sort1 Sort2!

When all digital inputs are zero, the recipe selection is allowed, but if they are not
zero the recipe selection is forced according the following table:
Recipe forced Sort2 Sort1

- 0 0
1 0 1
2 1 0
3 1 1
EDITING RECIPE VALUES
Recipe values modification (except for nominal batch) is enabled after entering the
user password, from MAIN MENU press RECIPE, the display shows:
Insert the User Password and confirm with “◄┘", then the first parameter (0.1 Set) is
ready to enter and/or modify.
It is possible to quit the editing by touching the editing area itself

Rotary turbine batching parameters
(xx = recipe number)
Code Parameter Ud Range Step Default

m
PR.xx.01 Set kg 1-60 0.02 50.00
PR.xx.02 Preset upper point threshold WH kg 1-60 0.02 7.00
PR.xx.03 After flow kg 0-10 0.02 0.00
PR.xx.04 Correction kg 0-10 0.02 0.00
PR.xx.05 Positive Tolerance kg 0-10 0.02 1.00
PR.xx.06 Negative Tolerance kg 0-10 0.02 0.50
PR.xx.09 Maximum Correction kg 0-10 0,02 1.30
PR.xx.10 Minimum Correction kg 0-10 0,02 1.30
PR.xx.11 Ext. Correction kg 0-10 0,02 0.00
PR.xx.13 Loss compensation kg 0-1 0.02 0.06
PR.xx.14 Flow Filling Reference Kg/s 0-50 11.0
PR.xx.15 Flow Filling Hysteresis Kg/s 0-50 1.0
PR.xx 16 Preset lower point threshold WL Kg 1-60 0.02 12.00
PR.xx.17 Refill Pulses num 0-9 3
PR.xx.18 Refill Cycles num 0-9 2
PR.xx.20 Enable Automatic Correction (internal) num 0-1 0
PR.xx.21 Enable Clean spout at start cycle 0-1 0
PR.xx.22 Enable Clean spout at end cycle 0-1 0
PR.xx.23 Enable Refilling enable 0-1 0
PR.xx.24 Enable Fluidification 0-1 0
PR.xx.25 Fine fill mode 0-1 0
PR.xx.26 Coarse refill 0-1 0
PR.xx.27 Enable External Correction 0-1 0
PR.xx.50 Delay from start to lock bag s 0-100 0.1 0.7
PR.xx.51 Tare stabilization time s 0-100 0.1 0.4
PR.xx.52 Ejection delay s 0-100 0.01 0.0
PR.xx.53 Ejection time s 0-100 0.1 0.8
PR.xx.54 Turbine run delay s 0-100 0.1 0.1
PR.xx.55 Turbine stop time(in depressurizing) s 0-100 0.1 0.0
PR.xx.56 Spout cleaning time s 0-100 0.1 0.0
PR.xx.57 Final batch stabilization time s 0-100 0.1 0.5
PR.xx.58 Batch start check time s 0-100 0.1 3.0
PR.xx.59 Batching cycle check time s 0-6000 1 30.0
PR.xx.60 Turbine On Refilling Time s 0-100 0.1 0.3
PR.xx.61 Turbine Off Refilling Time s 0-100 0.1 0.4
PR.xx.62 Min.Time for WL of coarse flow rate s 0-100 0.1 3.2
PR.xx.63 Max.Time for WL of coarse flow rate s 0-100 0.1 4.8
PR.xx.64 Time Flow Compensation s 0-100 0.1 0.25

Description of recipe parameters
(xx = recipe number)
Code Parameter Description
PR.xx.01 Set Nominal net value batch weight
PR.xx.02 Preset upper point Switching point from coarse flow to fine flow at
threshold WH standard coarse flow (see par. xx.62- xx.63).
The reduction point (Preset point) will be:
Presetpoint = Setpoint - Preset PR.xx.02)
PR.xx.03 After flow Applied correction value of drip-off material, the
real setpoint will be:
Setpoint = nominal – (after_flow +
automatic_correction + external_correction)
PR.xx.04 Automatic Correction Applied automatic correction value
PR.xx.05 Positive Tolerance Maximum admissible error of batching > nominal,

if after 3 consecutive doses out of positive
tolerance, the next filling stops with error.
PR.xx.06 Negative Tolerance Maximum admissible error of batching < nominal,
if after 3 consecutive doses out of negative
tolerance, the next filling stops with error.
PR.xx.09 Maximum Correction Maximum admissible Correction applied on the
average of PR.92 number of bag fill cycles
PR.xx.10 Minimum Correction Maximum negative admissible Correction applied
on the average of PR.92 number of bag fill
cycles
PR.xx.11 External Correctiorn Correction by the Check Weigher
PR.xx.13 Loss Compensation Applied correction for the loss of material during
transport of the bag
PR.xx.14 Flow Filling Reference Reference flux in fast filling for enable (if flux is
lower) the fluidification
PR.xx.15 Flow Filling Hysteresis hysteresis flux in fast filling for enable (if flux is
lower) the fluidification.
If (flux > Flow Fill.Ref.+ Hysteresis) then

Fluidification output = OFF
If (flux < Flow Fill.Ref.- Hysteresis) then

Fluidification output = ON
PR.xx.16 Preset lower threshold WL Switching point from coarse flow to fine flow at
very fast coarse flow (see par. xx.62- xx.63).
The reduction point (Preset point) will be:
Presetpoint = Setpoint – Preset(PR.xx.16)
PR.xx.17 Refill Pulses Refill number of Pulses During Refilling
PR.xx.18 Refill Cycle Refill number of Cycles During Refilling

PR.xx.20 Automatic correction Enable =1
PR.xx.21 Clean spout at cycle start Enable =1
PR.xx.22 Clean spout at end cycle Enable =1
PR.xx.23 Refilling enable Enable =1
PR.xx.24 Fluidification enable Enable =0 only in function of flux during coarse

filling
Enable =1 in function of flux during coarse filling,
always on during fine filling
PR.xx.25 Fine Fill Mode Valid on preset and refilling phase:
if = 0 valve coarse-fine sequence
if = 1 valve fine only sequence
PR.xx.26 Coarse Refill Valid on refilling phase:
if = 0 no action
if = 1 and parameter PR.xx.60 (Turbine On
Refilling Time) is 0.0 then open gross valve but
turbine motor remain in stop
PR.xx.27 External correction Enable =1, if this parameter is 1, the PR.xx.20
is automatically set to 0 to avoid the two
corrections at the same time.
PR.xx.50 Delay from start to lock Delay time from start to lock bag (bag hold)
bag
PR.xx.51 Tare stabilization time Execution delay time
PR.xx.52 Ejection delay Execution delay time
PR.xx.53 Ejection time Execution time
PR.xx.54 Turbine Start Execution delay time to start the turbine
PR.xx.55 Turbine stop time Turbine stop time, if PR.xx.06 >0
PR.xx.56 Spout cleaning time Execution time, if PR.xx.21 =1 or PR.xx.22 =1

PR.xx.57 Final batch stabilization Check delay time
time
PR.xx.58 Start batch check time Maximum time in batch start cycle(timeout)
PR.xx.59 Batching cycle check time Maximum time in full batching cycle (timeout)
PR.xx.60 Turbine On Refilling Time Turbine ON Pulse Time during refilling
PR.xx.61 Turbine Off Refilling Time Turbine OFF Pulse Time during refilling
PR.xx.62 MinimumTime for WL of Represents the minimum estimated time
coarse flow rate required for the achievement of the lower
threshold (WL) during the fast flow rate (coarse
feed rate)

PR.xx.63 Maximum Time for WL of Represents the maximum estimated time
coarse flow rate required for the achievement of the lower
threshold (WL) during the fast flow rate (coarse
feed rate)
PR.xx.64 Flow Compensation Time When <> 0 the fine filling stops at computed
actual flow rate.
Anticipat (kg) = time x flow

RELATION BETWEEN NOMINAL WEIGHT, SETPOINT, PRESETPOINT AND
DEPRESSURIZATION POINT.
(xx.04. automatic correction is supposed = 0)

set (nominal weight)
Weight afterflow
real setpoint = set - afterflow
(filling stops)
depressurization point = real setpoint – Stop turb.
stop_turbine
real presetpoint = real setpoint - preset (or
preset slowing)
Time
Turbine
Output
Coarse Feed
Output
Fine Feed
Output
(if automatic correction is not 0, the automatic correction value must be added to
after flow value, if external correction is enabled, the external correction value (p.e.
from check-weighter) must be added to after flow value,)

Example:
xx.01 Set nominal = 25.00 kg
xx.02 Preset = 2.00 kg
xx.03 Afterflow = 0.50 kg
xx.07 Stop Turb. = 0.40 kg
(xx.55 Stop Turb.Tim = 5 sec.)
Nominal = 25.00
Weight
Afterflow
real setpoint = set - afterflow = 24.50
0.50 Stop Turb.
depress.point = real setpoint – stop_turb. 0.40
=24.10
Preset 2.00
real presetp. =
(Turbine stops for tim depressuring
real setpoint - preset = 22.50
seconds)
Time
Turbine
Output
Coarse Feed
Output
(
Fine Feed
Output

COPY OF RECIPES
From MAIN MENU press COPY RECIPE, the display shows:
Insert the number from 1 to 32 of the recipe from wich it is desired to copy the
parameters and confirm with the “” key, insert the number 0 for exit from the
function.
The display will show :
" to recipe __"
Insert the number from 1 to 32 of the recipe to which it is desired to duplicate the
parameters and confirm with the “” key, insert the number 99 for copy the source
parameter s in all other tables.
During the copy the display will show:
" Wait!"
and the function will be proposed again.
MINI STATISTICS
The function allows the control of the instrument accuracy, during the start up of the
plant.
From MAIN MENU press STATIS, the display shows
- standard deviation (s) -mean value (x) -number of samples
- maximum value (M) - minimum value (m) - range (r)
The statistics are cleared automatically at each power on or change of recipe. Press
a key to exit.

SYSTEM BATCHING PARAMETERS
From MAIN MENU press OPTIONS, the display shows the soft keyboard:
Insert the User Password and confirm with “◄┘”, then the display shows the choice
between System parameters and flash memory utility :
Press the “◄┘” (ENTER), then the first parameter (81 Minimum Weight) is ready to
enter and/or modify.

ROTARY TURBINE SYSTEM BATCHING PARAMETERS
Code Parameter Udm Range Step Default

PR.81 Minimum Weight kg 0-10 0.02 4.00
PR.82 Pre-batching threshold kg 0-10 0.02 5.00
PR.83 Bag broken check threshold kg 0-10 0.02 2.00
PR.87 Emptying delay s 0-999 0.1 0.0
PR.88 Wrong bag delay s 0-99.99 0.01 0.8
PR.89 Wrong Tollerance Discharging 0-2 0
mode
PR.90 Wrong bag mode 0-1 0
PR.91 Correction count 1-64 1 8
PR.93 Display mode 0-1 1
PR.84 Correction Coefficient 0-1 0.01 0.5
PR.85 Correction Maximum Value kg 0-10 0.02 1.0
PR.86 Correction Minimum Value kg 0-10 0.02 1.0
PR.92 Delay number for 0-99 1 8
autocorrection effective
PR.94 Minimum Weight at Start kg 0-10 0.02 -1.0
PR.95 Maximum Weight at Start kg 0-10 0.02 +1.0
PR.93 Display Mode 0-1 1
PR.100 Speaker enable 0-1 1
PR.101 Enable Check presence of 0-1 0
bag
PR.102 Enable Fill Button on 0-1 0
Controller Main Page
PR.103 Enable break begin filling 0-1 0
cycle if gross weight is out of
Pr.94 and Pr.95
0-1 0
PR.90 Module address num 00-99 1 0 1)
Note 1) Not editable

DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM BATCH PARAMETERS
Code Parameter Description
PR.81 Minimum Weight It indicates the gross weight limit at which at the beginning of the
filling cycle tare can still be calculated. (currently not used)
PR.82 Pre-batching It indicates the net weight limit at which the pre-batching filling
threshold ends and start the filling cycle. It defines also the end of cycle
threshold after bag ejection
PR.83 Bag broken check It indicates the loss of net weight in one second at which the bag
threshold is considered broken
PR.87 Emptying delay Delay for start automatic emptying cycle
PR.88 Wrong bag delay Delay from ejection command to ejection cycle for bags out of
tolerance (related to Wrong bag mode parameter)
PR.89 Wrong Bag 0 = at the first wrong bag, ejection starts and an alarm (BAG
Tollerance OUT OF LIMIT) is displayed!!
discharge mode 1 = at the first wrong bag, ejection starts in the WASTE
POSITION (FUTURE INPUT) and an alarm (BAG OUT OF
LIMIT) is displayed!!
2 = at the first wrong bag, filling stops with BLOCKED OUT OF
TOLER! Alarm. Ejection may done only with soft key EJECT
command.
PR.90 Wrong bag mode 0 = Enable PR.89: Wrong Bag discharge mode
1 = after 3 consecutive wrong bags,filling stops with BLOCKED
OUT OF TOLER! Alarm. Ejection may done only with soft key
EJECT command.
PR.91 Correction count It indicates the number of bags (N) involved into the automatic
correction, if enabled.
The error of each batch will be added to N batches and a
correction will be applied to next N batches according to the
following formula:
Err1 + Err2 .. + ErrN
Correction = Correc.Factor x ----------------------------
N
PR.84 Correction It indicates the Correc.Factor of the preceding formula
Coefficient
PR.85 Correction It indicates the the Maximum positive value for the correction
Maximum Value value: when this limit is reached, an alarm (CORRECTION
LIMIT!!) is displayed
PR.86 Correction It indicates the the Maximum negative value for the correction
Minimum Value value: when this limit is reached, an alarm (CORRECTION
LIMIT!!) is displayed
PR.92 Delay Number for It indicates the number of bags (N) before the autocorrection
Autocorrection becomes effective
Effective
PR.94 Minimum Weight It indicates the minimum gross weight at start of cycle: if the
at Start weight is lower an alarm (BLOCKED BAG WEIGHT) is displayed
and the cycle is blocked.

PR.95 Maximum It indicates the maximum gross weight at start of cycle:if the
Weight at Start weight is upper, an alarm (BLOCKED BAG WEIGHT) is
displayed and the cycle is blocked.
PR.93 Display mode 0 = standard font for weight figures
1 = seven segment like font
PR.83 Bag broken It indicates the loss of net weight in one second at which the bag
check threshold is considered broken
PR.100 Speaker enable 0 = speaker disabled
1 = speaker enabled when soft key is pressed
PR.101 Blocked Bag 1= Enable Check blocked bag
check enable 0= Blocked Bag not checked
PR.102 Fill Button 1=Fill Button is displayed on main page of controller
enable 0=Fill Button not displayed
PR.103 Enable break 1=Break cycle is enabled if gross weight is out of Pr.94 and Pr.9
begin filling 0=Break cycle is not enable, only message “No Tare, Out Limit”
cycle 5 is display
PR.90 Module address Module address for Modbus net (Not Editable here)

FLASH UTILITY
The utilities are :

copy data from cmos battery ram to flash memory
copy data from flash memory to cmos battery ram
Function is usefull for saving all parameters stored in battery memory to the flash as
backup purpose.
From MAIN MENU press OPTIONS, the display shows the soft keyboard:
Insert the User Password and confirm with “◄┘”, then the display shows the choice
between System parameters and Flash memory utility :
Press the ALPHA (.) key , then the display shows.
Press the Up arrow key to copy the content of cmos into flash,
Press the Down arrow to copy the content of flash to cmos. A message indicating the
successful of the operation is displayed, then press a key to exit.

DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
The utility display some useful parameters and the complete status of the Modbus
Communication Registers.
From MAIN MENU press the invisible soft key between TEST and MAINTENANCE:
the display shows the diagnostics page:
Please remember the position of the followings soft keys on the menu page:
EJECT, OPTIONS and EXIT
The actual display of modbus registers start from 0 to 110, press the EJECT zone for
browsing the other modbus registers. Press the EXIT zone to leaving the diagnostics,
press the OPTIONS zone to clear the modbus error (pc), test(all) and interrupts
processing time.

The meaning of the page labels is:
Modbus Diagnostics
Stat: is the actual status of MODBUS communication:
0: Disabled
1: Setup for Sending Data
2: Sending data buffer
3: Sending CRC word
4: Waiting for End of Sending Protocol
5: Setup for Data Receiving
6: Waiting for 1’ Receiving byte
7: Receiving data buffer
8: Waiting for End of Receiving Protocol
Timer: Internal timer for tri-state line driver enable/disable
Error: MODBUS error code:

0: OK
1: Overcome receiving buffer
2: Message received with less than 4 bytes
3: Modbus function not supported
4: CRC Error on functions 1->8
5: Wrong Message size on functions 1-->8
6: CRC Error on function 16
5: Wrong Message size on function 16
T.intchr: Inter-characters time (milliseconds)
All: Test Flag:

1: Overcome Modbus register memory space
2: Number of function words more than 125
3: Number of function words equal to zero
N.Rx.b: Number of received bytes
N.tx.b: Number of transmitted bytes
N.to.tx: Number of bytes to be transmit
N.Anal: Number of analyzed data
add: Modbus address
Fnc: Modbus function number
add-reg: register address
num: Number of r/w registers
crc: CRC received

Follows the registers contents, arranged on 12 lines from 10 data word
(total 120 word 16 bit ), with browsing capability (EJECT zone) and displayed in
hexadecimal format.
buff.rx: the first 8 byte received are displayed (hexadecimal format)
crc: CRC received
aw0, nw0: internal flags
buff.tx: the first 8 byte transmitted are displayed (hexadecimal format)
pc: Internal flags
aw1, nw1: internal flags
Power Supply and Load Cells Converter Diagnostics

2.5(V) : must be 2.5 V +- 5% (2.38  2.62 V)
3.3(V) : must be 3.3 V +- 5% (3.14  3.46 V)
led_(V) : must be 28 V +- 10% (25.2  30.8 V)
+24(V) : must be 24 V +- 15% (20.4  27.6 V)
ref-(V) : must be 0 V (-0.050  +0.050 V)
ref+(V) : must be 5 V +- 10% (4.5  5.5 V)
cnv(ppm): load cell converter value (see also Converter Monitor chapter)
BT : Ram Cmos Battery (1 = ok)
Interrupt Diagnostics
Measure of processing time of interrupt routines:

(all times are microseconds)
Interrupt 0 called every 62 us

lnterrupt 1 called every 200 us
lnterrupt 2 called every 2500 us
med0 max0 min0: respectively average, maximum, minimum time of interrupt 0


TEST UTILITY
The test utilities are used at factory site for the complete test of the electronics:
From MAIN MENU press TEST, the display shows the soft keyboard:
Enter the Calibration password, confirm with " ◄┘ ". The display shows:
Tests are carried by using a pc connected with RS232 serial line of the device.
ZEROING DEVICE WITH TARE FUNCTION
It is possible to subtract the gross weight from the load manually using the Tare
pushbutton. The command is only executed in scale still conditions. It zeroes the
weight display and lights the Net weight icon indicating that the display shows net
weight. Tare subtraction applies to the entire scale, and is determined with the
precision of the internal counters, greater than 10 per visible division.
With tare entered, and any load applied, to display the current tare value, press the
User message. To pressing Exact zero or Gross/Net icons cancels the tare and
returns to gross weight condition, ( see Display, Control and Setting Device) The tare
value is automatically entered at begin of the load filling execution cycle and is
automatically zeroed at the end of the load filling execution cycle, when the weight
returns to below the PR.82.Pre-batching threshold.

CALIBRATION MENU
Press the Software version soft key immediately after switching the instrument on,
when the software version is displayed, and hold it down until the display shows:
Enter the Calibration password, confirm with " ◄┘ "
The Calibration Menu message” appears on the display:

INITIAL ZEROING
From the CALIBRATION MENU Press “0” to carry out initial zero. The message “Are
you sure? (1,y )” appears, confirm with “1” key. This cancels any pre-load (Dead
Load).
The messages “DEAD LOAD SETTING” and “STORE PARAMETERS” appears in
confirmation.
It is only possible to zero AFTER calibration, as a zero adjustment. The instrument

must be calibrated with a point at 0, otherwise the error message described below
appears.
The initial zero range is equal to 10% of maximum load capacity.
If this value is exceeded, zeroing is not possible and the Dead Load message
“DEADLOAD ERROR” appears on the display.

CONVERTER MONITOR
From the CALIBRATION MENU Press “6”, the display shows the converter value:
Converter unfiltered, converter filtered
Remember :
1. the converter value with 0 mV signal input (for instance with a load cell connected
but without dead load) is about 500.000,
2. The converter with 10mV signal input is about 999.999, this value is for instance
a signal of load cell with full load applied and factor of 2mV/V.
3. If the load cell has 200kg full scale and 2mV/V, typical converter values are:
Converter value Weight applied (kg)

500.000 (+/- 5%) 0
625.000 (+/- 5%) 50
750.000 (+/- 5%) 100
875.000 (+/- 5%) 150
999.999 (+/- 5%) 200
The function serves for carrying out test on the converter. To exit the procedure
press "◄┘" key.

REFERENCE CONVERTER VOLTAGE MONITOR
From the CALIBRATION MENU Press “7”, the display shows:

Check number in division, in difference from the last weight calibration
Reference voltage unfiltered, ref. voltage filtered
The reference voltage is a test voltage to check the amplifier and converter. This test
is carried for making the converter check number.
Typical value are from 989.000 to 990.300. This value is stored in flash during the
calibration of the weight.
To exit the procedure press "◄┘" key, after few seconds, display shows the check
number again, maximum allowed from +1.0 to –1.0 divisions:

GENERAL SCALE PARAMETERS
The general scale parameters are:

1) software RC filter
2) tracking enable
3) Module address
From the CALIBRATION MENU Press “8”, the display shows the filter:
RC Filter
Edit/modify the software RC filter, typical values are from 0.8s to 1.2s for best filling
accuracy , depending of the plant site. Confirm with "◄┘".
Zero tracking
Next parameter is zero tracking enable, press the arrow up and down keys to modify
and confirm with "◄┘". with zero tracking enabled (value = 1), zero maintenance
only operates with the scale still and in the tracking band less than or equal to 0.5
divisions/second.
Zero tracking is active in the range between -1% and +3% of maximum load
capacity.
Module Address
The last parameter is “Module Address”, the modbus protocol address, insert/modify
the address (from 0 - 255) and confirm with "◄┘".

SCALE CALIBRATION
From the CALIBRATION MENU, push the pushbotton in the rear panel, by acting
with a thin tool and gently pressing the button inside the hole marked PROG..
The message “Are you sure? (1,y )” appears, confirm with “1” key.
Display shows the internal self-calibration value, expressed in converter numbers

and between 499.900 and 500.100. Check if this figure is correct:
Press "◄┘", the reference voltage value appears on the display, expressed in
converter numbers and between 989.000 and 990.000. Check if this figure is correct:
Press "◄┘", the internal converter value appears on the display, expressed in
numbers in the range between 500.000 and 999.999. If the scale is empty, the
converter number is between 600.000 and 800.000, if it is loaded with weight equal
to full scale, the converter number is between 700.000 and 900.000 (see
CONVERTER MONITOR).

The operator can calibrate 2 points, zero and full scale. The zero point must be
calibrated, whereas the full scale point is not mandatory. Remember that the
calibration is more precise the greater is the distance between the two extremes.
Do not set two points that are to near to each other: the distance must be greater
than 150 division otherwise, when exiting the procedure, the caption “ERRPR2”
appears indicating that calibration is incorrect.
For the calibration, the program offers a series of values that are easy to set:
0 kg, 20 kg.
However, any value in kg may be set with the soft keyboard, press "◄┘" and
proceed as follows:
a) "PNT 1", or calibration point 1, appears on the display:
Press "◄┘" and the value 0 is proposed:
Unload the scale, and confirm the sample value 0,

press "◄┘", the message “Wait no motion” appears, while the instrument searches
for perfect weight stabilization before assuming the value.
b) "PNT 2", or calibration point 2, appears on the display:

Press "◄┘" and the value 20 is proposed:
Modify or enter the sample weight value, load the scale with the sample weight,
press "◄┘", the message “Wait no motion” appears on the display.
“STORE PARAMETERS” then appears on the display for a few seconds while the
processor writes the parameters onto the FLASH memory, calculates the
CHECKSUM and saves the result on the FLASH.
The values stored on the FLASH memory are read each time the instrument is
switched on, and the CHECKSUM value is checked. If there is no correspondence,
the message “ERRPR2” appears on the display.
LOADING DEFAULT RECIPES DATA AND PARAMETERS
From the CALIBRATION MENU press “9”. The message “Are you sure? (1,y )”
appears, confirm with “1” key.
Display shows “Load Defaults” for few seconds.

VERIFICATION STANDARDS
VERIFICATION
The following table reports the maximum permissible deviation for each fill, in
accordance with OIML R61 (2004 Ed.), for the foreseen tests during the first and
periodic verification:
Batch weight Maximum allowed discard for each weight from the
(g) preset value
Class X(1) First Verification Periodic Verification
F ≤ 50 7.2 % 9%
50 < F ≤ 100 3.6 g 4.5 g
100 < F ≤ 200 3.6 % 4.5 %
200 < F ≤ 300 7.2 g 9g
300 < F ≤ 500 2.4% 3%
500 < F ≤ 1000 12 g 15 g
1000 < F ≤ 10000 1.2 % 1.5 %
10000 <F ≤ 15000 120 g 150 g
15000 < F ≤ 0.8% 1%
Table 1
In the system verification procedure the weight of the following number of fills are
measured, depending on the preset value (Fp):
Fp ≤ 1 kg 60 fills
1 kg < Fp ≤ 10 kg 30 fills
10 kg < Fp ≤ 25 kg 20 fills
25 kg < Fp 10 fills
Table 2
The scale used to measure the dose weights has to have a suitable definition value,
equal to at least 1/3 of the maximum allowed discard (difference between batch
weight and the preset value). Such a scale has to be previously verified by the use of
certified sample weights so as to prove the correct conditions.

DR16 MODULE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTACTS
INPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1

1 (i0.0) Start proxy switch (bag hold)
2 (i0.1) Bag Discharge
3 (i0.2) Blocked Bag Sensor
4 (i0.3) Motor Over Load (breaker)
5 (i0.4) Sort1
6 (i0.5) Sort2
7 (i0.6) Feedback Enable
8 (i0.7) Reset
OUTPUTS DR16 - CAN ADD 1

1 (q0.0) Motor On (Turbine)
2 (q0.1 Bag Discharge
3 (q0.2) Spout Ready
4 (q0.3) Bag Hold
5 (q0.4) Coarse Feed
6 (q0.5) Fine Feed & Impeller Aeration
7 (q0.6) Nozzle Aeration
8 (q0.7) Timed Fluidification

RS422 SERIAL LINE CONNECTION (Modbus Jbus Protocol)
19200 baud, 8 data bit, parity even, 1 stop bit
Connection:
EFS100TS HOST
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX- RX-
0V 0V
GND
Connection of terminating resistors, last partner in multidrop line

EFS100TS
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
TE+
47 ohm
RX+ RX+
270 ohm
RX- RX-
330 ohm
0V 0V

LOAD CELL CONNECTION
LOAD CELL Load cell Load Cell Sartorius

Connector HBM Z6…. MP47/22C3
+EXC Blue Red
+SENSE Green (connect to +EXC)
+VIN White Green
-VIN Red Blue
-SENSE Grey (connect to -EXC)
-EXC Black White
SHIELD Shield Shield (Black)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ANALOGUE DATA
END SCALE SENSITIVITY : 5  20 mV.

PTB SENSITIVITY : 1.6 µV/div. per 4000 divisions.
OILM SENSITIVITY : 0.4 µV/div. per 12000 divisions.
INPUT IMPEDANCE : 1000 M typical.
POLARIZATION CURRENT : ±5 nA MAX over full temperature range.
ZERO STABILITY : 5 ppM/K MAX.
AMPLIFICATION STABILITY : 3 ppM/K MAX.
INPUT NOISE : 0.3 µV peak-to-peak no integration,
decreases as per √n, where n = number of
conversions.
NOISE SUPPRESSION 50/60 Hz : 110 dB.
INPUT FILTER : pass band 10 Hz.
INPUT PROTECTION : -0.5 VDC to +5.5 VDC max.
LOAD CELL POWER SUPPLY : 5 VDC.
MAXIMUM LOAD CELL CURRENT : 250 mA ( 16 x 350 ).
SENSE CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE : 500 K min.
CELL DEAD LOAD COMPENSATION : with digital calibration.
AMPLIFICATION CALIBRATION : digital adjustment without potentiometers,
calibration data saved in case of power out.
Internal jumper protects calibration.
NON-LINEARITY : ± 0.003% of end scale.
A/D CONVERSION SYSTEM : 24-bit sigma-delta, with reference and self-
zeroing.
CONVERSION FREQUENCY : 200 conversions per second.
RESOLUTION : 4000 divisions displayed,
1000000 internal counts.

DISPLAY SPECIFICATIONS
DISPLAY Graphic for displaying weight and operator

messages:
- overload condition
- underload condition
- power supply alarm condition
- converter alarm condition
- cycle alarm condition
- programming parameters
Extracted tare condition icon
Exact zero condition icon
No motion weight condition icon
INCREMENT 0.02 Kg
USABLE FIGURES 4 significant figures, displayed with single
decimal point.
OVERLOAD If reading exceeds end scale tolerance,
shows “Overrange”
UNDERLOAD If reading is negative by over 50 divisions,
indicates “Underrange”.
AUTOMATIC ZERO TRACKING Corrects zero shift within established limits
(-1%, +3%); may be disabled.
TARE SETTING 100% of capacity, subtractive, gross weight
taken as tare.
COMMUNICATION
2 CAN-BUS CHANNEL For connection to I/O remotes.

1 RS422/485 SERIAL CHANNEL For connections to Host Computers.
1 RS232 SERIAL CHANNEL For connection to printer and firmware
download.
1 RS485 SERIAL CHANNEL For connections to devices (encoder)
POWER SUPPLY
MAINS VOLTAGE 24 Vdc

STABILIZED VOLTAGE 5.5 Vdc stabilized internal power supply
5.0 Vdc on card
5.0 Vdc at load cell
CURRENT 300 mA mean, depending on load cells
1000 mA maximum.
POWER SUPPLY ALARM THRESHOLD 5.3 Vdc stabilized power supply.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
WORKING TEMPERATURE from -10 to +55 °C

STORAGE TEMPERATURE from -20 to +70 °C
HUMIDITY from 10 to 90% no dew point

ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS AND COMPONENTS
The EFS100TS automatic gain-in-weight batching system consists of a
microprocessor unit with display, keyboard and input/output converter module.
The converter card is a model "EF10TS".
The card set is contained in a galvanized iron casing with a plastic rear frame that
carries the graphic display (see below). Connectors through the casing are provided
to the rear for the power supply, the load cell and serial communication port.
Plate 1 – EXPLODED VIEW OF DISPLAY AND CONVERTER CARD
Front panel
4.3" LCD TFT color display with Touch Screen Rear casing
EF10 Converter card

Plate 2 – EQUIPMENT INTERNAL CARD WIRING
Internal frame
EF10 Converter card
4.3" LCD TFT color display with Touch Screen

Plate 3 - EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL WIRING
Load cell wire

Grounding connection
RS485 serial
RS232 serial
RS422/485 serial
EFS100TS back panel
24 V dc power supply
CANBUS cable
Digital input-output DR16 module
Calibration push button (for Legal for Trade software version)

PANEL CUTOUT
117
207
Panel cutout
Frame dimension: 223 (L) x 133 (H) mm

PANEL FIXING
1 – Insert the plastic plug with his screw in the lateral slits in horizzontal position.
2 – Turn the plug until it reaches the vertical position
3 – close the screw clockwise until the panel fixing is assured. To avoid structure
deformation do not exceed in tightening the screw. Suggested tightening < 30cNm.

PASSWORDS
User password: 321

Calibration password: 336600

Fillpac R 12 Spout

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Fillpac R 12 Spout

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fillpac R 12 Spout

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BEUMER fillpac

Original Operating Instructions

Machine Type Fillpac R 12 Spout

Machine No. 665PM1 & 665PM2

JOTINDRA STEEL & TUBES LTD.

Customer No. 615-450003

Issue Date 2016-02-15

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 1 / 85

1.0 02.10.2013 Venkat First version

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 3 / 85

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 5 / 85

Document History .............................................................................................3

1 Important safety instructions ................................................................11

2 Technical data .........................................................................................17

3 Technical description .............................................................................19

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 7 / 85

4.2.4 Lifting equipment ...................................................................................... 35

5 Installation instructions .........................................................................37

7 Maintenance and Repair.........................................................................65

8 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 9 / 85

1 Important safety instructions

Pass the operating instructions on to any other owners or users.

Before starting operation

Maintenance of safety standards

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 11 / 85

1.2 Structure of safety instructions

12 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

1.3 Intended use

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 13 / 85

1.4 Safety marking

Risk of injury, maintenance Warning of electric shock

Fig. 1: "Risk of injury, maintenance (27900)" Fig. 2: "Electric shock (27529)"

Risk of injury, compressed air Shearing danger, stretch wrapper

14 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

1.5 Operating personnel

1.5.2 Maintenance personnel

1.5.3 Skilled electrician

1.5.4 Training measures

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 15 / 85

The machine must only be operated by trained operating personnel.

16 / 85 V. : 1.0 665PM1 & 665PM2

Ambient temperature +13 °C to +45 °C

Place of installation in the building

2.1.2 Electrotechnical data

Rated voltage for electromechanic transmitters DC 24 V

Rated voltage for electronic transmitters DC 24 V

Permissible voltage fluctuation ± 10 %

2.1.3 Compressed air data

Input pressure 10 bar

2.1.4 Filling material

Grain size 0 - 1 mm, 3400 - 5000 Blaine

Max. steady-state temperature of the material 80 °C

Moisture of material 0,5 %

Package length 300 - 650 mm

Package width 300 - 480 mm

Bag valve width 80 -200 mm

665PM1 & 665PM2 V. : 1.0 17 / 85

2.2 Machine parameters